Home
ACS550-01/U1 Drive User`s Manual
Contents
1. X1 Drive Control Terminal Description 1 SCR Terminal for signal cable screen Connected internally to chassis ground 2 Alt Analog input channel 1 programmable Default external reference Resolution 0 1 accuracy 1 J1 Al1 OFF 0 2 10 V Rj 312 kQ 2 p gt J1 Al1 ON 0 4 20 mA R 100 Q o gt AGND Analog input circuit common Connected internally to chassis gnd through 1 MQ 10 V_ 10 V 10 mA reference voltage output for analog input potentiometer accuracy 2 Q Al2 Analog input channel 2 programmable Default PID feedback Resolution 0 126 D accuracy 1 g J1 Al2 OFF 0 2 10 V Ri 312 kQ 2 p gt lt FF J1 Al2 ON 0 4 20 mA R 100 Q o gt 6 AGND Analog input circuit common Connected internally to chassis gnd through 1 MQ 7 AO1 Analog output programmable Default frequency 0 20 mA load lt 500 9 8 AO2 Analog output programmable Default current 0 20 mA load lt 500 Q 9 AGND Analog output circuit common Connected internally to chassis gnd through 1 MQ 10 24V_ Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 250 mA reference to GND Short circuit protected 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common Connected internally as floating 12 DCOM Digital input common To activate a digital input there must be 2410 V or lt 10 V between that
2. po H H3 O o X0031 IP 21 UL type 1 Outside Dimensions by Frame Size R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 Ref mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in 125 49 125 49 203 8 0 203 8 0 265 10 4 300 11 8 H 330 13 0 430 16 9 490 19 2 596 23 4 602 23 7 700 27 6 H3 369 14 5 469 18 5 583 23 0 689 27 1 736 29 0 880 34 6 D 212 8 3 222 8 7 231 9 1 262 10 3 286 11 3 400 15 8 aT SM EJ H3 _w D IP 54 UL type 12 Outside Dimensions by Frame Size Ref R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in Ww 213 84 213 84 257 10 1 257 10 1 369 145 410 16 1 w2 222 8 7 222 8 7 267 10 5 267 10 5 369 145 410 16 1 H3 461 18 2 561 22 1 629 24 8 760 29 9 776 30 5 924 36 4 D 234 9 2 246 9 7 254 10 0 285 11 2 309 12 2 423 16 6 Technical Data 244 Degrees of Protection Available enclosures ACH550 UH User s Manual e IP 21 ULtype 1 enclosure The site must be free of airborne dust corrosive gases or liquids and conductive contaminants such as condensation carbon dust and metallic particles e IP 54 UL type 12 enclosure This enclosure provides protection from airborne dust and light sprays or splashing water from all directions Compared to the IP 21 UL type 1 enclosur
3. ACH550 Modbus z 7 Ref Internal Location Standard Profile ABB DRIVES Alternate Profile ACH550 All Profiles 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE 0 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE 1 00001 CONTROL WORD BitO OFF1 STOP 00002 CONTROL WORD Bit 1 OFF2 START 00003 CONTROL WORD Bit 2 OFF3 REVERSE 00004 CONTROL WORD Bit3 START LOCAL 00005 CONTROL WORD Bit4 N A RESET 00006 CONTROL WORD Bit 5 RAMP HOLD EXT2 00007 CONTROL WORD Bit 6 RAMP IN ZERO RUN DISABLE 00008 CONTROL WORD Bit7 RESET STPMODE R 00009 CONTROL WORD Bit 8 N A STPMODE EM 00010 CONTROL WORD Bit 9 N A STPMODE C 00011 CONTROL WORD Bit 10 N A RAMP 2 00012 CONTROL WORD Bit 11 EXT2 RAMP OUT 0 00013 CONTROL WORD Bit 12 N A RAMP_HOLD 00014 CONTROL WORD Bit 13 N A RAMP_IN_O 00015 CONTROL WORD Bit 14 N A REQ LOCALLOCK 00016 CONTROL WORD Bit 15 N A TORQLIM2 00017 Reserved Reserved Reserved 00032 00033 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 1 00034 Relay Output 2 Relay Output 2 Relay Output 2 00035 Relay Output 3 Relay Output 3 Relay Output 3 00036 Relay Output 4 Relay Output 4 Relay Output 4 Serial Communication EFB 158 ACH550 UH User s Manual ACH550 Modbus z z Ref Internal Location Standard Profile ABB DRIVES Alternate Profile ACH550 All Profiles 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE 0 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE 1 00037 Relay Output 5 Relay Output 5 Rela
4. 241 Drive Heat Loss Air Flow ACH550 UH Frame Size BTU Hr m3 h ft min 077A 4 R5 1295 4420 168 99 096A 4 R5 1440 4915 168 99 124A 4 R6 1940 6621 405 238 157A 4 R6 2310 7884 405 238 180A 4 R6 2810 9590 405 238 Air Flow 208 240 Volt Drives The following table lists heat loss and air flow data for 208 240 Volt drives Drive Heat Loss Air Flow ACH550 UH Frame Size BTU Hr m3 h ft min 04A6 2 R1 55 189 44 26 06A6 2 R1 73 249 44 26 07A5 2 R1 81 276 44 26 012A 2 R1 116 404 44 26 017A 2 R1 161 551 44 26 024A 2 R2 227 776 88 52 031A 2 R2 285 373 88 52 046A 2 R3 420 1434 134 79 059A 2 R3 536 1829 134 79 075A 2 R4 671 2290 280 165 088A 2 R4 786 2685 280 165 114A 2 R4 1014 3463 280 165 143A 2 R6 1268 4431 405 238 178A 2 R6 1575 5379 405 238 221A 2 R6 1952 6666 405 238 248A 2 R6 2189 7474 405 238 Dimensions and Weights The dimensions and mass for the ACH550 depend on the frame size and enclosure type If unsure of frame size first find the Type code on the drive labels Then look up that type code in the Technical Data on page 225 to determine the frame size A complete set of dimensional drawings for ACH550 drives is located in the ACH550 Technical Reference manual Technical Data 242 ACH550 UH User s Manual Mounting Dimensions W1 pe See Detail A 88 Q U n n ft See Detail B AO ka 5 Detail A Detail B x0
5. 103 temperature data parameter 53 weight 242 drive on time data parameters 55 E earth fault fault code a 214 Parameter ni ede AG Shs NAG 98 earthing see ground efficiency 240 embedded field bus see comm EFB 251 EMC CE matking eee eee 246 C Tick marking a 246 AA AA AA 236 motor cable requirements 234 emergency deceleration time parameter 89 stop deviceS 222000005 230 stop select parameter 87 enclosure protection class code 9 encoder err fault code 215 environment second definition 247 envoronment first definition a 247 error value inversion PID parameter 116 exception codes EFB modbus 162 external comm module parameter group 125 external commands selection parameter 61 external control selection parameter 63 external fault automatic reset parameter 100 fault codes a 214 parameters wi a paaa ka Na LA KG 96 external reference data parameter 53 F fan maintenance 222 fault CODES NAUNA tye aad RB NB Aa 213 comm failure EFB 151 comm FBA oe eee eee 200 current at history parameter 60 digital input status at history parameter 60 frequency at history parameter
6. IEC NEC Based on Based on EN 60204 1 and IEC 60364 5 2 2001 NEC Table 310 16 for copper wires PVC insulation e 90 C 194 F wire insulation 30 C 86 F ambient temperature 40 C 104 F ambient temperature 70 C 158 F surface temperature Not more than three current carrying Cables with concentric copper shield conductors in raceway or cable or earth directly buried Not more than nine cables laid on cable ladder f 7 side by side e Copper cables with concentric copper shield Max Max Load Cu Cable Load AlCable Max Load Cu Wire Size Current mm Current mm A AWG kemil A A 14 3x1 5 61 3x25 22 8 14 20 3x2 5 75 3x35 27 3 12 27 3x4 91 3x50 36 4 10 34 3x6 117 3x70 50 1 8 47 3x10 143 3x95 68 3 6 62 3x16 165 3x120 86 5 4 79 3x25 191 3x150 100 3 98 3x35 218 3x185 118 2 119 3x50 257 3x240 137 1 153 3x70 274 3x 3x50 155 1 0 186 3x95 285 2x 3x95 178 2 0 215 3x120 205 3 0 Technical Data ACH550 UH User s Manual 231 IEC NEC Based on EN 60204 1 and IEC 60364 5 2 2001 PVC insulation 30 C 86 F ambient temperature 70 C 158 F surface temperature Cables with concentric copper shield Not more than nine cables laid on cable ladder side by side Based on e NEC Table 310 16 for copper wires e 90 C 194 F wire insulation e 40 C 104 F ambient temperature e Not more than three current carrying
7. Serial Communication EFB ACH550 UH User s Manual 181 FLN Drive I O Report Point Subpoint Name Data Type 45 LDO RO6 COMMAND 46 LAO AO 1 COMMAND 47 LAO AO 1 COMMAND 70 LDI DI 1 ACTUAL 71 LDI DI2 ACTUAL 72 LDI DI3 ACTUAL 73 LDI DI4 ACTUAL 74 LDI DI5 ACTUAL 75 LDI DI6 ACTUAL 76 LDI RO 1 ACTUAL 77 LDI RO2 ACTUAL 78 LDI RO3 ACTUAL 79 LDI RO 4 ACTUAL 80 LDI RO 5 ACTUAL 81 LDI RO 6 ACTUAL Drive Config FLN Drive Config Report Point Subpoint Name Data Type 30 LAO CURRENT LIM Each host FLN application e g CIS or Insight controls both the particular data reported for each point and the 31 LAO ACCEL TIME 1 report format 32 LAO DECEL TIME 1 48 LDO RST RUN TIME 49 LDO RESET KWH 59 LDO LOCK PANEL 66 LDO SPD OUT MIN 67 LDO SPD OUT MAX 95 LAO MBOX PARAM 96 LAO MBOX DATA 97 LDO MBOX READ 98 LDO MBOX WRITE Serial Communication EFB ACH550 UH User s Manual FLN Process PID Report Data Each host FLN application e g CIS or Insight controls both the particular data reported for each point and the report format FLN External PID Report Data 182 Process PID Point F E Ty Subpoint Name 15 LAI
8. 120 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 40 Process PID Set 1 Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 Sets the maximum value for ACT2 e See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 4022 SLEEP SELECTION 6 7 0 Defines the control for the PID sleep function 0 NOT SEL Disables the PID sleep control function 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for the PID sleep function Activating the digital input activates the sleep function e De activating the digital input restores PID control 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for the PID sleep function e See DI1 above 7 INTERNAL Defines the output rpm frequency process reference and process actual value as the control for the PID sleep function Refer to parameters 4025 WAKE UP DEV and 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for the PID sleep function e De activating the digital input activates the sleep function e Activating the digital input restores PID control 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for the PID sleep function e See DI1 INV above 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL 0 0 120 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz 0 7200 rpm 1 rpm Sets the motor speed frequency that enables the PID sleep function a motor speed frequency below this level for at least the time period 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY enables the
9. 86 inhibit parameter a 87 parameter group aaa 86 torque boost current parameter 87 start mode automati A sock aaa Dp paa kA Pd A 86 automatic torque boost 86 DC magnetizing a 86 flying start a 86 starting order counter 135 start up MAGO SA ba AA NAN nan PONKAN 20 motor data aaa seene AG An NAN 20 COMING pene Seca dak lace Kal Maan a BN 21 start up assistant 000055 23 start up data parameter group 51 start stop parameter group 86 start stop dir parameter group 61 state diagram comm EFB eee eee 167 comm ABB drives 206 station id RS232 parameter 127 status at fault history parameter 60 status word ABB drives FBA description 204 comm EFB definition 164 BB Anna KANAL AN NAO a Wud avatar ete NG 195 FBA generic profile 210 stop aux motor delay 000 132 aux motor PFA parameters 132 DC brake time parameter 86 DC current ref parameter 86 emergency devices 230 emergency select parameter 87 flux braking parameter 93 function parameter 86 parameter group a 86 supervision parameter group 101 parameter
10. Panel REF1 aaa pais ia BEA P1101 Panel REF 2 P1106 REF 4 PANEL l l PID 1 OUT 0 17 _ P1107 REF2 Hand Auto Selection REF 2 119 P1108 Sat ALT A Eee IHAND iPanel REF 1 a O a 51705 AUTO DI P1103 151104 i Al P1105 5 4 EXT 1 ae wee Jt sexs Panel Ref 2 _ PE AAO ee _ P1106 amp 12 P1106 i pA Saka 0 17 P1107 i AH pee P1108 EXT2 119 Group 11 Reference Select Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1101 KEYPAD REF SEL 1 2 1 1 Selects the reference controlled in local control mode 1 REF1 Hz rpm Reference type depends on parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE e Speed reference rpm if 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED e Frequency reference Hz if 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ 2 REF2 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 6 12 1 0 v Defines the source for selecting between the two external control locations EXT1 or ExT2 Thus defines the source for Start Stop Direction commands and reference signals 0 EXT1 Selects external control location 1 EXT1 e See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS for EXT1 s Start Stop Dir definitions e See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT for EXT1 s reference definitions 1 DI1 Assigns control to EXT1 or ExT2 based on the state of DI1 DI1 activated EXT2 DI1 de activated EXT1 2 6 DI2 DI6 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the selected digital input See DI1 above 7 EXT2 Selects external control location 2 EXT2 e See parameter 1002 EX
11. 60 functions parameter group 96 HISTORY S208 Cae sie cP eal YNG 218 history parameter group 60 last history parameter 60 NSUN da eb Peete ee 4a Saad ey aes 213 previous history parameter 60 PESO Li naaa oe na Dawes BANGAG LAG 217 reset select parameter 76 speed at history parameter 60 status at history parameter 60 time of history parameters 60 torque at history parameter 60 voltage at history parameter 60 words data parameters 58 fault code 28 serial 1 err a 154 features Na fieldbus eee 171 feedback multiplier PID parameter 119 feedback select PID parameter 118 field weakening point 04 232 Index 252 fieldbus see comm command words data parameters 56 CPI firmware revision parameter 125 parameter refresh parameter 125 ParaMelers ia a a maa dese Kawa NG 125 status words data parameters 57 status parameter 125 type parameter 000 125 fieldbus adapter see comm FBA fieldbus termination 0000 240 filter EMC RFI 0 0 00002 e eee eee 236 firmware test date parameter 103 firmware version parameter 103 first environment definition
12. 247 FLN fieldbus also see comm EFB description 179 loop gains 2c eee eee 183 point database 184 point descriptions 187 KEPONS inac ANAN NANA ee NGA 179 supported features 179 floating network warning about filters 236 warning about screws at EM1 EM3 14 warning about screws at F1 F2 15 flux braking parameter 93 flux optimization parameter 93 force trip fault code 215 frame errors count parameter 127 frame SIZE paanan a Cane a aa KPAG oe 225 free fall shipping limit a 245 frequency at fault history parameter 60 max limit parameter 84 min limit parameter 84 motor resolution aaa 232 motor specification 232 switching parameter 94 USE San eee LAPAD bh 228 G gain PID parameter 115 generic profile actual value mapping 211 actual value scaling 211 OVEIVIOW eee 210 reference scaling 210 technical data 210 GaN KE u oases Gana Selecta Kam ed NTG 12 ground cable wire requirements 231 H Neat lOSS s Matec anr iane eed kan Ada Nha 240 l id run fail fault code 214 ACH550 U
13. 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen G 142 JAN External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 110V Reference voltage 10 VDC Q 5 Al2 PID feedback 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common J1 Jumper Settings Al 7 AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA Q Al o0 2 10 V oa a Hina 8 AO2 Output current 0 4 20 mA Sp Al2 0 4 20 mA 119 AGND Analog output circuit common 40 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 147 GND Common for DI return signals L 1121DCOM1 Digital input common for all __ 743 DIi4 Start Stop Activate to start drive Uo 114 DI2 Run permissive Deactivate to stop drive P 1601 LU 115 DI3 Constant Preset speed 1 P 1202 L 116 DI4 Safety interlock 1 Deactivate to stop drive P 1608 lo 1171 D15 Safety interlock 2 Deactivate to stop drive P 1609 18 DI6 Not configured 19 RO1C Relay output 1 P 1401 20 RO1A f Default operation Ready gt 19 connected to 21 21 RO1B f 22 RO2C Relay output 2 P 1402 23 RO2A fi Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 24 RO2B M 25 RO3C Relay output 3 P 1403 26 RO3A n Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 27 RO3B Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 APPLIC MACRO 2 SUPPLYFAN 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 STARTED 4001 GAIN 0 7 1601 RUN ENABLE 2 D1
14. e See DI1 INV above Start Up 122 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 41 Process PID Set 2 This group defines second set of parameters used with the Process PID PID1 controller The operation of parameters 4101 4126 is analogous with Process PID set 1 PID1 parameters 4001 4026 PID parameter set 2 can be selected by parameter 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET Group 41 Process PID Set 2 Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4101 See 4001 4026 4126 Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 123 Group 42 External PID This group defines the parameters used for the second PID controller PID2 of ACH550 The operation of parameters 4201 4221 is analogous with Process PID set 1 PID1 parameters 4001 4021 Group 42 External PID Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4201 See 4001 4021 4221 4228 ACTIVATE 6 12 0 Defines the source for enabling the external PID function e Requires 4230 TRIM MODE 0 NOT SEL 0 NOT SEL Disables external PID control 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for enabling external PID control e Activating the digital input enables external PID control e De activating the digital input disables external PID control 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for enabling external PID control e See DI1 above 7 DRIVE RUN Defines the start command as the control f
15. Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference Applies only when at least two auxiliary constant speed motors are running See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP1 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference Applies only when at least three auxiliary constant speed motors are running See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP1 8109 START FREQ 1 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 60 0 US Sets the frequency limit used to start the first auxiliary motor The first auxiliary motor starts if e No auxiliary motors are running e ACH550 output frequency exceeds the limit f Hz A P8115 8109 1 Hz f Output frequency stays above a relaxed limit MAX 8109 1 Hz for at least the time 8115 AUX MOT START D P 8109 1 After the first auxiliary motor starts P 8109 Output frequency decreases by the value 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 P 8112 _ In effect the output of the speed regulated motor drops to compensate for the input from the auxiliary motor See figure where A 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 B Output frequency increase during the start delay C A e C Diagram showing auxiliary motor s run status as 1 frequency increases 1 On 0 Note 8109 START FREQ 1 value must be betwe
16. Serial Communication EFB ACH550 UH User s Manual e The drive is in remote REM control 163 The serial communication channel is defined as the source for controlling commands set using parameters 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS and 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL The serial communication channel used is configured to use the ABB Drive profile Either of the following Parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL 1 STD MODBUS and parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE O ABB DRIVES FBA module installed parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL 4 EXT FBA and parameters 5102 5126 configured for the ABB Drives profile The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the CONTROL WORD content ABB Drives Profile EFB CONTROL WORD Commanded Bit Name Value State Comments 0 OFF1 1 READY TO OPERATE Enter READY TO OPERATE CONTROL 5 3 0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive ramps to stop according to currently active deceleration ramp 2203 or 2205 Normal command sequence e Enter OFF1 ACTIVE e Proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks OFF2 OFF3 are active 1 OFF2 1 OPERATING Continue operation OFF2 inactive CONTROL 0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive coasts to stop Normal command sequence e Enter OFF2 ACTIVE e Proceed to SWITCHON INHIBITED 2 OFF3 1 OPERATING Continue operation OFF3 inactive CONTROL s E y 0 EMERGENCY STOP Drive stops within in time specified b
17. Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 107 Group 35 Motor Temp Meas This group defines the detection and reporting for a particular potential fault motor overheating as detected by a temperature sensor Typical connections are defined below One Sensor a la Motor kag a AGND AO1 _ AGND 10 nF Alt Motor wi iy AGND f T T Ng i an aot 10 nF A Warning IEC 60664 requires double or reinforced insulation between live parts and the surface of accessible parts of electrical equipment which are either non conductive or conductive but not connected to the protective earth To fulfil the insulation requirement connect a thermistor and other similar components to the drive s control terminals using any of these alternatives e Separate the thermistor from live parts of the motor with double reinforced insulation Protect all circuits connected to the drive s digital and analog inputs Protect against contact and insulate from other low voltage circuits with basic insulation rated for the same voltage level as the drive s main circuit Use an external thermistor relay The relay insulation must be rated for the same voltage level as the drive s main circuit Start Up 108 ACH550 UH User s Manual The figure below shows alternate thermistor connections At the motor end the cable
18. Value Setting Al reference is calculated as following C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value 50 of reference value B value C B C value 50 of reference value B value Where e C Main Reference value COMM for values 9 10 and All for values 14 17 B Correcting reference Al1 for values 9 10 and Al2 for values 14 17 Example The figure shows the reference source curves for value settings 9 10 and 14 17 where e C 25 e P 4012 SETPOINT MIN O e P4013 SETPOINT MAX O B varies along the horizontal axis 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT 1000 0 1000 0 0 1 40 0 Sets a constant value used for the process reference e Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 4012 SETPOINT MIN 500 0 500 0 0 1 0 0 Sets the minimum value for the reference signal source See parameter 4010 4013 SETPOINT MAX 500 0 500 0 0 1 100 0 Sets the maximum value for the reference signal source See parameter 4010 4014 FBK SEL 1 10 1 1 Defines the PID controller feedback actual signal e You can define a combination of two actual values ACT1 and ACT2 as the feedback signal Use parameter 4016 to define the source for actual value 1 ACT1 Use parameter 4017 to define the source for actual value 2 ACT2 1 ACT1 Actual value 1 ACT1 provides the feedback signal 2 ACT1 ACT2
19. 70 N2 object listing 000 173 parameter group 20 00 ee eee 70 ref correction formula 65 analog I O connections saana aaaea 239 specifications 2220055 239 analog output content max parameters 74 content min parameters 74 current max parameters 74 current min parameters 74 data content parameters 74 data parameter 200005 54 filter parameters 22205 75 N2 object listing a 175 parameter groyp aaa 74 application block output data parameter 53 application macro parameter 51 applications see macros autochange interval parameter 134 level parameter a 134 OVETVIEW 2 eee 134 starting order counter 135 automatic reset see reset automatic auxiliary motor see motor auxiliary B backup drive parameters 22205 29 battery assistant control panel 224 baud rate RS232 parameter 127 binary input N2 object listing 0 000 174 binary output N2 object listing 000 176 branch circuit protection 228 break point frequency fault parameter 97 buffer overruns count parameter 127 Index ACH550 UH User s Manual C cable r
20. Energize relay when Al signal is lost 26 Al2 Loss Energize relay when Al2 signal is lost 27 MOTOR TEMP Energize relay when a motor overtemperature alarm or fault occurs 28 STALL Energize relay when a stall alarm or fault exists 29 UNDERLOAD Energize relay when an underload alarm or fault occurs 30 PID SLEEP Energize relay when the PID sleep function is active 31 PFA Use relay to start stop motor in PFA control See Group 81 PFA Control e Use this option only when PFA control is used e Selection activated deactivated when drive is not running 32 AUTOCHANGE Energize relay when PFA autochange operation is performed Use this option only when PFA control is used 33 FLUX READY Energize relay when the motor is magnetized and able to supply nominal torque motor has reached nominal magnetizing 34 USER S2 Energize relay when User Parameter Set 2 is active Start Up 72 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 14 Relay Outputs Code Description Range Resolution Default S 35 COMM Energize relay based on input from fieldbus communication e Fieldbus writes binary code in parameter 0134 that can energizes relay 1 relay 6 according to the following Par 0134 Binary RO6 RO5 RO4 RO3 RO2 RO1 0 000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 000001 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 00001
21. 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common J1 Jumper Settings 7 AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA Sp Al1 0 2 10 V Ar 8 AO2 Output current 0 4 20 mA o j O Al2 0 4 20 mA 9 AGND Analog output circuit common 2p ota om 14 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 141 GND Common for DI return signals M2 DCoM1 Digital input common for all L_ __ 43 Di Start Stop Activate to start drive _ __l1 4 pl2 Run permissive Deactivate to stop drive P 1601 LU 115 DI3 Constant Preset speed 1 P 1202 _ __l16 Dl4 Safety interlock 1 Deactivate to stop drive P 1608 Lo 47 DI5 Safety interlock 2 Deactivate to stop drive P 1609 18 DI6 Not configured 19 RO1C Relay output 1 P 1401 20 RO1A _ Default operation Ready gt 19 connected to 21 21 RO1B 22 RO2C Relay output 2 P 1402 23 RO2A fx Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 24 RO2B f 25 RO3C Relay output 3 P 1403 26 RO3A fx Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 7 R08B Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 APPLIC MACRO 4 CLNGTWRFAN 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 STARTED 4101 GAIN 1 0 1601 RUN ENABLE 2 DI2 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 60 0s 1609 START ENABLE 2 5 DI5 Start Up ACH550 User s Manua l Condenser 41 This macro configures for condenser and liquid cooler ap
22. ACT1 minus ACT2 provides the feedback signal 3 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 plus ACT2 provides the feedback signal 4 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 times ACT2 provides the feedback signal 5 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 divided by ACT2 provides the feedback signal 6 MIN A1 A2 The smaller of ACT1 or ACT2 provides the feedback signal 7 MAX A1 A2 The greater of ACT1 or ACT2 provides the feedback signal 8 SQRT A1 A2 Square root of the value for ACT1 minus ACT2 provides the feedback signal 9 SQA1 SQA2 Square root of ACT1 plus the square root of ACT2 provides the feedback signal 10 SQRT ACT1 Square root of ACT1 provides the feedback signal Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 119 Group 40 Process PID Set 1 Code Description Range Resolution Default 4015 FBK MULTIPLIER 32 768 32 767 0 001 0 000 Defines an extra multiplier for the PID FBK value defined by parameter 4014 e Used mainly in applications where the flow is calculated from the pressure difference 0 NOT USED 32 768 32 767 Multiplier applied to the signal defined by parameter 4014 FBK SEL Example FBK Multiplier x JA1 A2 4016 ACT1 INPUT 1 5 1 2 Defines the source for actual value 1 ACT1 1 Al 1 Uses analog input 1 for ACT1 2 Al 2 Uses analog input 2 for ACT1 3 Current Uses current for ACT1 scaled so e Min AcT1 0 current e Max ACT1 2 x nominal current 4 Torque
23. 0303 STS CMD WORD 1 0304 FB STS WORD 2 0 READY ALARM 1 ENABLED REQ_MAINT 2 STARTED DIRLOCK 3 RUNNING LOCALLOCK 4 ZERO_SPEED CTL_MODE 5 ACCELERATE Reserved 6 DECELERATE Reserved 7 AT SETPOINT Reserved 8 LIMIT Reserved 9 SUPERVISION Reserved 10 REV REF REQ CTL 11 REV ACT REQ REF1 12 PANEL LOCAL REQ REP2 13 FIELDBUS LOCAL REQ REF2EXT 14 EXT2 ACT ACK STARTINH 15 FAULT ACK OFF ILCK 0304 FB STS WORD 2 Read only copy of the Status Word 2 e See parameter 0303 hex Start Up 58 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 03 Actual Signals Code Description Range Resolution Default 0305 FAULT WORD 1 1 0000 hex Read only copy of the Fault Word 1 e When a fault is active the corresponding bit for the active fault is set in the Fault Words e Each fault has a dedicated bit allocated within Fault Words e See Fault Listing in section Diagnostics for a description of the faults e The control panel displays the word in hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit 0 displays a 0001 All zeros and a 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000 Bit 0305 FAULT WORD 1 0306 FAULT WORD 2 0307 FAULT WORD 3 0 OVERCURRENT UNDERLOAD EFB 1 1 DC OVERVOLT THERM FAIL EFB 2 2 DEVOVERTEMP OPEX LINK EFB 3 3 SHORT CIRC OPEX PWR Reserved 4 OVERLOAD CURR MEAS Reserved 5 DC UNDERVOLT SUPPLY PHASE Reserved 6 Al1 LOSS Reserved Res
24. 1080 US 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 18 0 US Sets a value for a Constant Speed See CONST SPEED 1 above 1206 CONST SPEED 3 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 1440 US 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 24 0 US Sets a value for a Constant Speed See CONST SPEED 1 above 1207 CONST SPEED 3 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 1800 US 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 30 0 US Sets a value for a Constant Speed See CONST SPEED 1 above 1208 CONST SPEED 3 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 2880 US 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 48 0 US Sets a value for a Constant Speed See CONST SPEED 1 above 1209 TIMED MODE SEL 1 2 1 2 v Uses the timer s specified by parameter 1201 values 15 19 to override the reference defined in Group 11 Reference Select This override applies only if the timer function is enabled parameter 3601 1 EXT cs1 2 3 The state of the timer s specified by param 1201 values 15 19 determines the reference used See tables in 1201 at appropriate value 2 CS1 2 3 4 The state of the timer s specified by param 1201 values 15 19 determines the reference used See tables in 1201 at appropriate value Start Up 70 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 13 Analog Inputs This group defines the limits and the filtering for analog inputs Group 13 Analog Inputs Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1301 MINIMUM Al1 0 0 100 0 0 1 20 0 Defines the minimum value of the analog input Define value as a perce
25. 12 DUAL SETPOINT PID WITH CONSTANT SPEEDS 13 E BYPASS 14 HAND CONTROL 9904 MOTOR CTRL MOD 1 3 1 3 v Selects the motor control mode 1 VECTOR SPEED sensorless vector control mode e Reference 1 is speed reference in rpm e Reference 2 is speed reference in 100 is absolute maximum speed equal to the value of parameter 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED or 2001 MINIMUM SPEED if the absolute value of the minimum speed is greater than the maximum speed 3 SCALAR FREQ scalar control mode e Reference 1 is frequency reference in Hz e Reference 2 is frequency reference in 100 is absolute maximum frequency equal to the value of parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY or 2007 MINIMUM FREQUENCY if the absolute value of the minimum speed is greater than the maximum speed Start Up 52 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 99 Start up Data Code Description Range Resolution Default S 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 230 690 V US 1V 230 V US v Defines the nominal motor voltage Output voltage e Must equal the value on the motor rating plate Sets the maximum drive output voltage supplied to the motor P 9905F e The ACH550 cannot supply the motor with a voltage greater than the mains voltage Output frequency P 9907 9906 IMOTOR NOM CURR 0 15 loy 1 5 lon 0 1A 1 5 lon v Defines the nominal motor current e Must equal the value on the motor rating plate e Range allowed 0 2 2 0 Iy wher
26. 8 DI1 DI6 Thermistor 3503 ALARM LIMIT 10 200 C 1 110 C 0 5000 Ohm 1500 Ohm 0 1 0 Defines the alarm limit for motor temperature measurement At motor temperatures above this limit the drive displays an alarm 2010 MOTOR OVERTEMP For thermistors 0 de activated 1 activated 3504 FAULT LIMIT 10 200 C 1 130 C 0 5000 Ohm 4000 Ohm 0 1 0 Defines the fault limit for motor temperature measurement At motor temperatures above this limit the drive displays a fault 9 MOTOR OVERTEMP and stops the drive For thermistors 0 de activated 1 activated Start Up Group 36 Timer Functions ACH550 UH User s Manual This group defines the timer functions The timer functions include e Four daily start and stop times e Four weekly start stop and boost times Four timers for collecting selected periods together A timer can be connected to multiple time periods and a time period can be in multiple timers Time Period1 3602 Time1 Daily Str 3603 Time1 Daily Stp 3604 Time1 Weekly Str 3605 Time1 Weekly Stp Time Period2 3606 Time2 Daily Str 3607 Time2 Daily Stp 3608 Time2 Weekly Str 3609 Time2 Weekly Stp Timer1 3626 Timer 1 Src Time Period3 3610 Time3 Daily Str 3611 Time3 Daily Stp 3612 Time3 Weekly Str 3613 Time3 Weekly Stp Timer2 3627 Timer 2 Src Timer3 3628 Timer 3 Src Time Period4 3614 Time4 Daily Str Ti
27. Activates this function using the value entered as the acceleration time fOUT4 Ay Aux Motor ag tS 4 0 e A speed regulated motor accelerating using Group 22 parameters 2202 or 2205 B speed regulated motor decelerating using Group 22 parameters 2203 or 2206 At aux motor start speed regulated motor decelerates using 8125 DEC IN AUX START At aux motor stop speed regulated motor accelerates using 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP 8125 DEC IN AUX START 0 0 1800 0 s 0 1s 0 0s Sets the PFA deceleration time for a maximum to zero frequency ramp This PFA deceleration ramp Applies to the speed regulated motor when an auxiliary motor is switched on e Replaces the deceleration ramp defined in Group 22 ACCEL DECEL Applies only until the output of the regulated motor decreases by an amount equal to the output of the auxiliary motor Then the deceleration ramp defined in Group 22 ACCEL DECEL applies 0 NOT SEL 0 1 1800 Activates this function using the value entered as the acceleration time 8126 TIMED AUTOCHANGE 0 4 1 0 Sets the autochange with timer When enables autochange is controlled with the timer functions 0 NOT SEL 1 Timer 1 Enables autochange when Timer 1 is active 2 4 Timer 2 4 Enables autochange when Timer 2 4 is active 8127 ACT NR OF MOT 0 1 4 1 2 v Sets the actual number of PFA controlled motors maximum 6 motors 1 spee
28. Displays a warning 2006 Al1 Loss or 2007 Al2 Loss and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 3 LAST SPEED Displays a warning 2006 Al1 Loss or 2007 Al2 LOSS and sets speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds Warning If you select CONST SP 7 or LAST SPEED make sure that continued operation is safe when the analog input signal is lost 3002 PANEL COMM ERR 1 3 1 1 Defines the drive response to a control panel communication error 1 FAULT Displays a fault 10 PANEL LOSS and the drive coasts to stop 2 CONST SP 7 Displays a warning 2008 PANEL LOSS and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 3 LAST SPEED Displays a warning 2008 PANEL Loss and sets speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds Warning If you select CONST SP 7 or LAST SPEED make sure that continued operation is safe when the control panel communication is lost 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 6 6 1 0 Defines the External Fault 1 signal input and the drive response to an external fault 0 NOT SEL External fault signal is not used 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the external fault input Activating the digital input indicates a fault The drive displays a fault 14 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 and the drive coasts to stop 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the external fault input e See DI1 above 1 DI1 INV De
29. The drive s accumulated power consumption in kilowatt hours Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN buttons simultaneously when in parameter set mode 0116 APPL BLK OUTPUT 0 100 0 1 torque 0 600 Application block output signal Value is from either PFA control if PFA Control is active or Parameter 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 Start Up 54 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 01 Operating Data Code Description Range Resolution Default S 0118 DI1 3 STATUS 000 111 1 0 7 decimal Status of the three digital inputs e Status is displayed as a binary number e 1 indicates that the input is activated O indicates that the input is deactivated E aA edl SHA n e co DI 1 D 0119 DI4 6 STATUS 000 111 1 0 7 decimal Status of the three digital inputs See parameter 0118 DI1 3 STATUS 0120 JAN 0 100 0 1 Relative value of analog input 1 in 0121 Al2 0 100 0 1 The relative value of analog input 2 in 0122 RO1 3 STATUS 0 111 1 0 7 decimal Status of the three relay outputs e 1 indicates that the relay is energized r l O indicates that the relay is de energized LI RELAY 2 STATUS RELAY 1 STATUS RELAY 3 STATUS 0123 RO4 6 STATUS 0 111 1 0 7decimal Status of the three relay outputs See parameter 0122 0124 AO1 0 20 mA 0 1 mA The analog output 1 value in milliamperes
30. UL Markings The ACH550 is UL listed to 100 KAIC without use of input fuses or circuit breaker For end users s convenience section Branch Circuit Protection provides fuse recommendations Branch circuit protection must to be provided either per NEC or per the recommendations in Branch Circuit Protection Note UL508A manufactures are not required to use the fuse recommendations for the purpose of UL Listing a panel with an ACH550 AFD The ACH550 has an electronic motor protection feature that complies with the requirements of UL 508C When this feature is selected and properly adjusted additional overload protection is not required unless more than one motor is connected to the drive or unless additional protection is required by applicable safety regulations See parameters 3005 MOT THERM PROT and 3006 MOT THERM TIME EMC Europe Australia and New Zealand This section describes conformance with EMC requirements in Europe Australia and New Zealand For installations in the Unites States and other locations without special EMC requirements skip to Control Cables on page 237 CE Marking A CE mark is attached to the ACH550 AC drive to verify that the drive follows the provisions of the European Low Voltage and EMC Directives Directive 73 23 EEC as amended by 93 68 EEC and Directive 89 336 EEC as amended by 93 68 EEC The EMC Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical equipm
31. Uses torque for ACT1 scaled so e Min ACT1 2 x nominal torque e Max ACT1 2 x nominal torque 5 Power Uses power for ACT1 scaled so e Min ACT1 2 x nominal power e Max ACT1 2 x nominal power 4017 ACT2 INPUT 1 5 1 2 Defines the source for actual value 2 ACT2 1 Al 1 Uses analog input 1 for ACT2 2 Al 2 Uses analog input 2 for ACT2 3 Current Uses current for AcT2 scaled so e Min AcT2 0 current e Max ACT2 2 x nominal current 4 Torque Uses torque for ACT2 scaled so e Min ACT2 2 x nominal torque e Max ACT2 2 x nominal torque 5 Power Uses power for ACT2 scaled so e Min ACT2 2 x nominal power e Max ACT2 2 x nominal power 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 Sets the minimum value for ACT1 e Used with analog input min max settings e g 1301 MINIMUM Al1 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 e Scales analog inputs used as actual values e See figure A Normal B Inversion ACT1 MINIMUM gt ACT1 MAXIMUM ACT1 4 B P 4018 ACT1 P4019 pas SSS Al P 4018 P 40194 1 gt P 1301 P 1302 Analog input signal P1301 Analog input signal P 1302 4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 Sets the maximum value for ACT1 e See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 Sets the minimum value for ACT2 e See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM Start Up
32. e See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1417 RO6ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s Defines the switch on delay for relay 6 e See RO 1 ON DELAY 1418 RO6 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s Defines the switch off delay for relay 6 e See RO 1 OFF DELAY Start Up 74 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 15 Analog Outputs This group defines the drive s analog current signal outputs The drive s analog outputs can be Any parameter of the Operating Data group Group 01 e Limited to programmable minimum and maximum values of output current e Scaled and or inverted by defining the minimum and maximum values of the source parameter or content Defining an maximum value parameter 1503 or 1509 that is less than the content minimum value parameter 1502 or 1508 results in an inverted output Filtered Group 15 Analog Outputs Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 99 199 1 103 Defines the content for analog output AO1 99 EXCITE PTC Provides a current source for sensor type PTC Output 1 6 mA See Group 35 P 1505 ADAMA 100 EXCITE PT100 Provides a current source for sensor type P 1511 P1100 Output 9 1 mA See Group 35 101 145 Output corresponds to a parameter in the Operating Data group Group 01 e Parameter defined by value value 102 parameter 0102 P 1504 146 199 Not assigned P 1510 P 1502 1508 P 1503 1509 AO CONTENT gt re
33. reset e Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal s rate of change 6 DIJU 4D Same as above DIJU 4D R except e A Stop command does not reset the reference to zero The reference is stored e When the drive restarts the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored reference 7 DI5U 6D Same as above DI3U 4D except that DI5 and DI6 are the digital inputs used 8 COMM Defines the fieldbus as the reference source 9 COMM Al1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 10 COMM AI1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 11 DIJU 4D RNC Same as DI3U 4D R above except that e Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference 12 DIJU 4D NC Same as DI3U 4D above except that e Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference 13 DI5U 6D NC Same as DI3U 4D above except that e Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference 14 Al1 aAl2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 15 Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 com
34. 0125 AO2 0 20 mA 0 1 mA The analog output 2 value in milliamperes 0126 PID 1 OUTPPUT 1000 1000 0 1 The PID Controller 1 output value in 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT 100 100 0 1 The PID Controller 2 output value in 0128 PID 1 SETPNT The PID 1 controller setpoint signal e Units and scale defined by PID parameters 4006 4106 amp 4007 4107 0129 PID 2 SETPNT The PID 2 controller setpoint signal Units and scale defined by PID parameters 4206 8 4207 0130 PID 1 FBK The PID 1 controller feedback signal e Units and scale defined by PID parameters 4006 4106 8 4007 4107 Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 55 Group 01 Operating Data Code Description Range Default S 0131 PID 2 FBK The PID 2 controller feedback signal Units and scale defined by PID parameters 4206 8 4207 0132 PID 1 DEVIATION The difference between the PID 1 controller reference value and actual value Units and scale defined by PID parameters 4006 4106 8 4007 4107 0133 PID 2 DEVIATION The difference between the PID 2 controller reference value and actual value e Units and scale defined by PID parameters 4206 8 4207 0134 COMM RO WORD 0 65535 0 Free data location that can be written from serial link Used for relay output control e See parameter 1401 0135 COMM VALUE 1 32768 32767 0 Free data location that can be written fr
35. 30 FORCE TRIP 31 EFB 1 32 EFB 2 33 EFB 3 34 MOTOR PHASE 1001 PAR PFC REFNEG Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 1002 PAR PFC IOCONF 1003 PAR Al SCALE 1004 PAR AO SCALE 1006 PAR EXTROMISSING 1007 PAR FBUSMISSING 1008 PAR PFCWOSCALAR Commissioning the Override Mode 1 Enter the parameters in all groups as needed except group 17 2 Select the digital input that will activate override mode P1701 3 Enter the frequency or speed reference for override mode P1702 and P1703 according to the motor control mode P9904 4 Enter the pass code P1704 358 5 Enable the override mode P1705 Changing the Override Parameters 1 If override mode is already enabled disable it Enter the pass code P1704 e Disable the override mode P1705 If needed load the override parameter set P9902 3 Change the parameters as needed except group 17 4 Change the parameters in group 17 as needed e Digital input for override mode P1701 e Frequency or speed reference P1702 or P1703 Enter the pass code P1704 81 Enable the override mode P1705 The drive replaces the override parameter set with new values of all parameters Group 17 Override Code 1701 Description Range Resolution DefaultS OVERRIDE SEL 6 6 1 0 Selects the source of the override activation signal 0 NOT SEL Override activation signal not selected 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the override
36. 55 S safely avd eee a aa hah DE E 3 255 scalar control mode 22055 51 scaling actual values EFBcomm 152 actual value FBA ABB drives profile 209 actual value FBA generic profile 211 FLN actual values 182 reference EFB ABB drives profile 168 reference FBA ABB drives profile 207 reference FBA generic profile 210 s curve ramp parameter 88 sensor type parameter 108 sensorless vector control mode 51 serial 1 error fault code 28 154 serial 1 error fault code 215 serial communication see comm serial number cece eeeeee 8 setpoint maximum PID parameter 118 setpoint minimum PID parameter 118 setpoint select PID parameter 117 shock shipping limit a 244 short circuit fault code 213 single phase supply derating a AE EEIE RA ee 227 sleep selection PID parameter 120 slip compensation ratio parameter 94 soft keys control panel 22 specifications control connections 0 5 237 GOONG rak saa NG Kata naa NT aaa la 240 input POWer 2 ee 228 MAINS aaa eaa dn gatang hee sali fered a Oe 228 motor connections 232 speed at fault history parameter 60
37. 6 RESET EFB protocol is performing a hardware reset 7 LISTEN ONLY EFB protocol is in listen only mode Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 129 Group 53 EFB Control Code Description Range Resolution Default S 5310 EFB PAR 10 0 65535 1 0 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40005 5311 EFB PAR 11 0 65535 1 0 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40006 5312 EFB PAR 12 0 65535 1 0 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40007 5313 EFB PAR 13 0 65535 1 0 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40008 5314 EFB PAR 14 0 65535 1 0 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40009 5315 EFB PAR 15 0 65535 1 0 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40010 5316 EFB PAR 16 0 65535 1 0 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40011 5317 EFB PAR 17 0 65535 1 0 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40012 5318 EFB PAR 18 EFB PAR 20 0 65535 1 0 KG Reserved 5320 Start Up 130 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 81 PFA This group defines a Pump and Fan Alternation PFA mode of operation The major features of PFA are e The ACH550 controls the motor of pump no 1 varying the motor speed to control the pump capacity This motor is the speed regulated motor Direct line connections power the motor of pump no 2 and pump no 3 etc The ACH550 swit
38. EMC 004 requirements requirements EMC motor connection terminal size 20200000 05 TON QUO 22 AA AA motor control IR compensation parameters parameter group 0 aaa motor temperature overtemperature fault code MWh counter data parameter N Na fieldbus also see comm EFB description a node limit 0 0 0 a supported features NCU see network control unit NEMA ratings see ratings network control unit description 22200000 eee NA DPDLHE e r a ace dara a NPN object virtual description offset PID parameter ok messages count parameter 253 Index 254 operating data parameter group OPEX link fault code OPEX power fault code options parameter group output frequency data parameter output voltage data parameter output wiring fault code overcurrent automatic reset parameter fault code overload fault code overspeed fault code panel display variables parameter group panel loss fault code par override pars fault code par pfa override fault code parameter analog input scale fault code analog output scale fault code change lock a external relay o
39. Fault 1 525 connected to 27 97 RO3B Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 APPLIC MACRO 10 FLOATINGPNT 3416 SIGNAL 3 MIN 200 0 1103 REF1 SEL 7 DI5U 6D 3417 SIGNAL 3 MAX 200 0 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 STARTED 3419 OUTPUT 3 DSP UNIT 4 96 1601 RUN ENABLE 2 DI2 3420 OUTPUT 3 MIN 200 0 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 3421 OUTPUT 3 MAX 200 0 3415 SIGNAL 3 PARAM 0105 TORQUE Start Up ACH550 User s Manual Dual Setpoint with PID This macro configures for dual setpoint PID applications where activating digital input 3 DI3 changes the process PID controller s setpoint to another value When using direct speed reference in AUTO mode or process PID see General Considerations on page 35 Set process PID setpoints internal to the drive using parameters 4011 SET1 and 4111 SET2 47 X1 7 SCR Signal cable shield screen G LU Alt External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 110V Reference voltage 10 VDC Q 5 Al2 PID feedback 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common J1 Jumper Settings Ar 7 AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA o gt Alt 0 2 10 V 9 AGND Analog output circuit common
40. LAO INPUT REF1 0 PCT 0 1 0 61 LAO INPUT REF2 0 PCT 0 1 0 62 LAO EXT PID STPT 0 PCT 0 1 0 63 LAI EXT PID FBCK 0 PCT 0 1 0 z 64 LAI EXT PID DEV 0 PCT 0 1 0 5 Serial Communication EFB 186 ACH550 UH User s Manual FLN Point Database Sak Subpoint Name Defauit Units jab aa On Text Off Text Type SI Units 66 LDO SPD OUT MIN 0 PCT 0 1 0 2 67 LDO SPD OUT MAX 1000 PCT 0 1 0 68 LDO FLN LOC CTL AUTO 1 0 FLN AUTO 69 LDO FLN LOC REF AUTO s 1 0 FLN AUTO 70 LDI DI1 ACTUAL OFF 1 0 ON OFF 71 LDI DI2 ACTUAL OFF 1 0 ON OFF 72 LDI DI3 ACTUAL OFF 1 0 ON OFF 73 LDI DI4 ACTUAL OFF 1 0 ON OFF 74 LDI DI5 ACTUAL OFF 1 0 ON OFF 75 LDI DI6 ACTUAL OFF 1 0 ON OFF 76 LDI RO1 ACTUAL OFF 1 0 ON OFF 77 LDI RO 2 ACTUAL OFF 1 0 ON OFF 78 LDI RO 3 ACTUAL OFF 1 0 ON OFF 79 LDI RO 4 ACTUAL OFF 1 0 ON OFF 80 LDI RO 5 ACTUAL OFF E 1 0 ON OFF 81 LDI RO 6 ACTUAL OFF 1 0 ON OFF 82 LAI Al 1 ACTUAL 0 PCT 0 1 0 83 LAI Al 2 ACTUAL 0 PCT 0 1 0 E 84 LAI AO 1 ACTUAL 0 MA 0 1 0 z 85 LAI Al 2 ACTUAL 0 MA 0 1 0 z 86 LDI OK ALARM OK 1 0 ALARM OK 87 LDI OK MAINT OK 1 0 MAINT OK 88 LAI ALARM WORD 1 1 0 89 LAI
41. PFA parameters 132 Index ACH550 UH User s Manual M macros booster pump cee eee eee 42 condenser 41 cooling tower fan aa 40 dual setpoint w PID 47 dual setpoint w PID amp const speeds 48 CODY PASS AN 49 floating point eee eee 46 hand control iai aereis oa a aea E 50 HVAC default nannaa aa 37 internal timer 44 internal timer w constant speeds 45 MISTING ad hn Ra a LM naba 35 pump alternation 43 ret rm AA AA 39 SUPDIV Tania kaa dese eL NA GANG ND PD NGA 38 to select a aaa An 36 mailbox EFB comm 0055 152 mains see input power maintenance CAPACILOMS haa ha 223 control panel tana n baaa 224 heat sink 221 internal enclosure fan 223 intervals 221 mainan ie AA a a N tas 222 triggers parameter group 95 manuals NP AN NAN 2 mapping actual value FBA generic profile 211 EFB modbus 2 156 materials 0000 eee 245 maximum frequency parameter 84 torque limit parameters 85 torque select parameter 84 metasys connection diagram companion 173 connection diagram system 172 integration 2 2 0 cee eee 172 minimum frequency parameter 84 torque limit parameters 85 torque select parameter 84 modbus EFB addr
42. Supervision monitors a specified parameter and energizes a relay output if the parameter passes a defined limit Use Group 14 Relay Outputs to define the relay and whether the relay activates when the signal is too low or too high Group 32 Supervision Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 101 199 1 103 Selects the first supervised parameter Must be a parameter number from Group 01 Operating Data If the supervised parameter passes a limit a relay output is energized The supervision limits are defined in this group The relay outputs are defined in Group 14 Relay Outputs definition also specifies which supervision limit is monitored LO sHI a ix Value of supervised parameter Operating data supervision using relay outputs when A e Case A Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 Lo 3202 Y a SS z RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 OVER Or SUPRV 2 OVER Use for monitoring when if the supervised signal t exceeds a given limit The relay remains active until the supervised value drops below the low limit Case A A e Case B Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 Energized 1 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV 1 UNDER or SUPRV 2 0 a UNDER Use for monitoring when if the supervised signal falls below a given limit The relay remains active untilthe Case B A supervised value rises above the high limit Energized 1 Note Case LO lt HI represents a nor
43. as the 100 reference and that 9907 500 Hz Although Actual Value scaling could differ from the above for the N2 FLN and BACnet protocols it currently does not To confirm see the following sections as appropriate Serial Communication EFB ACH550 UH User s Manual 153 e N2 Analog Input Objects in the N2 Protocol Technical Data section Scaling Drive Feedback Values in the FLN Protocol Technical Data section TBD in the BACnet Technical Data section Diagnostics EFB Fault Queue for Drive Diagnostics For general ACH550 diagnostics information see Diagnostics starting on page 212 The three most recent ACH550 faults are reported to the fieldbus as defined below Protocol Reference Drive Parameter Modbus N2 FLN BACnet 0401 Last Fault 40401 17 90 0412 Previous Fault 1 40402 18 91 0413 Previous Fault 2 40403 19 92 1 Applies only for Modbus using ABB Drive profile 2 BACnet not defined at time of publication Serial Communication Diagnostics Network problems can be caused by multiple sources Some of these sources are e Loose connections e Incorrect wiring including swapped wires Bad grounding Duplicate station numbers e Incorrect setup of drives or other devices on the network The major diagnostic features for fault tracing on an EFB network include Group 53 EFB Protocol parameters 5306 5309 The Parameter Descriptions section describ
44. changes to the value in Mailbox data 1 As noted above Modbus provides direct access to all parameters using the format 4 followed by the parameter number 2 BACnet not defined at time of publication Actual Value Scaling The scaling of actual values can be protocol dependent In general for Actual Values scale the feedback integer using the parameter s resolution See Parameter Descriptions section for parameter resolutions For example Feedback Parameter ri TEN NA Integer Resolution Feedback Integer Parameter Resolution Scaled Value 1 0 1 mA 1 0 1 mA 0 1 mA 10 0 1 10 0 1 1 Where parameters are in percent the Parameter Descriptions section specifies what parameter corresponds to 100 In such cases to convert from percent to engineering units multiply by the value of the parameter that defines 100 and divide by 100 For example Feedback Parameter pa ni at Feedback Integer Parameter Resolution Integer Resolution defines 100 Value of 100 Ref 100 Scaled Value 10 0 1 1500 rpm 10 0 1 1500 RPM 100 15 rpm 100 0 1 500 Hz 100 0 196 500 Hz 100 50 Hz 1 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9908 MOT NOM SPEED as the 100 reference and that 9908 1500 rpm 2 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9907 MOT NOM FREQ
45. data parameter 2 00005 53 max limit parameter 83 min limit parameter 83 speed control acceleration compensation parameter 91 automatic tuning parameter 91 derivation time parameter 90 integration time parameter 90 parameter group 000 eee 90 proportional gain parameter 90 speed constant digital input selection parameter 67 parameteforsr cates ers ADA DA NA NAG 69 parameter group 0000 ee 67 stall frequency fault parameter 98 function fault parameter 98 TOQION Ga Kang Sika te ek aegis PURING NG 98 time fault parameter 98 Index 256 standards mi face dhusan aeaa NA nA Suite 245 CE marking eae eee 246 CSA marking a 246 C Tick marking a 246 EN 50178 2 245 EN 60204 1L clam iman malupet hana 245 EN 60529 aa 245 EN 61800 3 000 245 247 IEC 606864 1 2 a 245 UL 508C a da ees E eee Na 245 UL marking 246 start aux motor delay 132 aux motor PFA parameters 131 control EFB comm 147 control FBAcomm 197 DC magnetizing time parameter 86 delay PFA parameter 140 frequency PFA parameters 131 function parameter
46. e 16 bit words containing a sign bit and a 15 bit integer When negative values written as the two s complement of the corresponding positive value Scaled as described earlier in Actual Value Scaling Exception Codes Exception codes are serial communication responses from the drive The ACH550 supports the standard Modbus exception codes defined below Exception Code Name Meaning 01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION Unsupported Command 02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS The data address received in the query is not allowable It is not a defined parameter group 03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE A value contained in the query data field is not an allowable value for the ACH550 because it is one of the following Outside min or max limits e Parameter is read only e Message is too long e Parameter write not allowed when start is active Parameter write not allowed when factory macro is selected ABB Drives Profile Technical Data Overview The ABB Drives profile provides a standard profile that can be used on multiple protocols including Modbus and the protocols available on the FBA module Control Word The CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The fieldbus master station sends the CONTROL WORD to the drive The drive switches between states according to the bit coded instructions in the CONTROL WORD Using the CONTROL WORD ABB Drives profile version requires that
47. e g RO1 Coil 33 Write Multiple 0x10 Write multiple holding registers For the ACH550 the entire Holding Registers parameter set is mapped as holding registers as well as command status and reference values Read Write Multiple 0x17 This function combines functions 0x03 and 0x10 into a single Holding Registers command Mapping Summary The following table summarizes the mapping between the ACH550 parameters and 1 0 and Modbus reference space For details see Modbus Addressing below ACH550 Modbus Reference Supported Function Codes e Control Bits Coils Oxxxx e 01 Read Coil Status e Relay Outputs 05 Force Single Coil e 15 Force Multiple Coils e Status Bits Discrete Inputs 1xxxx 02 Read Input Status e Discrete Inputs e Analog Inputs Input Registers 3xxxxx e 04 Read Input Registers e Parameters Holding Registers 4xxxx 03 Read 4X Registers e Control Status Words 06 Preset Single 4X Register e References e 16 Preset Multiple 4X Registers 23 Read Write 4X Registers Communication Profiles When communicating by Modbus the ACH550 supports multiple profiles for control and status information Parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE selects the profile used ABB DRIVES Standard The primary and default profile is the ABB Drives Profile which standardizes the control interface among ABB drives This profile is based on the PROFIBUS interface and i
48. menu Select EXIT to return to the main menu Note If upload or download of parameters is aborted the partial parameter set is not implemented Clock Set Mode The clock set mode is used for setting the time and date for the internal clock of the ACH550 In order to use the timer functions of the ACH550 the internal clock has to be set first Date is used to determine weekdays and is visible in Fault logs To set the clock follow these steps Select MENU to enter the main menu u 1 Scroll to Clock Set with the UP DOWN buttons and select ENTER to enter the o 2 Clock Set mode x wT Scroll to Clock Visibility with the UP DOWN buttons and select SEL to change A 3 the visibility of the clock x G Scroll to Show Clock with the UP DOWN buttons and select SEL to make the clock CA 4 visible Saw u Scroll to Set Time with the UP DOWN buttons and select SEL a 5 e G Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 33 Change the hours and minutes with the UP DOWN buttons and select OK to save the values The active value is displayed in inverted color Scroll to Time Format with the UP DOWN buttons and select SEL The different formats are displayed Select a format with the UP DOWN buttons and select SEL to confirm the selection Scroll to Set Date with the UP DOWN buttons and select SEL 10 Change the days months
49. 10033 DI1 DI1 DI1 10034 DI2 DI2 DI2 10035 DI3 DIS DIZ 10036 DI4 DI4 DI4 10037 DI5 DI5 DI5 10038 DI6 DIG DI6 Active low For the 1xxxx registers e Additional discrete inputs are added sequentially The ACH550 supports the following Modbus function codes for discrete inputs Function Code Description 02 Read input status 3xxxx Mapping Modbus Inputs The drive maps the following information to the 3xxxx Modbus addresses called Modbus input registers Any user defined analog inputs The following table summarizes the input registers Modbus ACH550 Reference All Profiles 30001 Alt Remarks This register shall report the level of Analog Input 1 0 100 Serial Communication EFB 160 ACH550 UH User s Manual Modbus ACH550 Reference All Profiles pemarks 30002 Al2 This register shall report the level of Analog Input 2 0 100 The ACH550 supports the following Modbus function codes for 3xxxx registers Function Code Description 04 Read 3xxxx input status 4xxxx Register Mapping The drive maps its parameters and other data to the 4xxxx holding registers as follows e 40001 40099 map to drive control and actual values These registers are described in the table below 40101 49999 map to drive parameters 0101 9999 Register addresses that do not correspond to drive parameters are invalid If there is an
50. 17 MOTOR TEMP The measured motor temperature as set up in Group 35 0145 18 ROTATION CNT The motor s cumulative revolution count in mega 0142 revolutions 19 N A 20 OVRD TIME 1 of the 5 mandatory FLN points required for compatibility None with Siemens control systems It has no functionality in the drive application Serial Communication EFB 188 ACH550 UH User s Manual FLN Detailed Point Descriptions Point Description Drive Parameter 21 FWD REV ACT Indicates the rotational direction of the motor regardless of control source 1 REV 0 FWD 22 FWD REV CMD Commanded by FLN to change the rotational direction of the drive e Parameter 1001 must be set to COMM for FLN to control the direction of the motor by EXT1 e Parameter 1002 must be set to COMM for FLN to control the direction of the motor by EXT2 23 RUN STOP ACT Indicates the drive s run status regardless of control source 1 RUN 0 STOP 24 RUN STOP CMD Commanded by FLN to start the drive e Parameter 1001 must be set to COMM for FLN to control the run state of the drive by EXT1 e Parameter 1002 must be set to COMM for FLN to have this control 25 EXT1 2 ACT Indicates whether External 1 or External 2 is the active control source 1 EXT2 0 EXT1 26 EXT1 2 CMD Commanded by FLN to select External 1 or External 2 as the active control source 1 EX
51. 2002 2008 10 0 200 A019 MAILBOX PARAMETER 1 0 65535 Serial Communication EFB 176 ACH550 UH User s Manual N2 Analog Outputs Number Object P AN i E i Units Range A020 MAILBOX DATA 1 0 65535 N2 Binary Output Objects The following table lists all of the N2 Binary Output objects defined for the ACH550 drive N2 Binary Outputs Number Object Drive Parameter Range BO1 STOP START Command Word 0 Stop 1 Start to Speed BO2 FORWARD REVERSE Command Word 0 Forward 1 Reverse BO3 PANEL LOCK Command Word 0 Open 1 Locked BO4 RUN ENABLE Command Word 0 Enable 1 Disable BO5 REF1 REF2 SELECT Command Word 0 Ref1 1 Ref2 BO6 FAULT RESET Command Word Change 0 gt 1 Resets BO7 COMMAND RO 1 134 bit mask 01 0 Off 1 On BO8 COMMAND RO 2 134 bit mask 02 0 Off 1 On BO9 COMMAND RO 3 134 bit mask 04 0 Off 1 On BO10 COMMAND RO 4 134 bit mask 08 0 Off 1 On BO11 COMMAND RO 5 134 bit mask 10 0 Off 1 On BO12 COMMAND RO 6 134 bit mask 20 0 Off 1 On BO13 RESET RUN TIME 114 indirectly 0 N A 1 On Reset Run Time BO14 RESET KWH COUNT 115 indirectly 0 N A 1 On Reset kWh Count BO15 PRC PID SELECT 4027 indirectly 0 SET2 1 SET2 BO16 N2 LOCAL CTL Note 1 Command Word 0 Auto 1 N2 BO17 N2 LOCAL REF Note 1 Command Word 0 Auto 1 N2 BO18 SAVE P
52. 28 77 ka we DR nna 154 fault code 31 a 155 fault code 32 2 220000 0 eee 155 fault code 33 2220000008 155 fault tracing parameters 153 fault duplicate stations 154 fault intermittent off line 155 fault no master station on line 154 fault swapped wires 154 feedback from drive 151 feedback from drive mailbox 152 input ref sel activate 148 installation 0c eee eee 145 mailbox param read write 152 misc drive control activate 149 modbus actual values 162 normal operation 153 OVErvieW ee 143 parameter group aaa 127 PID control setpoint source activate 150 planning 0 0 ee ee 144 profiles 0c eee ee 156 reference scaling ABB drives profile 168 relay output control activate 149 21 fo ee ne ee 146 start stop control activate 147 state diagram 2 000005 167 status Word eee 164 termination 145 Index 250 comm FBA actual values aaa 195 analog output control activate 199 comm fault response 200 config file CPI firmware revision parameter 125 config file id revision parameter 125 config file revision parameter 125 configuratio
53. 3406 and 3407 for example to convert a Value Group 01 parameter such as 0102 SPEED in rpm to the speed of a conveyor driven by the motor in ft min For such a conversion the P 3407 source values in the figure are the min and max motor speed and the display values are the corresponding min and max conveyor speed Use parameter 3405 to select the proper units for the display P3406 Note Selecting units does not convert values pang P3402 P 3403 Source Value 3403 SIGNAL1 MAX Depends on selection 600 0 Hz Defines the maximum expected value for the first display parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 0 8 1 5 Defines the decimal point location for the first display parameter E 1 7 Defines the decimal point location 3404 Value Display Range Enter the number of digits desired to the right of the decimal 0 3 32768 32767 point 1 3 1 Signed See table for example using pi 3 14159 7 3 14 8 BAR METER Specifies a bar meter display 3 3 142 4 3 0 65535 5 3 1 Unsigned 6 3 14 7 3 142 Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 105 Group 34 Panel Display Process Variables Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3405 OUTPUT1 DSP UNIT 128 127 1 4 Selects the units used with the first display parameter e Enter positive values in parameter 3405 for a num
54. 500 Hz 100 0 1 500 Hz 100 50 Hz 1 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9908 MOT NOM SPEED as the 100 reference and that 9908 1500 rpm 2 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9907 MOT NOM FREQ as the 100 reference and that 9907 500 Hz Actual Value Mapping See the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Serial Communication FBA 212 ACH550 UH User s Manual Diagnostics A A Warning Do not attempt any measurement parts replacement or other service procedure not described in this manual Such action will void the warranty may endanger correct operation and increase downtime and expense Warning All electrical installation and maintenance work described in this chapter should only be undertaken by qualified service personnel The Safety instructions on the first pages of this manual must be followed Diagnostic Displays The drive detects error situations and reports them using e The green and red LED on the body of the drive e The status LED on the control panel if the HVAC control panel is attached to the drive e The control panel display if the HVAC control panel is attached to the drive The Fault Word and Alarm Word parameter bits parameters 0305 to 0309 See Group 03 Actual Signals on page 56 The form of the display depends on the severity of the error Yo
55. 54 UL type 12 Be sure to select the appropriate procedure For the power connection points on the drive see the Connection Diagrams section below Use separate conduit runs to keep these three classes of wiring apart Input power wiring Motor wiring Control communications wiring For details on power connections refer to the following sections in Technical Data Input Power Connections on page 228 Motor Connections on page 232 For floating networks also known as IT ungrounded or high impedance networks Disconnect the internal RFI filter by removing both the EM1 and EM3 screws frame sizes R1 R4 see page 14 or F1 and F2 screws frame sizes R5 R6 see page 15 Do NOT install an external filter such as one of the kits listed in the filter table on 236 Using an EMC RFI filter grounds the input power through the filter capacitors which could be dangerous and could damage the unit Where EMC requirements exist check for excessive emission propagated to neighboring low voltage networks In some cases the natural suppression in transformers and cables is sufficient If in doubt use a supply transformer with static screening between the primary and secondary windings For details on control connections refer to the following sections Control Connections on page 237 Application Macros starting on page 35 For electro magnetic compliance EMC follow local codes and the
56. 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for forcing the ramp input to 0 e See DI1 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for forcing the ramp input to O e De activating the digital input forces ramp input to 0 Activating the digital input ramp resumes normal operation 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for forcing the ramp function generator input to 0 e See DI1 INV above Start Up 90 Group 23 Speed Control ACH550 UH User s Manual This group defines variables used for speed control operation Group 23 Speed Control Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2301 PROP GAIN 0 00 200 00 Sets the relative gain for the speed controller Larger values may cause speed oscillation The figure shows the speed controller output after an error step error remains constant Note You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN to automatically set proportional gain Controller output Kp e 0 01 3 00 Gain Kp 1 T Integration time 0 y A Tp Derivation time 0 Error Value Controller Output e Error value t gt 2302 INTEGRATION TIME 0 00 600 00 s Sets the integration time for the speed A O controller Yo which the controller output changes for a constant error value K e Shorter integration times correct continuous errors
57. 98 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 30 Fault Functions Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3010 STALL FUNCTION 0 2 1 0 This parameter defines the operation of the Stall function This Torque 4 protection is active if the drive operates in the stall region see figure for the time defined by 3012 STALL TIME The User Limit is defined in Group 20 by 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 or the limit on the COMM input Stall region 0 NOT SEL Stall protection is not used 95 1 FAULT When the drive operates in the stall region for the time set User by 3012 STALL TIME Limit e The drive coasts to stop l A fault indication is displayed 2 WARNING When the drive operates in the stall region for the time l set by 3012 STALL TIME l f e A warning indication is displayed oo a The warning disappears when the drive is out of the stall region for STALL FREQ HI half the time set by parameter 3012 STALL TIME 3011 STALL FREQUENCY 0 5 50 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 20 0 Hz This parameter sets the frequency value for the Stall function Refer to Figure 3012 STALL TIME 10 400 s 1s 20s This parameter sets the time value for the Stall function 3013 UNDERLOAD FUNCTION 0 2 0 Removal of motor load may indicate a process malfunction The protection is activated if The motor torque drops below the load curve selected by parameter 3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE This condition has lasted longer than th
58. ACH550 UH User s Manual 69 Group 12 Constant Speeds Code Description Range Resolution Default S 12 DI1 2 3 INV Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI1 DI2 and DI3 e Inverse operation uses three digital inputs as defined below 0 DI de activated 1 DI activated DI1 DI2 DIS Function 1 1 1 No constant speed 0 1 1 Constant speed 1 1202 1 0 1 Constant speed 2 1203 0 O 1 Constant speed 3 1204 1 1 0 Constant speed 4 1205 0 1 0 Constant speed 5 1206 1 0 O Constant speed 6 1207 0 O O Constant speed 7 1208 13 DI3 4 5 INV Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI3 DI4 and DI5 e See above DI1 2 3 INV for code 14 DI4 5 6 INV Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 3 using D14 DI5 and DI6 e See above DI1 2 3 INV for code 1202 CONST SPEED 1 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 360 US 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 6 0 US Sets value for Constant Speed 1 The range and units depend on parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE e Range 0 30000 rpm when 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED e Range 0 500 Hz when 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ 1203 CONST SPEED 2 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 360 US 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 12 0 US Sets a value for a Constant Speed See CONST SPEED 1 above 1204 CONST SPEED 3 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 720 US 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 18 0 US 1205 CONST SPEED 3 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm
59. AGND ON 30 Screen SCR 32 SCR AA 32 Screen OFF position ON position t Bus termination GND Connect the shield at each end of the cable to a drive On one end connect the shield to terminal 28 and on the other end connect to terminal 32 Do not connect the incoming and outgoing cable shields to the same terminals as that would make the shielding continuous For configuration information see the following Communication Set up EFB below Activate Drive Control Functions EFB on page 147 The appropriate EFB protocol specific technical data For example Modbus Protocol Technical Data on page 155 Serial Communication EFB 146 Communication Set up EFB Serial Communication Selection ACH550 UH User s Manual To activate the serial communication set parameter 9802 COMM PROTOCOL SEL e 1 STD MODBUS 2 gt 3 5 N2 FLN BACNET Note If you cannot see the desired selection on the panel your drive does not have that protocol software in the application memory Serial Communication Configuration Setting 9802 automatically sets the appropriate default values in parameters that define the communication process These parameters and descriptions are defined below In particular note that the station Id may require adjustment Code Description EFB Protocol Reference Modbus N2 FLN BACnet 5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID Contain
60. AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 The Autochange function must be disabled if Interlock function is disabled 1 DI1 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with DI1 to the interlock signal for each PFA relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on The number of PFA relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFA The Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No PFA Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled Relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 Speed Reg Motor Not allowed DI2 DI6 Free 1 DI1 Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFA Relay pi2 First PFA Relay DI2 DI6 Free DI3 DI6 Free 2 DI1 Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFA Relay pi2 First PFA Relay DI2 Second PFA Relay DI3 Second PFA Relay DI3 DI6 Free DI4 DI6 Free 3 DI1 Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFA Relay pi2 First PFA Relay DI2 Second PFA Relay DI3 Second PFA Relay DI3 Third PFA Relay DI4 Third PFA Relay DI4 DI6 Free DI5 DI6 Free 4 DI1 Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFA Relay pi2 First PFA Relay DI2 Second PFA Relay DI3 Second PFA Relay DI3 Third PFA Relay D14 Third PFA Relay DI4 Fourth PFA Relay DI5 Fourth PFA Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI6 Free 5 DI1 Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFA Relay pi2 First PFA Relay DI2 Second PFA Relay DI3 Second PFA Relay DI3 Third PFA Relay D14 Third PFA Relay D14 Fourth PFA Relay
61. Adapter configuration error e The major or minor revision code of the adapter s CPI firmware revision differs from that stated in the drive s configuration file 4 OFF LINE Adapter is off line 5 ON LINE Adapter is on line 6 RESET Adapter is performing a hardware reset 5132 FBA CPI FW REV 0000 FFFF hex 1 0000 hex Contains the revision of the module s CPI program Format is xyz where x major revision number e y minor revision number e z correction number Example 107 revision 1 07 Start Up 126 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 51 Ext Comm Module Code Description Range Resolution Default S 5133 FBA APPL FW REV 0000 FFFF hex 1 0000 hex Contains the revision of the module s application program Format is xyz where e x major revision number e y minor revision number e z correction number Example 107 revision 1 07 Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 127 Group 52 Panel Communication This group defines the communication settings for the control panel port on the drive Normally when using the supplied control panel there is no need to change settings in this group In this group parameter modifications take effect on the next power up Group 52 Panel Communication Code Description Range Resolution Default S 5201 STATION ID 1 247 1 1 Defines the address of the drive e Two units with the same address are not a
62. Al3 5 0103 FREQ OUTPUT 40103 Ali 2 0104 CURRENT 40104 Al4 6 0105 TORQUE 40105 Al5 7 0106 POWER 40106 Al6 8 0107 DC BUS VOLT 40107 Al11 13 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 40109 Al12 14 0301 FB STATUS WORD bit O STOP 40301bit0 BI1 23 0301 FB STATUS WORD bit 2 REV 40301bit2 Bl2 21 0118 DI1 3 STATUS bit 1 DI3 40118 Bli2 72 1 BACnet not defined at time of publication Note With Modbus any parameter can be accessed using the format 4 followed by the parameter number Serial Communication EFB 152 ACH550 UH User s Manual Mailbox Read Write The ACH550 provides a Mailbox function to access parameters that have not been pre defined by the protocol Using mailbox any drive parameter can be identified and read Mailbox can also be used to adjust parameter settings by writing a value to any parameter identified The following table describes the use of this function KA Protocol Reference Name Description g 7 Modbus N2 FLN BACnet Mailbox Enter the number of the drive parameter Does not AO19 95 Parameter to access apply Mailbox Contains the parameter value after a AO20 96 Data read or enter the desired parameter value for a write Mailbox A binary value triggers a read the value BO19 97 Read of the Mailbox Parameter appears in Mailbox data Mailbox A binary value triggers a write the drive BO20 98 Write value for the Mailbox Parameter
63. Automatic Reset Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3101 NR OF TRIALS 0 5 1 5 Sets the number of allowed automatic resets within a trial period defined by 3102 TRIAL TIME Ifthe number of automatic resets exceeds this limit within the trial time the drive prevents additional automatic resets and remains stopped Trial time e Starting then requires a successful reset performed from the control r Time panel or from a source selected by 1604 FAULT RESET SEL x xX g Example Three faults have occurred in the trial time The last is reset x Automatic reset only if the value for 3101 NR OF TRIALS is 3 or more 3102 TRIAL TIME 1 0 600 0 s 0 1s 30 0s Sets the time period used for counting and limiting the number of resets e See 3101 NR OF TRIALS 3103 DELAY TIME 0 0 120 0 s 0 1s 6 0s Sets the delay time between a fault detection and attempted drive restart e If DELAY TIME zero the drive resets immediately 3104 AR OVERCURRENT 0 1 1 0 Sets the automatic reset for the overcurrent function on or off 0 DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset e Automatically resets the fault OVERCURRENT after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation 3105 AR OVERVOLTAGE 0 1 1 1 Sets the automatic reset for the overvoltage function on or off 0 DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset e Automatically
64. B 0 acceleration ramp time z 0 0 LINEAR Specifies linear acceleration deceleration ramps for ramp pair 1 5T 0 1 1000 0 S CURVE Specifies s curve acceleration deceleration ramps for ramp pair 1 Puk MAX A S curve FREQ T B bagi mT AH A 2202 ACCELERATION TIME B 2204 RAMP SHAPE 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 0 0 1800 0 s 0 1s 60 0 s Sets the acceleration time s for zero to maximum frequency for ramp pair 2 See 2002 ACCELER TIME 1 2206 DECELER TIME 2 0 0 1800 0 s 0 1s 60 0s Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp pair 2 See 2003 DECELER TIME 1 Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 89 Group 22 Accel Decel Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2207 RAMP SHAPE 2 0 1000 0 s 0 1s 0 0 Selects the shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp for ramp pair 2 See 2004 RAMP SHAPE 1 2208 EM DEC TIME 0 0 1800 s 0 1s 1 0s Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for an emergency See parameter 2109 EM STOP SEL Ramp is linear 2209 RAMP INPUT 0 6 6 1 0 Defines control for forcing the ramp input to 0 0 NOT SEL 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for forcing the ramp input to O Activating the digital input forces ramp input to 0 Ramp output will ramp to O according to the currently used ramp time after which it will stay at 0 e De activating the digital input ramp resumes normal operation 2
65. DCOM DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DIE Serial Communications Efficiency Cooling Terminals 28 32 provide RS485 serial communication connections used to control or monitor the drive from a fieldbus controller See Serial Communication EFB on page 143 for details Approximately 98 at nominal power level NPN connection sink X1 24V GND DCOM DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DIE Cooling Specifications Method Internal fan flow direction from bottom to top Requirement Free space around the unit 200 mm 8 in above and below the unit 25 mm 1 in along each side of the unit Air Flow 380 480 Volt Drives The following table lists heat loss and air flow data for 380 480 Volt drives Drive Heat Loss Air Flow ACH550 UH Frame Size BTU Hr m3 h 3 min 03A3 4 R1 40 137 44 26 04A1 4 R1 52 177 44 26 06A9 4 R1 97 331 44 26 08A8 4 R1 127 433 44 26 012A 4 R1 172 587 44 26 015A 4 R2 232 792 88 52 023A 4 R2 337 1150 88 52 031A 4 R3 457 1560 134 79 038A 4 R3 562 1918 134 79 044A 4 R4 667 2276 280 165 059A 4 R4 907 3096 280 165 072A 4 R4 1120 3820 280 165 Technical Data ACH550 UH User s Manual
66. Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for Emergency stop command e See DI1 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for Emergency stop command e De activating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command e Activating the digital input removes the Emergency stop command 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for Emergency stop command e See DI1 INV above eee 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR 0 300 1 100 Sets the maximum supplied current during torque boost e See parameter 2101 START FUNCTION Start Up 88 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 22 Accel Decel This group defines ramps that control the rate of acceleration and deceleration You define these ramps as a pair one for acceleration and one for deceleration You can define two pairs of ramps and use a digital input to select one or the other pair Group 22 Accel Decel Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 SEL 6 7 1 0 Defines control for selection of acceleration deceleration ramps e Ramps are defined in pairs one each for acceleration and deceleration e See below for the ramp definition parameters 0 NOT SEL Disables selection the first ramp pair is used 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for ramp pair selection e Activating the digital input selects ramp pair 2 e De activating the digital inp
67. Drive New Berlin WI 53151 USA Telephone 262 785 3200 800 HELP 365 Telefax 262 780 5135
68. Energized Relay STARTED De energized RELAY STATUS Par Group 14 Damper Open Damper Damper Closed Closed DAMPER lt STATUS i Damper Damper Opening Closing Time Time RUN ENABLE SIGNAL from the damper end switch when the damper is fully opened Parameter1601 MOTOR STATUS l ae rn AS a Acceleration Deceleration Time Time Par 2202 Par 2203 Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 79 Group 16 System Controls Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1609 START ENABLE 2 6 7 1 0 Selects the source of the start enable 2 signal Note Start enable functionality differs from the run enable functionality 0 NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external start enable signal 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the start enable 2 signal This digital input must be activated for start enable 2 signal If the voltage drops and de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and show alarm 2022 on panel display The drive will not start until start enable 2 signal resumes 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 2 signal See DI1 above 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start enable 2 signal Bit 3 of the Command word 2 parameter 0302 activates the start disable 2 signal See fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1 DI1 INV Def
69. Factory Engr Point Slope Intercept Subpoint Name Default Units On Text Off Text Type SI Units 01 LAO CTLR ADDRESS 99 1 0 02 LAO APPLICATION 2734 1 03 LAI FREQ OUTPUT 0 Hz 0 1 0 04 LAI PCT OUTPUT 0 PCT 0 1 0 05 LAI SPEED 0 RPM 1 0 06 LAI CURRENT 0 A 0 1 07 LAI TORQUE 0 PCT 0 1 200 08 LAI POWER 0 HP 0 134 0 0 KW lor 0 09 LAI DRIVE TEMP 77 SF 0 18 32 25 ec do lo 10 LAI DRIVE KWH 0 KWH 1 11 LAI DRIVE MWH 0 MWH 1 12 LAI RUN TIME 0 HRS 1 13 LAI DC BUS VOLT 0 V 1 14 LAI OUTPUT VOLT 0 V 1 15 LAI PRC PID FBCK 0 PCT 0 1 16 LAI PRC PID DEV 0 PCT 0 1 17 LAI MOTOR TEMP 77 25 F C 1 8 1 320 18 LAI MREV 0 MREV 1 0 E COUNTER 20 LAO OVRD TIME 1 hrs 1 0 a 21 LDI FWD REV FWD E 1 0 REV FWD 22 LDO CMD FWD REV_ FWD 1 0 REV FWD 23 LDI STOP RUN STOP 5 1 0 RUN STOP 24 LDO CMD STP STRT STOP 1 0 RUN STOP 25 LDI EXT1 2 ACT EXT1 1 0 EXT2 EXT1 26 LDO EXT1 2 CMD EXT1 E 1 0 EXT2 EXT1 27 LDI DRIVE READY NOTRDY 1 0 READY NOTRDY 28 LDI AT SETPOINT NO 5 1 0 YES NO 29 LDO DAY NIGHT DAY E 1 0 NIGHT DAY 30 LAO CURRENTLIM O A 0 1 0 E 31 LAO ACCEL TIME 1 300 sec 0 1 0 z 32 LAO DECEL TIME 1 3
70. Fieldbus controller supplied command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent the table shows samples Protocol Reference Drive Parameter Value Description 7 5 Modbus N2 FLN BACnet 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 10 coMM Start Stop by 40001 BO1 24 fieldbus with Ext1 bit 3 selected 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 10 coMM Start Stop by 40001 BO1 24 fieldbus with Ext2 bit 3 selected 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Direction by Note 3 BO2 22 fieldbus 1 Applies only for Modbus using ABB Drive profile 2 BACnet not defined at time of publication 3 The reference provides direction control a negative reference provides reverse rotation Input Reference Select Using the fieldbus to provide input references to the drive requires Drive parameter values set as defined below e Fieldbus controller supplied reference word s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent the table shows samples Protocol Reference Drive Parameter Value Setting 7 5 Modbus N2 FLN BACnet 1102 EXT1 ExT2 SEL 8 COMM Reference set selection 40001 BO5 26 by fieldbus bit 11 1103 REF1 SEL 8 COMM Input reference 1 by 40002 A01 60 fieldbus 1106 REF2 SEL 8 COMM Input reference 2 by 40003 AO2 61 fieldbus 1 Applies only
71. Manual 71 Group 14 Relay Outputs This group defines the condition that activates each of the relay outputs Group 14 Relay Outputs Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 0 45 1 1 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 1 what relay output 1 means 0 NOT SEL Relay is not used and is de energized 1 READY Energize relay when drive is ready to function Requires e Run enable signal present No faults exist e Supply voltage is within range e Emergency Stop command is not on 2 RUN Energize relay when the drive is running 3 FAULT 1 Energize relay when power is applied De energizes when a fault occurs 4 FAULT Energize relay when a fault is active 5 ALARM Energize relay when an alarm is active 6 REVERSED Energize relay when motor rotates in reverse direction 7 STARTED Energize relay when drive receives a start command even if Run Enable signal is not present De energized relay when drive receives a stop command or a fault occurs 8 SUPRV1 OVER Energize relay when first supervised parameter 3201 exceeds the limit 3203 See Group 32 Supervision starting on page 101 9 suprv1 under Energize relay when first supervised parameter 3201 drops below the limit 3202 See Group 32 Supervision starting on page 101 10 suprv2 over Energize relay when second supervised parameter 3204 exceeds the limit 3
72. Na 024V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 111 GND Common for DI return signals 112 DCOM1 Digital input common for all UU 143 D1 Start Stop Activate to start drive bl M4 DI2 Run permissive Deactivate to stop drive P 1601 LU 115 DI3 Setpoint selection Activate to select Set2 LU 116 DI4 Safety interlock 1 Deactivate to stop drive P 1608 Lo 471 DI5 Safety interlock 2 Deactivate to stop drive P 1609 18 DI6 Not configured 19 RO1C Relay output 1 P 1401 20 RO1A fi Default operation Started gt 19 connected to 21 21 RO1B 22 RO2C Relay output 2 P 1402 23 RO2A fu Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 24 RO2B gt 25 RO3C Relay output 3 P 1403 26 RO3A fx Default operation Fault 1 525 connected to 27 97 RO3B Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 APPLIC MACRO 11 DUAL SETPNT 4010 SETPOINT SEL 19 INTERNAL 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 0 NOT SEL 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT 50 0 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 STARTED 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET 3 DI3 1601 RUN ENABLE 2 D12 4110 SETPOINT SEL 19 INTERNAL 1609 START ENABLE 2 5 DI5 4111 INTERNAL SETPNT 100 0 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 OUTPUT FREQ Start Up 48 ACH550 User s Manual Dual Setpoint with PID and Constant Speeds This macro configures for applications with 2 constant speeds active PID and PID alternating between two setpoints using digital input
73. PRC PID FBCK 16 LAI PRC PID DEV 50 LAO PRC PID GAIN 51 LAO PRC PID ITIM 52 LAO PRC PID DTIM 53 LAO PRC PID DFIL 54 LDO PRC PID SEL 60 LAO INPUT REF1 61 LAO INPUT REF2 82 LAI Al 1 ACTUAL 83 LAI Al 2 ACTUAL 84 LAI AO 1 ACTUAL 85 LAI Al 2 ACTUAL External PID Point Tma Subpoint Name 55 LAO EXT PID GAIN 56 LAO EXT PID ITIM 57 LAO EXT PID DTIM 58 LAO EXT PID DFIL 62 LAO EXT PID STPT 63 LAI EXT PID FBCK 64 LAI EXT PID DEV 82 LAI Al 1 ACTUAL 83 LAI Al 2 ACTUAL 84 LAI AO 1 ACTUAL 85 LAI Al 2 ACTUAL Each host FLN application e g CIS or Insight controls both the particular data reported for each point and the report format Scaling Drive Feedback Values Feedback values are provided with units of percent where 0 and 100 correspond to the range of the sensor being used to measure the control variable These points have default units in Hz If other units are required Unbundle these points with appropriate slopes and intercepts The new intercept equals the lowest value of the desired range Serial Communication EFB ACH550 UH User s Manual 183 e Calculate the new slope as follows Desired Range i e high low values x Slope of Existing Point Range of Existing Point New Slope 60 Hz 0 Hz x 0 01 100 0 0 006 Example You are controlling water temperature from a cooling tower using the ACH550 to control a fan The temperature
74. Profibus DP is a registered trademark of Siemens AG 2004 ABB Oy All Rights Reserved ACH550 UH User s Manual Safety BEB B PPP PP Warning The ACH550 adjustable speed AC drive should ONLY be installed by a qualified electrician Warning Even when the motor is stopped dangerous voltage is present at the Power Circuit terminals U1 V1 W1 and U2 V2 W2 and where present UDC UDC BRK and BRK Warning Dangerous voltage is present when input power is connected After disconnecting the supply wait at least 5 minutes to let the intermediate circuit capacitors discharge before removing the cover Warning Even when power is removed from the input terminals of the ACH550 there may be dangerous voltage from external sources on the terminals of the relay outputs R01 R03 Warning When the control terminals of two or more drive units are connected in parallel the auxiliary voltage for these control connections must be taken from a single source which can either be one of the units or an external supply Warning The ACH550 UH is not a field repairable unit Never attempt to repair a malfunctioning unit contact the factory or your local Authorized Service Center for replacement Warning The ACH550 will start up automatically after an input voltage interruption if the external run command is on Warning The heat sink may reach a high temperature See Technical Data on page 225 Warning If the drive will b
75. Profile Technical Data 0 000 000 ccc ccc ee 210 Diagnostics Diagnostic Displays scssi cers ieone eee edges Geese ee Rew eS lek eed 212 Table of Contents ACH550 UH User s Manual Correcting AA AN 213 COrmecting Ala MSs saena aie ma aNG BILING cage es LAGE ge DAGDAG 218 Maintenance Maintenance Intervals 24 00x mapapa Bedale eee EN eee ES DUDA PNG 221 RIGAISINK Corel Lh Aka DA DU nG tid iki NG a Ta Binet ASE Qed ets BE dae 2 221 Main Fan Replacement 22 42 4006 ha vies det ha aka ede nae Ss 222 Internal Enclosure Fan Replacement 0000 e eee ee eee 223 Capacitors e Goce eae ke ye aan ee nee be eee we ee knee eS 223 Contrl Panel vols tinct BAKA up ant Glo ka as NANG TASANG WAG 224 Technical Data GN AA ena GS Bt 225 Input Power Connections iv S320 thule ata hha Sed NAB 228 Motor Connections s a s Bie Bye tes BAY cae MO ts a te an Bll ore cat ng os A 232 Control Connections 24 5 eA cot am sed KA KA ABG AP AB Se 237 ETICIONIGY Saori ALALA NATAN YA erm ae aad E ood Gea See ene eee 240 COGING tks Ss ote Ae PA et Rework ey ean 240 Dimensions and Weights 25 25 esd aeee 4k iylecieen Bate eae ee eee eee 241 Degrees of Protection 2 Kama ect WAG Hoa cea s Soe ew anes Sea oo 244 Ambient Conditions sky aag 2 slp as Reta heads sta eS ecard a kines eee ary date 244 Materials ey nema a a bente ees AA ee ee AA 245 Applicable Standards mg coin paaa ien area kee as See laha 245 Habilit TEMAS s creed Bs oc Ste Se ates ae
76. Running gt 22 connected to 24 24 RO2B f 25 RO3C Relay output 3 P 1403 26 RO3A fx Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 7 TROSB Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 APPLIC MACRO 5 CONDENSER 2203 DECELER TIME 1 10 0s 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 STARTED 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 1601 RUN ENABLE 2 DI2 4005 ERROR VALUE INV 1 YES 1609 START ENABLE 2 5 DI5 4101 GAIN 1 0 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 10 0s 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 60 0s Start Up 42 Booster Pump ACH550 User s Manual This macro configures for booster pump applications where the pump speed is controlled according to a signal received from a transducer When using direct speed reference in AUTO mode or process PID see General Considerations on page 35 X1 7 ISCR Signal cable shield screen Q L1yj2 Ali External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC CD 5 Al2 PID feedback 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common J1 Jumper Settings 7 AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA Sp Alt 0 2 10 V A3 8 AO2 Output current 0 4 20 mA S p AI2 0 4 20 mA y H9 AGND Analog output circuit common
77. S p AI2 0 4 20 mA y H9 AGND Analog output circuit common _ 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 141 GND Common for DI return signals L M12 DCOM1 Digital input common for all H3 DN Start Stop Activate to start drive L 14 DI2 Run enable Deactivate to stop drive P 1601 15 DI3 Not configured 16 DI4 Not configured 17 DI5 Not configured 18 DI6 Not configured 19 RO1C Relay output 1 P 1401 20 RO1A fi Default operation Started gt 19 connected to 21 21 RO1B f 22 RO2C f Relay output 2 P 1402 23 RO2A a Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 24 RO2B f 25 RO3C Relay output 3 P 1403 26 RO3A Default operation Fault 1 525 connected to 27 57 RO3B Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 APPLIC MACRO 13 E BYPASS 1608 START ENABLE 1 O NOT SEL 1201 CONST SPEED SEL O NOT SEL 2108 START INHIBIT 1 ON 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 STARTED 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 1601 RUN ENABLE 2 DI2 Start Up 50 Hand Control This macro configures for drive control using only the control panel with no automated control Typically this is a temporary configuration used prior to control ACH550 User s Manual wiring X1 17 SCR Signal cable shi
78. See the Reference Scaling in the following sections as appropriate e ABB Drives Profile Technical Data e Generic Profile Technical Data System Control Using the fieldbus for miscellaneous drive control requires Drive parameter values set as defined below e Fieldbus controller command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Protocol Drive Parameter Value Description Reference 1601 RUN ENABLE 7 COMM Run enable by fieldbus 1604 FAULT RESET SEL 8 COMM Fault reset by fieldbus 1607 PARAM SAVE 1 SAVE Saves altered parameters to memory then value returns to 0 Serial Communication FBA ACH550 UH User s Manual 199 Relay Output Control Using the fieldbus for relay output control requires Drive parameter values set as defined below Fieldbus controller supplied binary coded relay command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Drive Parameter Value Description Kaba 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 35 COMM Relay Output 1 controlled by fieldbus 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 36 COMM 1 Relay Output 2 controlled by fieldbus 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 Relay Output 3 controlled by fieldbus 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 Relay Output 4 controlled by fieldbus 1411 RELAY OUTPUT 5 Relay Out
79. UL Class T A Bussmann Type 04A6 2 4 6 10 10 JJS 10 06A6 2 6 6 07A5 2 7 5 012A 2 11 8 16 15 JJS 15 017A 2 16 7 25 25 JJS 25 024A 2 24 2 30 JJS 30 031A 2 30 8 40 40 JJS 40 046A 2 46 2 63 60 JJS 60 059A 2 59 4 80 JJS 80 075A 2 74 8 80 100 JJS 100 088A 2 88 0 100 110 JJS 110 114A 2 114 125 150 JJS 150 143A 2 143 200 200 JJS 200 178A 2 178 250 250 JJS 250 221A 2 221 315 300 JJS 300 248A 2 248 350 JJS 350 Technical Data 230 ACH550 UH User s Manual Emergency Stop Devices The overall design of the installation must include emergency stop devices and any other safety equipment that may be needed Pressing STOP on the drive s control panel does NOT e Generate an emergency stop of the motor e Separate the drive from dangerous potential Input Power Cables Wiring Input wiring can be either A four conductor cable three phases and ground protective earth routed through conduit e Four insulated conductors routed through conduit Size wiring according to local safety regulations appropriate input voltage and the drive s load current In any case the conductor must be less than the maximum limit defined by the terminal size see Drive s Power Connection Terminals on page 231 The table below lists copper and aluminum cable types for different load currents These recommendations apply only for the conditions listed at the top of the table
80. Using the fieldbus for the PID control setpoint requires Drive parameter values set as defined below Fieldbus controller supplied setpoint value in the appropriate location As defined in Analog Output Control above Protocol Drive Parameter Value Description Reference 4010 SETPOINT SEL 8 comm VALUE 1 Setpoint is 0135 value plusor 9 COMM Al1 times Al1 10 comm al1 Communication Fault When using fieldbus control specify the drive s action if serial communication is lost l ee Protocol Drive Parameter Value Description Reference 3018 COMM FAULT 0 NOT SEL Set for appropriate drive FUNC 1 FAULT response 2 CONST SP7 3 LAST SPEED 3019 COMM FAULT Set time delay before acting on a communication TIME loss Feedback from the Drive FBA Inputs to the controller drive outputs have pre defined meanings established by the protocol This feedback does not require drive configuration The following table lists a sample of feedback data For a complete listing see all parameters listed in Parameter Descriptions Drive Parameter Protocol Reference 0102 SPEED 0103 FREQ OUTPUT 0104 CURRENT 0105 TORQUE 0106 POWER 0107 DC BUS VOLT 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 0301 FB STATUS WORD bit 0 STOP 0301 FB STATUS WORD bit 2 REV 0118 DI1 3 STATUS bit 1 DI3 Scaling To scale the drive paramet
81. activation signal e This digital input must be activated for override activation signal 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the override activation signal See DI1 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the override activation signal 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the override activation signal e See DI1 INV above 1702 OVERRIDE FREQ 500 500 Hz 0 1 0 0 Defines a preset frequency for the override Note Set this value if motor control mode Par 9904 is SCALAR FREQ 3 Start Up 82 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 17 Override Code Description Range Resolution DefaultS 1703 OVERRIDE SPEED 30 000 30 000 rpm 1 0 Defines a preset speed for the override Note Set this value if motor control mode Par 9904 is VECTOR SPEED 1 1704 OVERR PASS CODE 0 65535 1 0 Entering the correct override pass code unlocks parameter 1705 for one change Enter the pass code always before changing the value of the parameter 1705 See parameter 1705 below The pass code is 358 The entry reverts back to zero automatically 1705 OVERRIDE ENABLE 0 1 1 0 Selects whether the override is enabled or disabled 0 OFF Override disabled 1 ON Override enabled When enabled the drive stores the values of all parameters into an override parameter set see parameter 9902 and the parameters
82. are Metasys outputs Supported Features In the N2 Fieldbus protocol the ACH550 drive appears as a virtual object p pp PAG eee ee ES 1 M or Analog Inputs Binary Inputs l p a Virtual Object _Analog Outputs ACH550 SANAD SURUS Binary Outputs oe EP 2 Internal values Float Integer Byte a A virtual object is made up of e Analog Inputs e Binary Inputs e Analog Outputs e Binary Outputs e Internal values for Floating point Integer and Byte values The ACH550 drive does not support N2 Fieldbus communication internal values All of the Analog and Binary I O objects are listed below starting with N2 Analog Input Objects on page 173 Analog Input The analog input objects support the following features e Analog Input actual value in engineering units e Low Alarm limit Low Warning limit e High Warning limit e High Alarm limit e Differential value for the hysteresis of the Alarms and Warnings e Change of State COS enabled e Alarm Enabled e Warning Enabled e Override value is received but there is no action taken Binary Input The binary input objects support the following features e Binary Input actual value e Normal Alarm state specification e Alarm Enabled e Change of State COS enabled Serial Communication EFB 172 ACH550 UH User s Manual e Override value is received but there is no action taken Analog Output The analog output ob
83. attempt to read or write outside the parameter addresses the Modbus interface returns an exception code to the controller The following table summarizes the 4xxxx drive control registers 40001 40099 for 4xxxx registers above 40099 see the drive parameter list e g 40102 is parameter 0102 ACH550 M paan Standard Profile Access Remarks ABB DRIVES 40001 CONTROL WORD R W Supported only if the drive is configured to use the ABB Drives Profile 5305 0 40002 Reference 1 R W Range 0 20000 scaled to 0 1105 REF1 MAX or 20000 0 scaled to 1105 REF1 MAX 0 40003 Reference 2 R W Range 0 10000 scaled to 0 1108 REF2 MAX or 10000 0 scaled to 1108 REF2 MAX 0 40004 STATUS WORD R This register is only supported if the drive is configured to use the ABB Drives Profile 5305 0 40005 Actual 1 R By default stores a copy of 0103 OUTPUT FREQ Use select using 5310 parameter 5310 to select a different actual value for this register 40006 Actual 2 R By default stores a copy of 0104 CURRENT Use select using 5311 parameter 5311 to select a different actual value for this register 40007 Actual 3 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5312 to select using 5312 select an actual value for this register 40008 Actual 4 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5313 to select by 5313 select an actual value for this register 40009 Actual 5 R By default stores nothing Use param
84. bytes overflow the buffer The excess characters are counted 5208 CRC ERRORS 0 65535 1 Contains a count of the messages with a CRC error that the drive receives For high counts check e Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors e CRC calculations for possible errors Start Up 128 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 53 EFB Protocol This group defines set up variables used for an embedded fieldbus EFB communication protocol Refer to communication protocol documentation for more information on these parameters Group 53 EFB Control Code Description Range Resolution Default S 5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID 0000 FFFF hex 1 0000 hex Contains the identification and program revision of the protocol Format XXYY where xx protocol ID and YY program revision 5302 EFB STATION ID 0 65535 1 1 v Defines the node address of the RS485 link The node address on each unit must be unique 5303 EFB BAUD RATE 1 2 57 6 kbits s 9 6 kbits s Defines the communication speed of the RS485 link in kbits per second kbits s 1 2 kbits s 2 4 kbits s 4 8 kbits s 9 6 kbits s 19 2 kbits s 38 4 kbits s 57 6 kbits s 5304 EFB PARITY 0 3 0 Defines the data length parity and stop bits to be used with the RS485 link communication The same settings must be used in all on line stations 0 8N1 8 data bits No parity one stop bit 1 8N2 8 data bits No parity
85. can be used on multiple protocols including protocols available on the FBA module This section describes the ABB Drives profile implemented for FBA modules Control Word As described earlier in Control Interface the CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the CONTROL WORD content for the ABB Drives profile ABB Drives Profile FBA CONTROL WORD Commanded Bit Name Value State Comments 0 OFF1 1 READY TO OPERATE Enter READY TO OPERATE CONTROL 3 z 0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive ramps to stop according to currently active deceleration ramp 2203 or 2205 Normal command sequence e Enter OFF1 ACTIVE e Proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks OFF2 OFF3 are active 1 OFF2 1 OPERATING Continue operation OFF2 inactive CONTROL 0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive coasts to stop Normal command sequence e Enter OFF2 ACTIVE e Proceed to SWITCHON INHIBITED 2 OFF3 1 OPERATING Continue operation OFF3 inactive CONTROL 0 EMERGENCY STOP Drive stops within in time specified by parameter 2208 Normal command sequence e Enter OFF3 ACTIVE e Proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED WARNING Be sure motor and driven equipment can be stopped using this mode 3 INHIBIT 1 OPERATION Enter OPERATION ENABLED Note the Run OPERATION ENABLED enable signal must be active See 1601 If 1601 is set to
86. conductors in raceway or cable or earth directly buried e Copper cables with concentric copper shield Max Max Load Cu Cable Load AlCable Nox road Cu Wire Size Current mm Current mm A AWG kemil A A 249 3x150 237 4 0 284 3x185 264 250 MCM or 2 x 1 291 300 MCM or 2 x 1 0 319 350 MCM or 2 x 2 0 Ground Connections For personnel safety proper operation and to reduce electromagnetic emission pick up the drive and the motor must be grounded at the installation site Conductors must be adequately sized as required by safety regulations Power cable shields must be connected to the drive PE terminal in order to meet safety regulations Power cable shields are suitable for use as equipment grounding conductors only when the shield conductors are adequately sized as required by safety regulations In multiple drive installations do not connect drive terminals in series Drive s Power Connection Terminals The following table provides specifications for the drive s power connection terminals Frame U1 V1 W1 and U2 V2 W2 Terminals Earthing PE Terminal Size Maximum Wire Size Torque Maximum Wire Size Torque mm AWG Nm lb ft mm AWG Nm lb ft R1 6 8 1 4 1 0 4 10 1 4 1 0 R2 10 6 1 4 1 0 10 8 1 4 1 0 R3 25 3 1 8 11 5 16 6 1 8 1 3 R4 50 1 0 2 0 1 5 35 2 2 0 15 R5 70 2 0 15 11 1 70 2 0 15 11 1 R6 185 350 MCM 40 29 5 95 4 0 8 5
87. e To turn Relay 1 On Force object B07 to On To turn Relay 2 On Force object B08 to On To turn both Relay 1 and 2 On Force objects B07 and B08 On Note Relay status feedback occurs without configuration as defined below Protocol Reference Drive Parameter Setting J 5 Modbus N2 FLN BACnet 0122 RO 1 3 STATUS Relay 1 3 status 40122 BI4 BI6 76 78 0123 RO 4 6 STATUS Relay 4 6 status 40123 BI7 BI9 79 81 1 Applies only for Modbus using ABB Drive profile 2 BACnet not defined at time of publication Analog Output Control Using the fieldbus for analog output control e g PID setpoint requires Drive parameter values set as defined below e Fieldbus controller supplied analog value s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Protocol Reference Drive Parameter Value Setting 7 5 Modbus N2 FLN BACnet 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 135 coMM Analog Output 1 VALUE 1 controlled by writing to 0135 COMM VALUE 1 parameter 0135 40135 AO14 46 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 136 comm Analog Output 2 a VALUE 2 controlled by writing to 0136 COMM VALUE 2 parameter 0136 40136 AO15 47 1 Applies only for Modbus using ABB Drive profile 2 BACnet not defined at time of publication PID Control Setpoint Source Using the fieldbus for t
88. each PFA relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on The number of PFA relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFA The Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No PFA Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled Relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 DI4 Free Not allowed DI5 Speed Reg Motor DI6 Free 1 DI1 DI4 Free DI1 DI4 Free DI5 Speed Reg Motor DI5 First PFA Relay DI6 First PFA Relay DI6 Free 2 Not allowed DI1 DI4 Free DI5 First PFA Relay DI6 Second PFA Relay 3 6 Not allowed Not allowed 6 DI6 Enables the Interlock function and assigns digital input DI6 to the interlock signal for the speed regulated motor e Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 No PFA Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled Relays 0 DI1 DI5 Free Not allowed DI6 Speed Reg Motor 1 Not allowed DI1 DI5 Free D16 First PFA Relay 2 6 Not allowed Not allowed 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL 0 1 1 0 Selects Regulator by pass control When enabled f Regulator by pass control provides a simple control OUT 4 mechanism without a PID regulator fax Use Regulator by pass control only in special applications 0 NO Disables Regulator by pass control The drive uses the normal PFA reference 1106 REF2 SELECT 1 YES Enables Regulator by pass control The process PID reg
89. f Param 0103 OUTPUT FREQ OPERATING SW Bit8 1 D lt RFG Ramp Function Generator This state transition also occurs if the fault is reset from any other source e g digital input Serial Communication EFB 168 Reference Scaling ACH550 UH User s Manual The following table describes REFERENCE scaling for the ABB Drives profile ABB Drives Profile Reference Reference Range Type Scaling Remarks REF1 32767 Speed or 20000 par 1105 Final reference limited by PE frequency 0 0 1104 1105 Actual motor 32767 20000 par 1105 speed limited by 2001 2002 20000 corresponds to 100 speed or 2007 2008 frequency REF2 32767 Speedor 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by Se frequency 0 0 1107 1108 Actual motor 32767 10000 par 1108 speed limited by 2001 2002 10000 corresponds to 100 speed or 2007 2008 frequency Torque 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by 0 0 2015 2017 torque1 or 2016 10000 par 1108 2018 torque2 10000 corresponds to 100 PID 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by Reference 0 0 4012 4013 PID set1 or 10000 par 1108 10000 corresponds to 100 4112 4113 PID set2 Note The setting of parameter 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN has no effect on the scaling of references When parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to COMM AI1 or COMM AI1 the refere
90. in Group 17 will be write protected except parameter 1704 To change the other parameters in the Group 17 override has to be disabled Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 83 Group 20 Limits This group defines minimum and maximum limits to follow in driving the motor speed frequency current torque etc Group 20 Limits Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2001 MINIMUM SPEED 30000 30000 rpm 1 rpm 0 rpm v Defines the minimum speed rpm allowed A positive or zero minimum speed value defines two ranges Laas 2001 value is lt 0 one positive and one negative sA negative minimum speed value defines one speed range e See figure 0 gt Pa 7 Time P 2001 Speed 2001 value is gt 0 P 2002 a aa p lime P 2001 7 P 2002 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 1800 US v Defines the maximum speed rpm allowed 2003 MAX CURRENT 0 0 1 3 lon 01A 1 3 lon v Defines the maximum output current A supplied by the drive to the motor 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL 0 1 1 1 Sets the DC undervoltage controller on or off When on If the DC bus voltage drops due to loss of input power the undervoltage controller decreases the motor speed in order to keep the DC bus voltage above the lower limit When the motor speed decreases the inertia of the load causes regeneration back into the drive keeping the DC bus charged and preventing an undervoltage trip T
91. low limit parameters 101 parameter selection parameters 101 supply phase fault code 215 switching frequency a 232 ACH550 UH User s Manual switching frequency control parameter 94 switching frequency derating 227 switching frequency parameter 94 system controls parameter group 76 T temperature derating 227 termination 145 test date parameter 103 thermal fail fault code 215 timers DOGS ra ads Siok tore Saks Aaah 112 enable Pag NAA Rae eine ee a Doce 111 parameter group 110 SOUNCC ei ana aa Reve Na AN naay 113 start stop time 2005 111 TOONS ka A vind Pea thd Sahn Kaha LG hah 9 torque at fault history parameter 60 boost current parameter 87 data parameter 222205 53 max limit select parameter 84 max limit parameter 85 min limit select parameter 84 min limit parameters 85 trim mode PID parameter 123 trim scale PID parameter 123 type COE neni bo cae Salers PP 8 U UL CSA markings 246 underload curve fault parameter 98 fault code E ee ee 214 function fault parameter 98 time fault parameter 98 un
92. module 0 NOT DEFINED Module not found or not properly connected or parameter 9802 is not set to 4 exT FBA 1 PROFIBUS DP 16 INTERBUS 21 LONWORKS 32 CANOPEN 37 DEVICENET 64 MODBUS PLUS 101 CONTROLNET 128 ETHERNET 5102 FB PAR 2 FB PAR 26 0 65535 1 0 5126 For more information on these parameters refer to the user s manual supplied with the FBA module 5127 FBA PAR REFRESH 0 1 1 0 Validates any changed fieldbus parameter settings After refreshing the value reverts automatically to DONE 5128 FILE CPI FW REV 0000 FFFF hex 1 0000 hex Displays the CPI firmware revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter configuration file Format is xyz where x major revision number e y minor revision number z correction number Example 107 revision 1 07 5129 FILE CONFIG ID 0000 FFFF hex 1 0000 hex Displays the revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter module s configuration file identification File configuration information is drive application program dependent 5130 FILE CONFIG REV 0000 FFFF hex 1 0000 hex Contains the revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter module configuration file Example 1 revision 1 5131 FBA STATUS 0 6 1 0 Contains the status of the adapter module 0 IDLE Adapter not configured 1 EXEC INIT Adapter is initializing 2 TIME OUT A timeout has occurred in the communication between the adapter and the drive 3 CONFIG ERROR
93. motor when Autochange is not used 2016 Reserved 2017 OFF BUTTON Note 1 2018 PID SLEEP This alarm warns that the PID sleep function is active which means note 1 that the motor could accelerate when the PID sleep function ends To control PID sleep use parameters 4022 4026 or 4122 4126 2019 ID RUN Performing ID run 2020 OVERRIDE Override mode activated 2021 START ENABLE 1 This alarm warns that the Start Enable 1 signal is missing MISSING To control Start Enable 1 function use parameter 1608 To correct check e Digital input configuration e Communication settings Diagnostics 220 ACH550 UH User s Manual Alarm x bira Code Display Description 2022 START ENABLE 2 This alarm warns that the Start Enable 2 signal is missing MISSING To control Start Enable 2 function use parameter 1609 To correct check e Digital input configuration e Communication settings 2023 EMERGENCY Emergency stop activated STOP Note 1 Even when the relay output is configured to indicate alarm conditions e g parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 5 ALARM or 16 FLT ALARM this alarm is not indicated by a relay output Diagnostics ACH550 UH User s Manual 221 Maintenance Warning Read Safety on page 3 before performing any maintenance on the equipment Ignoring the safety instructions can cause injury or death Maintenance Intervals If installed in an appropriate environment the dri
94. motor takes a turn connected to the ACH550 output the speed regulated motor e The starting order of the other motors rotates The Autochange function requires External switchgear for changing the dive s output power connections e Parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS value gt 0 Autochange is performed when e The running time since the previous autochange reaches the time set by 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV The PFA input is below the level set by this parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Note The ACH550 always coasts to stop when autochange is performed Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 135 Group 81 PFA Code 8120 Description Range Resolution Default S In an autochange the Autochange function does all of the PID Output following see figure A e Initiates a change when the running time since the last 100 autochange reaches 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV and PFA PFA input is below limit 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Stops the speed regulated motor P8119 3PFA e Switches off the contactor of the speed regulated motor 3PFA 1 e Increments the starting order counter to change the 4PFA starting order for the motors 2PFA aai e Identifies the next motor in line to be the speed regulated motor 1PFA 1 e Switches off the above motor s contactor if the motor was gt ae P 8122 running Any other running motors are not interrupted e Switches on the contactor of the new speed regulated motor The autochange switchg
95. parameter group aaa 88 ramp select parameter 88 ramp shape parameter 88 ramp time PFA parameter 141 ramp zero select parameter 89 time parameter 2 0005 88 default macro 2 eee eee eae 37 derating altitude ostia eeu Std aa Wat a Dina KS 227 single phase supply 227 switching frequency 227 temperature 0 0000 227 derivation time PID parameter 116 derivation time parameter 90 device overtemperature fault code 213 device type N2 173 diagnose S hike Na wa a a ad Na 212 EFB COMM aama iaa taan a e mad 153 FBA comm 2 201 digital cable requirementS 0 0 00 c eee eee 238 digital input at fault history parameters 60 CONNECLIONS aaan 239 specifications 2 0 237 status data parameter 54 digital output CONNECLIONS eaaa aaan 239 specifications snaa aa 237 dimensions MOUNTING sra raa kane dee Ge ele 242 outside enclosure 243 direction control parameter a asana aa 62 display format PID parameter 116 drive control terminal descriptions 239 device type N2 aa 173 EFB comm installation 145 FBA module installation 196 id faultcode anaa a a 215 rating parameter
96. same conduit as input power wiring run 5 Strip the wires 10 12 Connect the power motor and ground wires to the drive terminals See Wiring Overview on page 13 and Connection Diagrams on page 14 Route the control cables through the conduit not the same conduit as either input power or motor wiring runs Strip the control cable sheathing and twist the copper screen into a pig tail Connect the ground screen pig tail for digital and analog I O cables at X1 1 Ground only at drive end Connect the ground screen pig tail for RS485 cables at X1 28 or X1 32 Ground only at drive end Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals See Wiring Overview on page 13 Install the conduit box cover 1 screw 17 IP5013 IP5023 See IP5008 Installation 18 ACH550 UH User s Manual Check Installation Before applying power perform the following checks v Check Installation environment conforms to the drive s specifications for ambient conditions The drive is mounted securely Space around the drive meets the drive s specifications for cooling The motor and driven equipment are ready for start For floating networks The internal RFI filter is disconnected The drive is properly grounded The input power voltage matches the drive nominal input voltage range The
97. sensor has a range of 30 to 250 degrees Fahrenheit To unbundle the set point INPUT REF 2 for commanding in degrees Fahrenheit where 0 60 Hz is equal to 30 250 F New Intercept 30 the temperature that corresponds to 0 Desired Range x Slope of Existing Point Range of Existing Point 250 F 30 F x 0 1 100 0 New Slope 0 22 To unbundle the feedback PRC PID FBCK for monitoring in degrees Fahrenheit New Intercept 30 Desired Range x Slope of Existing Point New Slope Sai Range of Existing Point H 250 F 30 F x 0 01 0 022 100 0 Loop Gains PRC PID GAIN Point 50 and PRC PID ITIM Point 51 are PID parameters similar to the P and I gains in the APOGEE TECs Because the ABB PI loop and the Siemens loop are structured differently there is no a one to one correspondence between the gains The following formulas allow translation from ABB gains to Siemens gains and vice versa To convert from ABB PI gains to Siemens P and gains P GAINciemens Pl GAINapp x 0 0015 PI GAIN app SA ABB 40 001 PIGAINGS NS GAINgiemens To convert from Siemens P and gains to ABB PI gains P GAINapp Pl GAINgiemens x 667 PI GAINgiemens wemens x 667 PI GAINsiemens GAINgpp Serial Communication EFB 184 ACH550 UH User s Manual Point Database The following table lists the point database for FLN ACH550 Application 2734 FLN Point Database
98. shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor If this is not possible leave the shield unconnected Thermistor relay OMIO board DI6 24 VDC Thermistor 0 OMIO board n gt DI6 gt i 24 VDC 110nF For other faults or for anticipating motor overheating using a model see Group 30 Fault Functions Group 35 Motor Temp Meas Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3501 SENSOR TYPE 0 6 1 0 Identifies the type of motor temperature sensor used PT100 C or PTC ohms See parameters 1501 and 1507 0 NONE 1 1 x PT100 Sensor configuration uses one PT 100 sensor e Analog output A01 or A02 feeds constant current through the sensor The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises as does the voltage over the sensor e The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input Al1 or Al2 and converts it to degrees centigrade 2 2 x PT100 Sensor configuration uses two PT 100 sensors e Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100 3 3 x PT100 Sensor configuration uses three PT 100 sensors e Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100 4 PTC Sensor configuration uses one PTC Ohm e The analog output feeds a constant current through the sensor 4000 e The resistance of the sensor increases sharply as the motor tem
99. the symmetrically constructed PE conductor and a conductivity of the phase conductor shield Shield PE Shield Conductor and Shield PE Shield Not allowed for motor cables CE 8 C Tick A four conductor system three phase conductors and a protective conductor without a shield Allowed for motor cables with phase P conductor cross section up to 10 mm B80 Effective Motor Cable Screens The general rule for cable screen effectiveness is the better and tighter the cable s screen the lower the radiated emission level The following figure shows an example of an effective construction for example Olflex Servo FD 780 CP Lappkabel or MCCMK NK Cables Insulation Jacket Inner Insulator L2 L1 Braided Metallic Screen L3 Clamp the cable shield into the gland plate at the drive end Twist the cable screen wires together into a bundle not longer than five times its width and connect it to the terminal marked at the bottom right hand corner of the drive At the motor end the motor cable screen must be earthed 360 degrees with an EMC cable gland or the screen wires must be twisted together into a bundle not longer than five times its width and connected to the PE terminal of the motor EN61800 3 Compliant Motor Cables To comply with EN61800 3 First and Second Environment Restricted Distribution requirements motor cables e Less than or equal to 30 m 100 ft do not require an RFI EMC filter e Must have an effectiv
100. the direction Selecting 1003 3 request is the same as 1003 1 fwd 2 DI1 2 Two wire Start Stop Direction e Start Stop is through digital input DI1 DI1 activated Start DI1 de activated Stop e Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 request is through digital input D12 D12 activated Reverse de activated Forward 3 DI1P 2P Three wire Start Stop e Start Stop commands are through momentary push buttons the P stands for pulse e Start is through a normally open push button connected to digital input DI1 In order to start the drive the digital input DI2 must be activated prior the pulse in DI1 e Connect multiple Start push buttons in parallel e Stop is through a normally closed push button connected to digital input D12 e Connect multiple Stop push buttons in series e Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecting 1003 3 REQUEST is the same as 1003 1 FWD 4 DI1P 2P 3 Three wire Start Stop Direction e Start Stop commands are through momentary push buttons as described for DI1P 2P e Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST is through digital input DI3 DI3 activated Reverse de activated Forward 5 DIP 2P 3P Start Forward Start Reverse and Stop e Start and Direction commands are given simultaneously with two separate momentary push buttons the P stands for pulse e Start Forward command is through a normally open push button connecte
101. the state diagram later in this sub section describe the status word content ABB Drives Profile EFB STATUS WORD Bit Name Value Correspond to Paraan the state diagram 0 RDY ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON 0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON 1 RDY RUN 1 READY TO OPERATE 0 OFF1 ACTIVE 2 RDY REF 1 OPERATION ENABLED 0 OPERATION INHIBITED 3 TRIPPED 0 1 FAULT 0 No fault 4 OFF_2_STA 1 OFF2 INACTIVE 0 OFF2 ACTIVE 5 OFF 3 STA 1 OFF3 INACTIVE 0 OFF3 ACTIVE 6 SWC ON INHIB SWITCH ON INHIBIT ACTIVE 0 SWITCH ON INHIBIT NOT ACTIVE Serial Communication EFB ACH550 UH User s Manual 165 ABB Drives Profile EFB STATUS WORD Bit Name Value Description Correspond to states boxes in the state diagram ALARM 1 Warning alarm See Alarm Listing in the Diagnostics section for details on alarms No warning alarm AT_SETPOINT OPERATING Actual value equals within tolerance limits the reference value Actual value is outside tolerance limits not equal to reference value REMOTE Drive control location REMOTE EXT1 or EXT2 Drive control location LOCAL 10 ABOVE LIMIT Supervised parameter s value 5 supervision high limit Bit remains 1 until supervised parameter s value lt supervision low limit See group 32 Supervision Supervised parameter s value lt supervision low limit Bit remains O until supervi
102. 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 3 000011 0 0 0 0 1 1 4 000100 0 0 0 1 0 0 5 62 kag a ves me ma 63 111111 1 1 1 1 1 1 e 0 De energize relay 1 Energize relay 36 COMM 1 Energize relay based on input from fieldbus communication e Fieldbus writes binary code in parameter 0134 that can energizes relay 1 relay 6 according to the following Par 0134 Binary RO6 RO5 RO4 RO3 RO2 RO1 0 000000 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 000001 1 1 1 i 1 0 2 000010 1 1 1 1 0 1 3 000011 dl 1 1 1 0 0 4 000100 1 1 1 0 1 1 63 111111 0 0 0 0 0 0 e 0 De energize relay 1 Energize relay 37 TIMER 1 Energize relay when timer 1 is activated See Group 36 Timer Functions 38 40 TIMER 2 4 Energize relay when Timer 2 4 is active See Timer 1 above 41 M TRIG FAN Energize relay when cooling fan counter is triggered 42 M TRIG REV Energize relay when revolutions counter is triggered 43 M TRIG RUN Energize relay when run time counter is triggered 44 M TRIG MWH Energize relay when power consumption counter is triggered 45 OVERRIDE Energize relay when override is activated 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 0 45 1 2 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 2 what relay output 2 means e See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 0 45 1 3 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 3 what relay output 3 means e See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1404 RO1 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s Defines the switch on delay for relay 1 O
103. 0 ACH550 UH User s Manual Data words 5 and 6 are scaled as follows ABB Drives Profile Data Word Contents Scaling cc cl 5 ACTUAL SPEED 20000 20000 par 1105 par 1105 6 TORQUE 10000 10000 100 100 Actual Value Mapping See the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Generic Profile Technical Data Overview The generic profile aims to fulfill the industry standard drive profile for each protocol e g PROFldrive for PROFIBUS AC DC Drive for DeviceNet Control Word As described earlier in Control Interface the CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system For specific CONTROL WORD content see the user s manual provided with the FBA module Status Word As described earlier in Control Interface the contents of the STATUS WORD is status information sent by the drive to the master station For specific STATUS WORD content see the user s manual provided with the FBA module Reference As described earlier in Control Interface the REFERENCE word is a speed or frequency reference Note REF2 is not supported by the Generic Drive profiles Reference Scaling REFERENCE scaling is fieldbus type specific However at the drive the meaning of a 100 REFERENCE value is fixed as described in the table below For a detailed Serial Communication FBA ACH550 UH User s Manual 211 description on the r
104. 00 Hz 10 m s 33 ft s In accordance with ISTA 1A and 1B specifications Shock IEC 68 2 29 Not allowed max 100 m s 330 ft s 11ms 36 fts Technical Data ACH550 UH User s Manual 245 Ambient Environment Requirements Storage and Transportation in the Installation Site protective package Not allowed e 76cm 30 in frame size R1 61 cm 24 in frame size R2 46 cm 18 in frame size R3 Free fall e 31cm 12 in frame size R4 Qc cc 25 cm 10 in frame size R5 15cm 6 in frame size R6 Materials Materials Specifications PC ABS 2 5 mm color NCS 1502 Y RAL 90021 PMS 420 C and 425 C e Hot dip zinc coated steel sheet 1 5 2 mm thickness of coating 100 Drive enclosure micrometers Cast aluminium AISi Extruded aluminium AISi Corrugated board drives and option modules expanded polystyrene Plastic Package covering of the package PE LD bands PP or steel The drive contains raw materials that should be recycled to preserve energy and natural resources The package materials are environmentally compatible and recyclable All metal parts can be recycled The plastic parts can either be recycled or burned under controlled circumstances according to local regulations Most recyclable parts are marked with recycling marks If recycling is not feasible all parts excluding electrolytic capacitors and printed circuit boa
105. 00 sec 0 1 0 33 LDI Ree AUTO E 1 0 HAND AUTO Serial Communication EFB ACH550 UH User s Manual 185 FLN Point Database kp Subpoint Name Defauit Units a AERUS On Text Off Text Type SI Units 34 LDI ENA DIS ACT DISABL 1 0 ENABLE DISABL 35 LDO ENA DIS CMD DISABL 1 0 ENABLE DISABL 36 LDI FLN LOC ACT AUTO 1 0 FLN AUTO 37 LDI CTL SRC NO 1 0 YES NO 38 LDI FLN REF1 SRC NO 1 0 YES NO 39 LDI FLN REF2 SRC NO 1 0 YES NO 40 LDO RO1 OFF 1 0 ON OFF COMMAND 41 LDO RO2 OFF z 1 0 ON OFF COMMAND 42 LDO RO3 OFF 1 0 ON OFF COMMAND 43 LDO RO4 OFF d 1 0 ON OFF COMMAND 44 LDO RO5 OFF si 1 0 ON OFF COMMAND 45 LDO RO6 OFF 1 0 ON OFF COMMAND 46 LAO AO1 PCT PCT 0 1 0 z COMMAND 47 LAO AO1 PCT PCT 0 1 0 z COMMAND 48 LDO RST RUNTIME NO 1 0 RESET NO 49 LDO RESET KWH NO 1 0 RESET NO 50 LAO PRC PID GAIN 10 PCT 0 1 0 51 LAO PRC PID ITIM 600 SEC 0 1 0 5 3 52 LAO PRC PID DTIM 0 SEC 0 1 0 5 53 LAO PRC PID DFIL 10 SEC 0 1 0 54 LDO PRC PID SEL SET1 1 0 SET2 SET1 55 LAO EXT PID GAIN 10 PCT 0 1 0 56 LAO EXT PID ITIM 600 SEC 0 1 0 z 57 LAO EXT PID DTIM 0 SEC 0 1 0 gt 58 LAO EXT PID DFIL 10 SEC 0 1 0 59 LDO LOCK PANEL UNLOCK 1 0 LOCK UNLOCK 60
106. 032 IP 21 UL type 1 and IP 54 UL type 12 Dimensions for each Frame Size aah R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in wi 98 0 39 980 13 9 160 63 160 63 238 9 4 263 104 W2 98 0 3 9 98 0 3 9 gt H1 318 12 5 418 16 4 473 18 6 578 22 8 588 23 2 675 26 6 b 10 0 0 4 10 0 0 4 13 0 0 5 13 0 0 5 14 0 0 55 14 0 0 55 c 5 5 0 2 5 5 0 2 8 0 0 3 8 0 0 3 8 5 0 3 8 5 0 3 lda 55 o2 5 5 lo2 65 025 6 5 o25 65 0 25 90 0 35 Mounting Hardware M5 10 M5 10 M5 10 M5 10 M6 1 4 M8 5 16 Center to center dimension Weight The following table lists typical maximum weights for each frame size Variations within each frame size due to components associated with voltage current ratings and options are minor Weight Enclosure R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 kg Ib kg Ib kg Ib kg Ib kg Ib kg Ib IP21 ULtype1 6 5 143 9 0 19 8 16 35 0 24 53 0 34 75 69 152 IP 54 UL type 12 8 4 18 6 11 5 25 4 18 1 40 0 26 6 58 7 42 93 86 190 Technical Data ACH550 UH User s Manual Outside Dimensions 243 Outside dimensions depend on frame size and enclosure type as defined below
107. 059A 4 59 30 40 R4 072A 4 72 37 50 R4 077A 4 77 Note 1 60 R5 096A 4 96 45 75 R5 124A 4 124 55 100 R6 157A 4 157 75 125 R6 180A 4 180 90 150 R6 1 ACH550 UH 077A 4 is not available in ACH550 01 series Technical Data 226 Ratings 208 240 Volt Drives Abbreviated column headers are described in Symbols on page 226 ACH550 UH User s Manual Type Code Valid up to 40 C 104 F I P P Frame Size ACH550 UH see below K w ap Three phase supply voltage 208 240 V 04A6 2 4 6 1 1 1 0 R1 06A6 2 6 6 1 5 ies R1 07A5 2 7 5 2 2 2 0 R1 012A 2 11 8 3 0 3 0 R1 017A 2 16 7 4 0 5 0 R1 024A 2 24 2 5 5 7 5 R2 031A 2 30 8 7 5 10 0 R2 046A 2 46 2 11 0 15 0 R3 059A 2 59 4 15 0 20 0 R3 075A 2 74 8 18 5 25 0 R4 088A 2 88 0 22 0 30 0 R4 114A 2 114 30 0 40 0 R4 143A 2 143 37 0 50 0 R6 178A 2 178 45 0 60 0 R6 221A 2 221 55 0 75 0 R6 248A 2 248 75 0 100 R6 Symbols Typical ratings Normal use 10 overload capability lon continuous rms current 10 overload is allowed for one minute in ten minutes 11x N a Ny 1 min 9 min 1 pa PN typical motor power in normal use The kilowatt power ratings apply to most IEC 4 pole motors The Horsepower ratings apply to most 4 pole NEMA motors Sizing The current ratings are the same regardless of the supply voltage within one voltage range To achieve the rated motor power given in
108. 1 2 for code Start Up 68 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 12 Constant Speeds Code Description Range Resolution Default S 12 DI1 2 3 Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI1 DI2 and DI3 e Uses three digital inputs as defined below 0 DI de activated 1 DI activated DIT DI2 DIS Function 0 0 0 No constant speed 1 0 0 Constant speed 1 1202 0 1 0 Constant speed 2 1203 1 1 0 Constant speed 3 1204 0 0 1 Constant speed 4 1205 1 0 1 Constant speed 5 1206 0 1 1 Constant speed 6 1207 1 1 1 Constant speed 7 1208 13 D13 4 5 Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI3 D14 and DI5 e See above D11 2 3 for code 14 D14 5 6 Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI5 DI6 and DI7 e See above D11 2 3 for code 15 18 TIMER 1 4 Specifies the timer used to select a Constant Speed as the reference The reference selection depends on the state of the selected timer and the value of 1209 TIMED MODE SEL See table To enable and set timers see Group 36 Timer Functions Reference 1209 1 1209 2 External reference Constant Speed 1 State 1 Constant Speed 1 Constant Speed 2 19 TIMER 1 amp 2 Specifies that Timers 1 and 2 are used together to select a Constant Speed as the reference The reference selection depends on the states of these timers and the value of 1209
109. 1h 24 OVERSPEED 7310h Serial Communication FBA 202 ACH550 UH User s Manual Drive Fault Code Fieldbus Fault Code DRIVECOM specification 25 DC HIGH RUSH FF80h 26 DRIVE ID 5400h 27 CONFIG FILE 630Fh 28 SERIAL 1 ERR 7510h 29 EFB CON FILE 6306h 30 FORCE TRIP FF90h 31 EFB 1 FF92h 32 EFB 2 FF93h 33 EFB 3 FF94h 34 MOTOR PHASE FF56h 35 OUTPUT WIRING FF95h 36 INCOMP SWTYPE 630Fh 101 SERF CORRUPT FF55h 102 SERF IITFILE FF55h 103 SERF MACRO FF55h 104 SERF EFBPROT FF55h 105 SERF BPFILE FF55h 201 DSP T1 OVERLOAD 6100h 202 DSP T2 OVERLOAD 6100h 203 DSP T3 OVERLOAD 6100h 204 DSP STACK ERROR 6100h 205 DSP REV ERROR 5000h 206 OMIO ID ERROR 5000h 207 EFB LOAD ERR 6100h 1000 PAR HZRPM LIMITS 6320h 1001 PAR PFAREFNG 6320h 1002 PAR PFAIOCNF 6320h 1003 PAR Al SCALE 6320h 1004 PAR AO SCALE 6320h 1005 PARPCU 2 6320h 1006 PAR EXT RO 6320h 1007 PAR FBUS 6320h 1008 PAR PFA MODE 6320h 1009 PAR PCU 1 6320h 1010 PAR PFA OVERRIDE 6320h 1011 PAR OVERRIDE PARS 6320h Serial Communication Diagnostics Besides the drive fault codes the FBA module has diagnostic tools Refer to the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Serial Communication FBA ACH550 UH User s Manual 203 ABB Drives Profile Technical Data Overview The ABB Drives profile provides a standard profile that
110. 2 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 10 0 s 1609 START ENABLE 2 5 DI5 4101 GAIN 1 0 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 15 0 s 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 60 0 s 2203 DECELER TIME 1 15 0 s Start Up ACH550 User s Manua l Return Fan 39 This macro configures for return fan applications where the return fan removes air according to signals received from a transducer When using direct speed reference in AUTO mode or process PID see General Considerations on page 35 X1 7 TSCR Signal cable shield screen O W2 All External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 JAGND Analog input circuit common 4 110V Reference voltage 10 VDC 415 JAl2 PID feedback 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common J1 Jumper Settings 7 AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA o gt TAM 0 2 10 V lt n 8 AO2 Output current 0 4 20 mA pa Al2 0 4 20 mA 719 AGND Analog output circuit common L Ha 4 40124v Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC l11 GND Common for DI return signals L 12 DCOM1 Digital input common for all __ 13 Dl1 Start Stop Activate to start drive L_ __ 14 Dl2 Run permissive Deactivate to stop drive P 1601 _ __115 DI3 Constant Preset speed 1 P 1202 16 DI4 Safety interlock 1 Deactivate to stop drive P 1608 L_ __ 17 DI5 Safety interlock
111. 2 Deactivate to stop drive P 1609 18 DI6 Not configured 19 RO1C Relay output 1 P 1401 20 RO1A FH Default operation Ready gt 19 connected to 21 21 RO1B 22 RO2C Relay output 2 P 1402 23 RO2A fx Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 24 RO2B f 25 RO3C Relay output 3 P 1403 26 RO3A n Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 27 RO3B Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 APPLIC MACRO 3 RETURNFAN 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 STARTED 4001 GAIN 0 7 1601 RUN ENABLE 2 DI2 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 10 0s 1609 START ENABLE 2 5 DI5 4101 GAIN 1 0 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 15 0s 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 60 0 s 2203 DECELER TIME 1 15 0s Start Up 40 Cooling Tower Fan ACH550 User s Manual This macro configures for cooling tower fan applications where the fan speed is controlled according to the signals received from a transducer When using direct speed reference in AUTO mode or process PID see General Considerations on page 35 X1 17 SCR Signal cable shield screen O mo FE Alt External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC O 5 Al2 PID feedback 0 2
112. 2 PARAM 101 199 1 104 Selects the second supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 102 Group 32 Supervision Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3205 SUPERV 2 LIM LO Depends on selection 4 6A Sets the low limit for the second supervised parameter See 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM above 3206 SUPERV 2 LIM HI Depends on selection 4 6A Sets the high limit for the second supervised parameter See 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM above 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 101 199 1 105 Selects the third supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above 3208 SUPERV 3 LIM LO Depends on selection 100 096 Sets the low limit for the third supervised parameter See 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM above 3209 SUPERV 3 LIM HI Depends on selection 100 096 Sets the high limit for the third supervised parameter See 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM above Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 103 Group 33 Information This group provides access to information about the drive s current programs versions and test date Group 33 Information Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3301 FW VERSION 0000 FFFF hex 1 Firmware ver Contains the version of the drive s firmware 3302 LP VERSION 0000 FFFF hex 1 0 Contains the version of the loading package 3303 TEST DATE yy ww 1 0 Contains the test date yy ww 3304 DRIVE RATING Indicates the drive s current
113. 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ e 2001 MINIMUM SPEED or 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED is outside of the range 128 128 e 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED or 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED is outside of the range 128 128 e 2007 MINIMUM FREQ or 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside of the range 128 128 e 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ or 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside of the range 128 128 1001 PAR PFAREFNG Parameter values are inconsistent Check for the following e 2007 MINIMUM FREQ is negative when 8123 PFA ENABLE is active 1002 PARPFAIOCNF Parameter values are inconsistent The number of programmed PFA relays does not match with Interlock configuration when 8123 PFA ENABLE is active Check consistency of e RELAY OUTPUT parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 e 8117 NR OF AUX MOTORS 8118 AUTOCHANGE INTERV and 8120 INTERLOCKS 1003 PAR Al SCALE Parameter values are inconsistent Check for any of the following e 1301 Al 1 MIN gt 1302 Al 1 MAX e 1304 Al 2 MIN gt 1305 Al 2 MAX 1004 PARAOSCALE Parameter values are inconsistent Check for any of the following e 1504 AO 1 MIN gt 1505 AO 1 MAX e 1510 AO 2 MIN gt 1511 AO 2 MAX 1005 PAR PCU 2 Parameter values for power control are inconsistent Improper motor nominal kVA or motor nominal power Check for the following e 1 1 lt 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 1 73 Py lt 2 6 e Where Py 1000 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER if units are kW or Py 746 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER if units are H
114. 206 See Group 32 Supervision starting on page 101 11 suprv2 under Energize relay when second supervised parameter 3204 drops below the limit 3205 See Group 32 Supervision starting on page 101 12 suprv3 over Energize relay when third supervised parameter 3207 exceeds the limit 3209 See Group 32 Supervision starting on page 101 13 suprv3 under Energize relay when third supervised parameter 3207 drops below the limit 3208 See Group 32 Supervision starting on page 101 14 AT SET POINT Energize relay when the output frequency is equal to the reference frequency 15 FAULT RST Energize relay when the drive is in a fault condition and will reset after the programmed auto reset delay e See parameter 3103 delay time 16 FLT ALARM Energize relay when fault or alarm occurs 17 EXT CTRL Energize relay when external control is selected 18 REF 2 SEL Energize relay when EXT2 is selected 19 CONST FREQ Energize relay when a constant speed is selected 20 REF LOSS Energize relay when reference or active control place is lost 21 OVERCURRENT Energize relay when an overcurrent alarm or fault occurs 22 OVERVOLTAGE Energize relay when an overvoltage alarm or fault occurs 23 DRIVE TEMP Energize relay when a drive overtemperature alarm or fault occurs 24 UNDERVOLTAGE Energize relay when an undervoltage alarm or fault occurs 25 Al1 LOSS
115. 404 3412 OUTPUT 2 DSP UNIT 128 127 1 1 Selects the units used with the second display parameter See parameter 3405 3413 OUTPUT 2 MIN Depends on selection 0 0 A Sets the minimum value displayed for the second display parameter See parameter 3406 3414 OUTPUT 2 MAX Depends on selection 9 2A Sets the maximum value displayed for the second display parameter See parameter 3407 3415 SIGNAL 3 PARAM 100 199 1 120 Selects the third parameter by number displayed on the control panel See parameter 3401 3416 SIGNAL 3 MIN Depends on selection 0 0 Defines the minimum expected value for the third display parameter See parameter 3402 3417 SIGNAL 3 MAX Depends on selection 100 0 Defines the maximum expected value for the third display parameter See parameter 3403 3418 OUTPUT 3 DSP FORM 0 8 1 5 Defines the decimal point location for the third display parameter See parameter 3404 3419 OUTPUT 3 DSP UNIT 128 127 1 11 Selects the units used with the third display parameter See parameter 3405 3420 OUTPUT 3 MIN Depends on selection 0 0 mA Sets the minimum value displayed for the third display parameter See parameter 3406 Start Up 106 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 34 Panel Display Process Variables Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3421 OUTPUT 3 MAX Depends on selection Sets the maximum value displayed for the third display parameter See parameter 3407 20 0 mA
116. 50 UH User s Manual Main Fan Replacement The drive s main cooling fan has a life span of about 60 000 operating hours at maximum rated operating temperature and drive load The expected life span doubles for each 10 C 18 F drop in the fan temperature fan temperature is a function of ambient temperatures and drive loads Fan failure can be predicted by the increasing noise from fan bearings and the gradual rise in the heatsink temperature in spite of heatsink cleaning If the drive is operated in a critical part of a process fan replacement is recommended once these symptoms start appearing Replacement fans are available from ABB Do not use other than ABB specified spare parts Frame Sizes R1 R4 To replace the fan 1 Remove power from drive 2 Remove drive cover 3 For Frame Size e R1 R2 Press together the retaining clips on the fan cover sides and lift R3 R4 Press in on the lever located on the left side of the fan mount and rotate the fan up and out 4 Disconnect the fan cable 5 Install the fan in reverse order 6 Restore power Frame Sizes R5 and R6 To replace the fan Bottom View R5 _h Remove power from drive Remove the screws attaching the fan Disconnect the fan cable Install the fan in reverse order ar wo N Restore power Bottom View R6 3 X0022 Maintenance ACH550 UH User s Manual 223 Internal Enclosure Fan Replacement IP 54 UL
117. 9 Technical Data 232 ACH550 UH User s Manual Motor Connections A A A Warning Never connect line power to the drive output terminals U2 V2 or W2 Line voltage applied to the output can result in permanent damage to the unit If frequent bypassing is required use mechanically interlocked switches or contactors Warning Do not connect any motor with a nominal voltage less than one half of the drive s nominal input voltage Warning Disconnect the drive before conducting any voltage tolerance Hi Pot test or insulation resistance Megger test on the motor or motor cables Do not conduct these tests on the drive Motor Connection Specifications Motor Connection Specifications Voltage U2 0 U 3 phase symmetrical Umax at the field weakening point Frequency 0 500 Hz Frequency Resolution 0 01 Hz Current See Ratings on page 225 Field Weakening Point 10 500 Hz Switching Frequency Selectable 1 4 or 8 kHz Cable Temperature Rating 90 C 194 F rating minimum Max Motor Cable Length Frame Size fsw 1 or 4 kHz fay 8 kHz Maximum Motor Cable Length R1 100 m 50 m R2 R4 200 m 100 m R5 R6 300 m 150 m Warning Using a motor cable longer than specified in the chart above may cause permanent damage to the drive Ground Fault Protection ACH550 internal fault logic detects ground faults in the d
118. 9 fos After the first auxiliary motor stops k e Output frequency increases by the value P 8112 A i 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 JA t t In effect the output of the speed regulated motor increases to P PNG 4 NS MIN 4 7 B compensate for the loss of the auxiliary motor See figure where e A 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 P 8116 B Output frequency decrease during the stop delay C Diagram showing auxiliary motor s run status as C frequency decreases 1 On e Grey path Shows hysteresis if time is reversed the path 1 t backwards is not the same For details on the path for 0 starting see the diagram at 8109 START FREQ 1 Note Low Frequency 1 value must be between e 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 1 e 8109 START FREQ 1 8113 LOW FREQ 2 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 30 0 Hz US Sets the frequency limit used to stop the second auxiliary motor e See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The second auxiliary motor stops if e Two auxiliary motors are running e ACH550 output frequency drops below the limit 8113 1 e Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8113 1 Hz for at least the time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 8114 LOW FREQ 3 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 30 0 Hz US Sets the frequency limit used to stop the third auxiliary motor e See 8112 Low FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The third auxiliary mot
119. AIN 1 0 1504 MINIMUM A01 0 0mA 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 60 0 s 1510 MINIMUM A02 0 0mA 4010 SETPOINT SEL 1 Al1 1601 RUN ENABLE 2 D12 4101 GAIN 1 0 1608 START ENABLE 1 O NOT SEL 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 60 0 s 2108 START INHIBIT 1 ON 4110 SETPOINT SEL 1 A11 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 4210 SETPOINT SEL 1 Alt Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 51 Parameter Descriptions Parameter data is specific to ACH550 firmware version 1 51 Group 99 Start up Data This group defines special Start up data required to e Set up the drive e Enter motor information Note Parameters checked under the heading S can be modified only when the drive is stopped Group 99 Start up Data Code Description Range Resolution Default S 9901 LANGUAGE 0 10 1 0 Selects the display language 0 ENGLISH 1 ENGLISH AM 2 DEUTSCH 3 ITALIANO 4 ESPANOL 5 PORTUGUES 6 NEDERLANDS 7 FRANCAIS 8 DANSK 9 SUOMI 10 SVENSKA 9902 APPLIC MACRO 1 14 1 1 v Selects an application macro Application macros automatically edit parameters to configure the ACH550 for a particular application See Application Macros for application macro descriptions 1 HVAC DEFAULT 2 SUPPLY FAN 3 RETURN FAN 4 COOLING TOWER FAN 5 CONDENSER 6 BOOSTER PUMP 7 PUMP ALTERNATION 8 INTERNAL TIMER 9 INTERNAL TIMER WITH CONSTANT SPEEDS 10 FLOATING POINT 11 DUAL SETPOINT PID
120. ALARM WORD 2 1 0 90 LAI LAST FAULT 1 0 a 5 91 LAI PREV FAULT 1 1 0 92 LAI PREV FAULT 2 S 1 0 7 93 LDI OK FAULT OK 1 0 FAULT OK 94 LDO RESET FAULT NO 1 0 RESET NO 95 LAO MBOX PARAM 1 0 96 LAO MBOX DATA 1 0 5 z 97 LDO MBOX READ DONE 1 0 READ DONE 98 LDO MBOX WRITE DONE 1 0 WRITE DONE 99 LAO ERROR STATUS s 1 0 z 5 a Points not listed are not used in this application b A single value in a column means that the value is the same in English units and in SI units c Point numbers that appear in brackets may be unbundled at the field panel Serial Communication EFB ACH550 UH User s Manual 187 Detailed Point Descriptions FLN Detailed Point Descriptions A ae Drive Point Description Parameter 1 CTRL ADDRESS The FLN address of the drive It can be set by FLN and by 5302 the panel 2 APPLICATION The Application ID for FLN on the ACH550 This ID is assigned by Siemens for each unique application It correlates directly to a particular point list approved at the time of release Therefore this point list shall remain fixed once approval is granted Any changes to the point list shall require a new Application ID and re approval by Siemens The Application ID assigned to ACH550 is 2934 FREQ OUTPUT The output frequency applied to the motor in Hertz 0103 PC
121. AO CONTENT P 1503 1509 P 1902 1908 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN Depends on selection 0 0 Hz Sets the minimum content value e Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501 e Minimum value refers to the minimum content value that will be converted to an analog output e These parameters content and current min and max settings provide scale and offset adjustment for the output See figure 1503 AO1 CONTENT MAX Depends on selection 60 0 Hz Sets the maximum content value e Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501 e Maximum value refers to the maximum content value that will be converted to an analog output 1504 MINIMUM A01 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 4 0mA Sets the minimum output current 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 20 0 mA Sets the maximum output current Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 75 Group 15 Analog Outputs Defines the filter time constant for AO2 See FILTER AO1 above Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1506 FILTER AO1 0 10s 0 1s 0 1s Defines the filter time constant for A01 The filtered signal reaches 63 of a step change within the time specified See figure in parameter 1303 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 99 199 1 104 Defines the content for analog output A02 See AO1 CONTENT above 1508 AO2 CONTENT MIN Depends on selection 0 0 A Sets the minimum content value See AO1CONTENT MIN above 1509 AO2 CONTENT MAX Dep
122. ARAMETERS 1607 indirectly 0 N A 1 On Save Parameters B019 READ MAILBOX 0 No 1 Yes B020 WRITE MAILBOX 0 No 1 Yes 1 N2 LOCAL CTL and N2 LOCAL REF have priority over drive input terminals Use these binary outputs for temporary N2 control of the drive when comm is not the selected control source DDL File for NCU The listing below is the Data Definition Language DDL file for ACH550 drives used with the Network Control Units This listing is useful when defining drive I O objects to the Network Controller Units Below is the ACH550 DDL file listing kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk ABB Drives ACH 550 Variable Frequency Drive kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk Serial Communication EFB ACH550 UH User s Manual CSMODEL ACH 550 VND AITITLE Analog Inputs BITITLE Binary Inputs AOTITLE Analog Outputs BOTITLE Binary Outputs CSAI AT1i N N FREQ ACT Hz CSAI AI2 N N PCT ACT N3 CSAI AI3 M N N SPEED RPM CSAI AT4 N N CURRENT A CSAI AT5 N N TORQUE CSAI AT6 N N POWER kW CSAT AT7 N N DRV_TEMP C CSAI AI8 N N ENERGY k kWh CSAI AI9 N N ENERGY M MWh CSAT AT10 N N RUN_ TIME H CSAI AT11 N N DC_VOLT v CSAI AT12 N N VOLT ACT Vv CSAI AI13 N N PID1 ACT CSAI AI14 N N PID2_ D
123. AVE 1607 Groups 50 52 serial communication parameters Group 29 Maintenance triggers After selecting a macro additional parameter changes can be made manually using the control panel Application macros are enabled by setting the value for parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO By default HVAC default value 1 is the enabled macro General Considerations The following considerations apply for all macros When using a direct speed reference in AUTO mode connect the speed reference to analog input 1 Al1 and provide the START command using digital input 1 DI1 In HAND OFF mode the control panel provides the speed reference and START command When using process PID connect the feedback signal to analog input 2 Al2 As a default the control panel sets the Setpoint but analog input 1 can be used as an alternate source You can set up process PID using parameters Group 40 or using the PID control assistant recommended Application Macro Listing This section describes the following macros alae Macro Ate Macro 1 HVAC default 8 Internal timer 2 Supply fan 9 Internal timer with constant speeds 3 Return fan 10 Floating point 4 Cooling tower fan 11 Dual setpoint PID 5 Condenser 12 Dual setpoint PID with constant speeds 6 Booster pump 13 E bypass 7 Pump alternation 14 Hand Control Start Up 36 ACH550 User s Manual Selecting an Application Macro To select a macro follow th
124. COMM this bit also actives the Run Enable signal 0 OPERATION Inhibit operation Enter OPERATION INHIBITED INHIBITED 4 RAMP_OUT_ 1 NORMAL OPERATION Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ZERO ACCELERATION ENABLED 0 RFG OUT ZERO Force ramp function generator output to Zero Drive ramps to stop current and DC voltage limits in force Serial Communication FBA 204 ACH550 UH User s Manual ABB Drives Profile FBA CONTROL WORD Commanded Bit Name Value State Comments 5 RAMP_HOLD 1 RFG OUT ENABLED Enable ramp function Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ACCELERATOR ENABLED 0 RFG OUT HOLD Halt ramping Ramp Function Generator output held 6 RAMP IN 1 RFG INPUT ENABLED Normal operation Enter OPERATING ZERO 0 RFG INPUT ZERO Force Ramp Function Generator input to Zero 7 RESET 0 51 RESET Fault reset if an active fault exists Enter SWITCH ON INHIBITED Effective if 1604 COMM 0 OPERATING Continue normal operation 8 9 Unused 10 REMOTE CMD 1 Fieldbus control enabled 0 CW 0or Ref 20 Retain last CW and Ref CW 0 and Ref 0 Fieldbus control enabled Refand deceleration acceleration ramp are locked 11 EXT CTRLLOC 1 EXT2 SELECT Select external control location 2 EXT2 Effective if 1102 COMM 0 EXT1 SELECT Select external control location 1 EXT1 Effective if 1102 COMM 12 15 Unused Status Word As described earlier in Control Interface the cont
125. DI5 Fourth PFA Relay DI5 Fifth PFA Relay D16 Fifth PFA Relay DI6 Free 6 Not allowed DI1 First PFA Relay DI2 Second PFA Relay DI3 Third PFA Relay DI4 Fourth PFA Relay DI5 Fifth PFA Relay DI6 Sixth PFA Relay Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 137 Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution 2 DI2 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with DI2 to the interlock signal for each PFA relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on The number of PFA relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFA e The Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No PFA Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled Relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 Free Not allowed DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI3 DI6 Free 1 DI1 Free DI1 Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor pi2 First PFA Relay DI3 First PFA Relay DI3 DI6 Free DI4 DI6 Free 2 DI1 Free DI1 Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor pi2 First PFA Relay DI3 First PFA Relay DI3 Second PFA Relay DI4 Second PFA Relay DI4 DI6 Free DI5 DI6 Free 3 DI1 Free DI1 Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor pi2 First PFA Relay DI3 First PFA Relay DI3 Second PFA Relay DI4 Second PFA Relay D14 Third PFA Relay DI5 Third PFA Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI6 Free 4 DI1 Free DI1 Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor pi2 First PFA Re
126. DO CMD STP STRT 25 LDI EXT1 2 ACT 26 LDO EXT1 2 CMD 34 LDI ENA DIS ACT 35 LDO ENA DIS CMD 36 LDI FLN LOC ACT 60 LAO INPUT REF1 61 LAO INPUT REF2 68 LDO FLN LOC CTL 69 LDO FLN LOC REF Each host FLN application e g CIS or Insight controls both the particular data reported for each point and the Serial Communication EFB 180 ACH550 UH User s Manual FLN Startup Report Point Type Subpoint Name Data 94 LDO RESET FAULT Overview FLN Overview Report Point i E y Subpoint Name Data 03 LAI FREQ OUTPUT Each host FLN application e g CIS or Insight controls 04 LAI PGT OUTPUT oc data reported for each point and the 05 LAI SPEED 06 LAI CURRENT 07 LAI TORQUE 08 LAI POWER 09 LAI DRIVE TEMP 10 LAI DRIVE KWH 11 LAI DRIVE MWH 12 LAI RUN TIME 13 LAI DC BUS VOLT 14 LAI OUTPUT VOLT 17 LAI MOTOR TEMP 18 LAI MREV COUNTER 21 LDI FWD REV 23 LDI STOP RUN 25 LDI EXT1 2 ACT 27 LDI DRIVE READY 28 LDI AT SETPOINT 33 LDI HANDAUTO ACT 34 LDI ENA DIS ACT 36 LDI FLN LOC ACT Drive I O FLN Drive I O Report Point A E Subpoint Name Data 40 LDO RO 1 COMMAND Each host FLN application e g CIS or Insight controls re LDO RO 2 COMMAND alab baal data reported for each point and the 42 LDO RO 3 COMMAND 43 LDO RO 4 COMMAND 44 LDO RO 5 COMMAND
127. Drive Low Voltage AC Drives User s Manual ACH550 UH HVAC Drives 1 150 Hp Ak ED ED FADED ACH550 Drive Manuals GENERAL MANUALS ACH550 UH HVAC User s Manual 1 150 HP Safety Installation Start Up e Diagnostics e Maintenance e Technical Data ACH550 UH Installation Supplement 200 550 HP Safety Installation e Maintenance e Technical Data ACH550 Input Disconnect and Bypass Supplement 1 550 HP Safety Installation Start Up e Maintenance e Technical Data OPTION MANUALS Fieldbus Adapters I O Extension Modules etc manuals delivered with optional equipment Relay Output Extension Module typical title Installation e Programming Fault tracing e Technical data ACH550 UH User s Manual BACnet is a registered trademark of ASHRAE CANopen is a registered trademark of CAN in Automation e V ControlNet is a registered trademark of ControlNet International DeviceNet is a registered trademark of Open DeviceNet Vendor Association DRIVECOM is a registered trademark of DRIVECOM User Organization Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corp Interbus is a registered trademark of Interbus Club LonWorks is a registered trademark of Echelon Corp Metasys is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls Inc Modbus and Modbus Plus are registered trademarks of Schneider Automation Inc Profibus is a registered trademark of Profibus Trade Org
128. ECTOR SPEED or 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ and 2101 3 SCALAR FLYSTART or 5 FLYSTART TORQ BOOST Note Motor models work with internal parameters and user defined motor parameters In creating a model the drive does not change any user defined parameters 0 OFF Disables the Motor Id Run creation process Does not disable the operation of a motor model 1 ON Enables a Motor Id Run at the next start command After run completion this value automatically changes to 0 To perform a Motor Id Run 1 De couple load from motor or otherwise reduce load to near zero 2 Verify that motor operation is safe e The run automatically operates the motor in the forward direction confirm that forward rotation is safe e The run automatically operates the motor at 50 80 of nominal speed confirm that operation at these speeds is safe 3 Check following parameters if changed from factory settings e 2001 MINIMUM SPEED lt O e 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED gt 80 of motor rated speed e 2003 MAX CURRENT gt 130 of lon value e The maximum torque parameters 2014 2017 and or 2018 gt 50 4 At the Control Panel select e Select Parameters e Select Group 99 Select Parameter 9910 Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 53 Group 01 Operating Data This group contains drive operating data including actual signals The drive sets the values for actual signals based on measurements or calculation
129. ED 3626 TIMER 1 SRC 23 B P3 P2 P1 1601 RUN ENABLE 2 DI2 Start Up ACH550 User s Manual 45 Internal Timer with Constant Speeds PRV This macro configures for applications such as a timed powered roof ventilator PRV which alternates between two constant speeds constant speed 1 and 2 based on a built in timer Momentarily activating digital input 3 DI3 provides a boost function which operates the motor See group 36 Timer Functions for more information on setting up timers Ata SCR Signal cable shield screen O 2 Ali External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 110V Reference voltage 10 VDC 5 Al2 Not configured 6 AGND Analog input circuit common J1 Jumper Settings 7 AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA o gt Alt 0 2 10 V j9 AGND Analog output circuit common 2 Par 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 111 GND Common for DI return signals 112 DCOM171 Digital input common for all LU 43 DI1 Timer enable Activate to start stop drive from timer bl M4 DI2 Run permissive Deactivate to stop drive P 1601 LU 115 DI3 Timer override Activate to start drive _ __l16 DI4 Safety interlock 1 Deactivate to stop drive P 1608 L _l17 DI5 Safety interlock 2 Deactivate to stop drive P 1609 18 DI6 Not con
130. ERATOR mm CW CONTROL WORD ENABLED SW STATUS WORD RFG Ramp Function Generator CW xxxx x1xx x111 1111 Param 0104 CURRENT SW Bit8 1 f Param 0103 OUTPUT FREQ Se l n Speed Serial Communication FBA ACH550 UH User s Manual 207 Reference As described earlier in Control Interface the REFERENCE Word is a speed or frequency reference Reference Scaling The following table describes REFERENCE scaling for the ABB Drives profile ABB Drives Profile FBA Reference Range asthe is Scaling Remarks REF 1 32767 Speed or 20000 par 1105 Final reference limited by 32767 frequency 0 0 1104 1105 Actual motor 20000 par 1105 speed limited by 2001 2002 20000 corresponds to 100 speed or 2007 2008 frequency REF2 32767 Speed or 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by 32767 frequency 0 0 1107 1108 Actual motor 10000 par 1108 speed limited by 2001 2002 10000 corresponds to 100 speed or 2007 2008 frequency Torque 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by 0 0 2015 2017 torque1 or 10000 par 1108 2016 2018 torque2 10000 corresponds to 100 PID 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by Reference 0 0 4012 4013 PID set1 or 10000 par 1108 4112 4113 PID set2 10000 corresponds to 100 Note The setting of parameter 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN has no effect on the sca
131. EV CSAI AII5 N N PID2 ACT CSAI AI16 N N PID2 DEV CSAI AI17 N N LAST FLT Code CSAI AI18 N N PREV_FLT Code CSAI AI19 N N 1ST_FLT Code CSAI AI20 N N AI_1 ACT CSAI AI21 N N AI_2 ACT CSAI AT22 N N AO_ 1 ACT mA CSAI AT23 N N AO_ 2 ACT mA CSAI AT24 N N MTR_TEMP C CSAI AT25 N N REVL CNT CSBI BI1 N N STOP RUN STOP RUN CSBI BI2 N N FWD REV FWD REV CSBI BI3 N N FAULT OK FLT CSBI BI4 N N RELAY 1 OFF ON CSBI BI5 N N RELAY 2 OFF ON CSBI BI6 N N RELAY 3 OFF ON CSBI BI7 N N RELAY 4 OFF ON CSBI BI8 N N RELAY 5 OFF ON CSBI BI9 N N RELAY 6 OFF ON CSBI BI10 N N INPUT 1 OFF ON CSBI BI11 N N INPUT 2 OFF ON CSBI BI12 N N INPUT 3 OFF ON CSBI BI13 N N INPUT 4 OFF ON CSBI BI14 N N INPUT 5 TOFF ON CSBI BI15 N N INPUT 6 OFF ON CSBI BI16 N N EXT1 2 EXT1 EXT2 CSBI BI17 N N HND AUTO HAND AUTO 177 Serial Communication EFB 178 CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSBO CSBO CSBO CSBO CSBO CSBO CSBO CSBO CSBO CSBO CSBO CSBO CSBO CSBO CSBO CSBO CSBO CSBO CSBO CSBO BI18 N N BI19 N N BI20 N N BI21 N N BI22 N N BI23 N N B
132. Functions Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3609 STOP DAY 2 1 7 1 1 Defines timer 2 weekly stop day See parameter 3605 3610 START TIME 3 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 12 00 00 Defines timer 3 daily start time See parameter 3602 3611 STOP TIME 3 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 12 00 00 Defines timer 3 daily stop time See parameter 3603 3612 START DAY 3 1 7 1 1 Defines timer 3 weekly start day See parameter 3604 3613 STOP DAY 3 1 7 1 1 Defines timer 3 weekly stop day See parameter 3605 3614 START TIME 4 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 12 00 00 Defines timer 4 daily start time See parameter 3602 3615 STOP TIME 4 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 12 00 00 Defines timer 4 daily start time See parameter 3603 3616 START DAY 4 1 7 1 1 Defines timer 4 weekly start day See parameter 3604 3617 STOP DAY 4 1 7 1 1 Defines timer 4 weekly stop day See parameter 3605 3622 BOOST SEL 6 6 1 0 Selects the source for the boost signal 0 NOT SEL Boost signal is disabled 1 Dl1 Defines DI1 as the boost signal 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines DI2 DI6 as the boost signal 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the boost signal 2 6 Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the boost signal 3623 BOOST TIME 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 Defines the boost ON time Time is started when boost sel signal is released If parameter range is 01 30 00 then boost is active f
133. H User s Manual IEC ratings see ratings incomp swtype fault code 215 information parameter group 103 input power branch circuit protection 228 cable wire requirements 230 USES anen A aT IN E A EA 228 specifications aaau aaua aa 228 input power connection terminal size nnana anaana 231 TOF QUOC ih ae Bis a a E n ees aah 231 installation compatibility 0 0 00 9 environment 10 flowchart ei aata tek wd Raa eh HA MAGNDA 7 locati Ni aadi AA ab Rua eens 10 preparation 0 2 eee eee 8 procedures eee 7 LOOMIS AA AA AE tees 9 WINN aie A bat lend a kage Ma Hg te UG 12 integration time PID parameter 116 integration time parameter 90 interlocks parameter aaa ale Wahh 135 internal setpoint PID parameter 118 IR compensation frequency parameter 93 parameters 2 70 3 paaa a paaa BG ee WG 93 voltage parameter 2 93 K keypad reference select parameter 63 kWh counter data parameter 53 L label serial number anaana 8 TYPO code o vcd ee vd due 8 language parameter 005 51 liability limits 0 2 2 ee eee 247 limits parameter group 0000 e eee 83 load package version parameter 103 local mode lock parameter anaana n annn 77 low frequency
134. H550 UH User s Manual and REF2 Note fieldbus references are bipolar that is they can be positive or negative ABB Drives Profile Parameter Value Setting Al Reference Scaling 1003 DIRECTION 1 FORWARD Max Ref l l Fieldbus Resultant Ref Reference Max Ref 163 100 100 163 1003 DIRECTION 2 REVERSE Max Ref Fieldbus Reference 163 100 Resultant Ref 100 163 Max Ref 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Resultant Ref Max Ref Ci 7 l l l a Ka Fieldbus 163 100 aR Reference i l 100 163 l LA Max Ref L N2 Protocol Technical Data Overview The N2 Fieldbus connection to the ACH550 drives is based on an industry standard RS 485 physical interface The N2 Fieldbus protocol is a master slave type serial communication protocol used by the Johnson Controls Metasys system In the Metasys architecture the N2 Fieldbus connects object interfaces and remote controllers to Network Control Units NCUs The N2 Fieldbus can also be used to connect ACH550 drives to the Metasys Companion product line This section describes the use of the N2 Fieldbus with the ACH550 drives connection and does not describe the protocol in detail Serial Communication EFB ACH550 UH User s Manual 171 Note Metasys inputs are drive outputs and drive inputs
135. I24 N N BI25 N N BI26 N N ALARM OFF ON MNTNCE R OFF ON DRV REDY NO YES AT SETPT NO YES RUN ENAB NO YES N2 LOC M AUTO N2 LL N2 CTRI NO YES N2 RISRC NO YES N2 R2SRC NO YES BOT Y Y REF te get AO2 Y Y REF 2 omn o A03 Y Y ACCEL 1 s AO4 Y Y DECEL 1 ongu AO5 Y Y CURR_LIM A A06 Y Y PID1 GN nou AO7 Y Y PIDI I Won AO8 Y Y PIDI D Won TAOS TY Y PIDIL FIT 1S A010 Y Y PID2_ GN 3 ROTI YY AO12 Y Y AO13 Y Y AO14 Y Y NAODE WAY Ny TAO1E Y Y TAO17 M Y Y TAO18 Y Y AO19 Y Y AO20 Y Y PID2_I g PID2 D g PID2 FLT s CMD AO 1m nga CMD AO 2 PI2 STPT gm MIN SPD gn MAX SPD MB PARAM nn MB DATA nn ON BO1 Y Y START STOP START BO2 Y Y REVERSE FWD REV BO3 Y Y PAN LOCK OPEN LOCKED BO4 Y Y RUN ENAB DISABLE ENABLE BO5 Y Y R1 2 SEL TEXT 1 TEXT 2 BO6 Y Y BO7 Y Y BO8 Y Y BOOM Y Ya BO10 Y Y BOTIM Yj NG BO12 Y Y 1BOL3 VG Vy BO14 Y Y BOT SY Y Yo BO16 Y Y BOLT Y My BO18 Y Y BO19 Y Y BO20 Y Y FLT RSET CMD RO 1 CMD RO 2 CMD RO 3 OFF OFF RESET ON ON OFF ON CMD_RO 4 CMD RO 5 LU 7 OFF F ON CMD RO 6 LU s OFF F TON RST RTIM OFF RESET RST KWH OFF RESET PID SE
136. L SET1 SET2 N2 LOC qu 7 AUTO Pi N2 LU N2 LOC R RUTO 7 N2 W SAV_PRMS OFF SAVE READ MB 7 NO r READ WRITE_MB NO WRITE OFF A ON ACH550 UH User s Manual Serial Communication EFB ACH550 UH User s Manual FLN Protocol Technical Data Overview 179 The FLN fieldbus connection to the ACH550 drives is based on an industry standard RS 485 physical interface The FLN Floor Level Network Fieldbus protocol is a serial communication protocol used by the Siemens APOGEE system The ACH550 interface is specified in Siemens application 2734 Supported Features The ACH550 supports all required FLN features Reports The ACH550 provides seven pre defined reports Using a report request generated from the FLN fieldbus controller select one of the following sets of points By providing views of selected points these reports are often easier to work with than views of the full point database FLN ABB ACH550 Report Data report format Each host FLN application e g CIS or Insight controls both the particular data reported for each point and the FLN Startup Report Data report format ABB ACH550 Point f ma Subpoint Name 01 LAO CTLR ADDRESS 02 LAO APPLICATION 20 LAO OVRD TIME 29 LDO DAY NIGHT Startup Point T Tys Subpoint Name 21 LDI FWD REV 22 LDO CMD FWD REV 23 LDI STOP RUN 24 L
137. MIN FUNCTION and parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERROR Group 12 Constant Speeds Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 14 19 1 3 v Defines the digital inputs used to select Constant Speeds See general comments in the introduction 0 NOT SEL Disables the constant speed function 1 DI1 Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input DI1 e Digital input activated Constant Speed 1 activated 2 6 DI2 DI6 Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input DI2 DI6 See above 7 DI1 2 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI1 and DI2 e Uses two digital inputs as defined below 0 DI de activated 1 DI activated DI1 DI2 Function 0 0 No constant speed 1 0 Constant speed 1 1202 0 1 Constant speed 2 1203 1 1 Constant speed 3 1204 e Can be set up as a so called fault speed which is activated if the control signal is lost Refer to parameter 3001 AlxMIN function and parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR 8 DI2 3 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI2 and DI3 e See above DI1 2 for code 9 DI3 4 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI3 and DI4 e See above D11 2 for code 10 D14 5 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI4 and DI5 e See above DI1 2 for code 11 DI5 6 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI5 and DI6 e See above DI
138. OCHANGE 14 PFA INTERLOCK 15 reserved BP LOSS Applies only to HVAC drives 0309 ALARM WORD 2 Read only copy of the ALARM WORD 3 e See parameter 0308 0000 hex Start Up 60 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 04 Fault History This group stores a recent history of the faults reported by the drive Group 04 Fault History Code Description Range Resolution Default S 0401 LAST FAULT Fault code text 1 0 0 Clear the fault history on panel NO RECORD n Fault code of the last recorded fault 0402 FAULT TIME 1 Date dd mm yy 1 0 power on days The day on which the last fault occurred Either as A date if real time clock is operating The number of days after power on if real time clock is not used or was not set 0403 FAULT TIME 2 Time hh mm ss 2s 0 The time at which the last fault occurred Either as Real time in format hh mm ss if real time clock is operating The time since power on less the whole days reported in 0402 in format hh mm ss if real time clock is not used or was not set 0404 SPEED AT FLT 1 rpm 0 The motor speed rpm at the time the last fault occurred 0405 FREQ AT FLT 0 1 Hz 0 0 The frequency Hz at the time the last fault occurred 0406 VOLTAGE AT FLT 0 1V 0 0 The DC bus voltage V at the time the last fault occurred 0407 CURRENT AT FLT 0 1A 0 0 The m
139. OINT boards Contact your local ABB sales representative 20 OPEX PWR Internal fault Low voltage condition detected on OINT power supply Contact your local ABB sales representative 21 CURR MEAS Internal fault Current measurement is out of range Contact your local ABB sales representative 22 SUPPLY PHASE Ripple voltage in the DC link is too high Check for and correct e Missing mains phase e Blown fuse 23 ENCODER ERR Not used Available only with encoder and parameter group 50 24 OVERSPEED Motor speed is greater than 120 of the larger in magnitude of 2001 MINIMUM SPEED or 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED Check for and correct e Parameter settings for 2001 and 2002 e Adequacy of motor braking torque e Applicability of torque control Brake chopper and resistor 25 RESERVED Not used as of the publication of this manual 26 DRIVE ID Internal fault Configuration Block Drive ID is not valid Contact your local ABB sales representative 27 CONFIG FILE Internal configuration file has an error Contact your local ABB sales representative 28 SERIAL 1 ERR Fieldbus communication has timed out Check for and correct e Fault setup 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Communication settings Group 51 or 53 as appropriate e Poor connections and or noise on line 29 EFB CONFIG Error in reading the configuration file for the fieldbus adapter FILE 30 FORCE TRIP Fault trip forced by the fieldbus See the fieldbus User s Man
140. P e g in US Diagnostics ACH550 UH User s Manual 217 palit Fault Name in Description and Recommended Corrective Action Code Panel 1006 PAR EXT RO Parameter values are inconsistent Check for the following e Extension relay module not connected and e 1410 1412 RELAY OUTPUTS 4 6 have non zero values 1007 PAR FBUS Parameter values are inconsistent Check for and correct A parameter is set for fieldbus control e g 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 10 COMM but 9802 COMM PROT SEL 0 1008 PAR PFAMODE Parameter values are inconsistent 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE must be 3 SCALAR SPEED when 8123 PFA ENABLE is activated 1009 PAR PCU 1 Parameter values for power control are inconsistent Improper motor nominal frequency or speed Check for both of the following e 1x 60 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED lt 16 0 8 lt 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 120 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ Motor Poles lt 0 992 1010 PAR PFA Both the override mode and PFA are activated at the same time These OVERRIDE modes are mutually incompatible because PFA interlocks cannot be observed in the override mode 1011 PAR OVERRIDE Overeride is enabled but parameters are incompatible Verify that1701 is PARS not zero and depending on 9904 value 1702 or 1703 is not zero Fault Resetting The ACH550 can be configured to automatically reset certain faults Refer to parameter Group 31 Autom
141. PAR 12 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40007 5313 EFB PAR 13 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40008 5314 EFB PAR 14 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40009 5315 EFB PAR 15 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40010 5316 EFB PAR 16 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40011 5317 EFB PAR 17 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40012 5318 EFB PAR 18 20 Reserved 5320 Except where restricted by the drive all parameters are available for both reading and writing The parameter writes are verified for the correct value and for a valid register addresses Note Parameter writes through standard Modbus are always volatile i e modified values are not automatically stored to permanent memory Use parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE to save all altered values Serial Communication EFB 162 ACH550 UH User s Manual The ACH550 supports the following Modbus function codes for 4xxxx registers Function Code Description 03 Read holding 4xxxx registers 06 Preset single 4xxxx register 16 0x10 Hex Preset multiple 4xxxx registers 23 0x17 Hex Read write 4xxxx registers Actual Values The contents of the register addresses 40005 40012 are ACTUAL VALUES and are e Specified using parameters 5310 5317 e Read only values containing information on the operation of the drive
142. PID Set 1 Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4008 0 Yo VALUE 1000 0 1000 0 0 1 0 0 Defines together with the next parameter the scaling applied to the Units P4006 PID controller s actual values PID1 parameters 0128 0130 and Scale P4007 1000 0132 Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 P 4009 P 4008 l wk 0 100 1000 Internal scale 4009 100 VALUE 1000 0 1000 0 0 1 100 0 Defines together with the previous parameter the scaling applied to the PID controller s actual values e Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 4010 SET POINT SEL 0 19 1 1 v Defines the reference signal source for the PID controller e Parameter has no significance when the PID regulator is by passed see 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL O KEYPAD Control panel provides reference 1 Al1 Analog input 1 provides reference 2 Al2 Analog input 2 provides reference 8 COMM Fieldbus provides reference 9 COMM All Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 10 COMM Al1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 11 DI3U 4D RNC Digital inputs acting as a motor potentiometer control provide reference DI3 increases the speed the U stands for up DI4 de
143. PID sleep function stopping the drive e Requires 4022 7 INTERNAL See figure A PID output level B PID process feedback A i lt P 4024 A gt kat t gt P 4024 E P 4023 a 4 n c lt P 4026 Setpoint P 4025 4005 1 P 4025 Setpoint SS t P 4025 4005 0 D t Stop Start 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 60 0 s Sets the time delay for the PID sleep function a motor speed frequency below 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL for at least this time period enables the PID sleep function stopping the drive See 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL above Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 121 Group 40 Process PID Set 1 Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4025 WAKE UP DEVIATION 0 0 1000 0 1 0 0 Defines the wake up deviation a deviation from the setpoint greater than this value for at least the time period 4026 WAKE UP DELAY re starts the PID controller e Parameters 4006 and 4007 define the units and scale e Parameter 4005 0 A Wake up level Setpoint Wake up deviation e Parameter 4005 1 c Wake up level Setpoint Wake up deviation tp 4025 e Wake up level can be above or below setpoint Y setpoint See figures e C Wake up level when parameter 4005 1 bp 4025 D e D Wake up level when parameter 4005 0 t e E Feedback is above wake up level and lasts longer than 4026 gt WAKE UP DELAY PID function wakes up 26 e F Feedback is below w
144. R 5 FLYSTART TORQ BOOST Selects both the flying start and the torque boost mode SCALAR SPEED mode only e Flying start routine is performed first and the motor is magnetized If the speed is found to be zero the torque boost is done 2102 STOP FUNCTION 1 2 1 1 Selects the motor stop method 1 COAST Selects cutting off the motor power as the stop method The motor coasts to stop 2 RAMP Selects using a deceleration ramp e Deceleration ramp is defined by 2203 DECELER TIME 1 or 2206 DECELER TIME 2 whichever is active 2103 DC MAGN TIME 0 00 10 00 s 0 01 s 0 30 s Defines the pre magnetizing time for the DC Magnetizing start mode Use parameter 2101 to select the start mode After the start command the drive pre magnetizes the motor for the time defined here and then starts the motor Set the pre magnetizing time just long enough to allow full motor magnetization Too long a time heats the motor excessively 2104 DC CURR CTL 0 2 0 v Selects whether DC current is used for braking 0 NOT SEL Disables the DC current operation 1 DC BRAKING Enables the DC Injection Braking e Enables DC Injection braking after modulation has stopped If parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is 1 COAST braking is applied after start is removed f parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION IS 2 RAMP braking is applied after ramp 2106 DC CURR REF 0 100 1 30 Defines the DC current control reference as a pe
145. RIAL 1 ERR and the drive coasts to stop 2 CONST SP7 Displays a warning 2005 IO COMM and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 This alarm speed remains active until the fieldbus writes a new reference value 3 LAST SPEED Displays a warning 2005 lo COMM and sets speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds This alarm speed remains active until the fieldbus writes a new reference value Caution If you select const speed 7 or last speed make sure that continued operation is safe when fieldbus communication is lost COMM FAULT TIME 0 0 60 0 s 0 1s 10 0s Sets the communication fault time used with 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC e Brief interruptions in the fieldbus communication are not treated as faults if they are less than the COMM FAULT TIME value 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 Sets a fault level for analog input 1 See 3001 AIxMIN FUNCTION 3022 Al2 FAULT LIMIT 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 Sets a fault level for analog input 2 See 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION Start Up 100 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 31 Automatic Reset This group defines conditions for automatic resets An automatic reset occurs after a particular fault is detected The drive holds for a set delay time then automatically restarts You can limit the number of resets in a specified time period and you can set up automatic resets for a variety of faults Group 31
146. RO6 COMMAND Controls the output state of Relay 6 Access to relay 6 require ACH550 option OREL Parameter 1412 must be set to COMM for FLN to have this control 1 ON 0 OFF 0134 bit 5 46 AO1 COMMAND Controls Analog Output 1 Parameter 1501 must be set to this value for FLN to have this control 0135 COMM VALUE 1 47 AO2 COMMAND Controls Analog Output 2 Parameter 1507 must be set to this value for FLN to have this control 0136 COMM VALUE 2 48 RESET RUN TIME Commanded by FLN to reset the cumulative run timer 1 RESET 0 NO The control input is rising edge sensitive so once the command is issued this point automatically returns to its inactive state This momentary operation avoids any need for an explicit command to clear the point before a subsequent reset can be issued 49 RESET KWH Commanded by FLN to reset the cumulative kilowatt hour counter 1 RESET 0 NO The control input is rising edge sensitive so once the command is issued this point automatically returns to its inactive state This momentary operation avoids any need for an explicit command to clear the point before a subsequent reset can be issued Serial Communication EFB 190 ACH550 UH User s Manual FLN Detailed Point Descriptions F ay Drive Point Description Parameter 50 PRC PID GAIN Sets
147. T RO2 RO3 RO4 ROS ROG 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 0 1 2 7 3T1 X X X X X 1 JAux X X X X X 31 31 X X X X 2 Aux Aux X X X X 31 31 31 X X X 3 Aux Aux JAux X X X X 1311311 X XIXI 2 X Aux Aux X X X X X X31 X 31 2 X X X Aux X Aux 31131 X XIX TX 1 Aux Aux X X X X One additional relay output for the PFA that is in use One motor is in sleep when the other is rotating Start Up 134 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S The table below shows the ACH550 PFA motor assignments for some typical settings in the Relay Output parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 where the settings are either 31 PFA or X anything but 31 and where the Autochange function is enabled 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV value gt 0 v Parameter Setting ACH550 Relay Assignment 1 Autochange Enabled a RO1 RO2 RO3 RO4 RO5 RO6 2 31 31 31 31 31 XIX 31 X XOAOBL PFA IPFA X PFA IPFA PFA X PFA IPFA XxX X X PFA IPFA X FA FA A x x 2 2 op x x x x o a x x x x x P x 2 x x xN ae GI Ng N x al x gt lt xX gt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt Ol gt lt gt lt XX No auxiliary motors but the autochange function is in use Working as standard PID co
148. T OUTPUT The ratio of output frequency or speed to the corresponding None This maximum rating depending on control mode ratio is e For scalar mode it is the ratio of Output Frequency calculated parameter 0103 to Maximum Frequency parameter by the FLN 2008 application For speed mode it is the ratio Speed parameter 0102 to Maximum Speed 2002 5 SPEED The calculated speed of the motor in RPM 0102 CURRENT The measured output current 0104 7 TORQUE The calculated output torque of the motor as a percentage of 0105 nominal torque 8 POWER The measured output power in KW The FLN point definition 0106 also supports horsepower by selecting English units DRIVE TEMP The measured heatsink temperature in C The FLN point 0110 definition also supports F by selecting English units 10 DRIVE KWH The drive s cumulative power consumption in kilowatt hours 0115 This value may be reset by commanding FLN point 49 RESET KWH 11 DRIVE MWH The drive s cumulative power consumption in megawatt 0141 hours This value cannot be reset 12 RUN TIME The drive s cumulative run time in hours This value maybe 0114 reset by commanding FLN point 48 RESET RUN TIME 13 DC BUS VOLT The DC bus voltage level of the drive 0107 14 OUTPUT VOLT The AC output voltage applied to the motor 0109 15 PRC PID FBCK The Process PID feedback signal 0130 16 PRC PID DEV The deviation of the Process PID output signal from its 0132 setpoint
149. T2 0 EXT1 Parameter 1102 must be set to COMM for FLN to have this control 27 DRIVE READY Indicates the drive is ready to accept a run command 1 READY 0 NOTRDY 28 AT SETPOINT Indicates the drive has reached its commanded setpoint 1 YES 0 NO 29 DAY NIGHT 1 of the 5 mandatory FLN points required for compatibility with Siemens control systems It has no functionality in the drive application None 30 CURRENT LIM Sets the output current limit of the drive 2003 31 ACCEL TIME 1 Sets the acceleration time for Ramp 1 2202 32 DECEL TIME 1 Sets the deceleration time for Ramp 1 2203 33 34 HANDAUTO ACT ENA DIS ACT Indicates whether the drive is in Hand or Auto control 1 HAND 0 AUTO Indicates the status of the Run Enable command regardless of its source 1 ENABLE 0 DISABL 35 ENA DIS CMD Commanded by FLN to assert the Run Enable command 1 ENABLE 0 DISABL Parameter 1601 must be set to COMM for FLN to have this control 36 FLN LOC ACT Indicates if the drive has been placed in FLN LOCAL mode by commanding either point 68 FLN LOC CTL or point 69 FLN LOC REF Commanding either of these points to FLN 1 steals control from its normal source and places in under FLN control Note that the HAND mode of the panel has priority over FLN local control Serial Communica
150. T2 COMMANDS for EXT2 s Start Stop Dir definitions e See parameter 1106 REF2 SELECT for EXT2 s reference definitions 8 COMM Assigns control of the drive via external control location EXT1 or EXT2 based on the fieldbus control word Bit 5 of the Command Word 1 parameter 0301 defines the active external control location EXT1 or EXT2 e See Fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 9 TIMER 1 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the Timer Timer activated ExT2 Timer de activated EXT1 See Group 36 Timer Functions 10 12 TIMER 2 4 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the Timer See Timer 1 above 1 DI1 INV Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of DI1 DI1 activated EXT1 DI1 de activated EXT2 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the selected digital input See DI1 INV above Start Up 64 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 11 Reference Select Code Description Range Resolution Default 1103 REF1 SELECT 0 17 1 1 v Selects the signal source for external reference REF1 0 KEYPAD Defines the control panel as the reference source 1 Al1 Defines analog input 1 Al1 as the reference source 2 Al2 Defines analog input 2 A12 as the reference source 3 Al1 JOYST Defines analog input 1 A11 configured for joystick operation as the reference source e The minimum inp
151. TIMED MODE SEL See table To enable and set timers see Group 36 Timer Functions 1201 19 Reference Timer 1 Timer 2 used together 1209 1 1209 2 0 0 External reference Constant Speed 1 Constant Speed 1 Constant Speed 2 Constant Speed 2 Constant Speed 3 1 0 0 1 1 1 Constant Speed 3 Constant Speed 4 1 DI1 INV Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input DI1 e Inverse operation Digital input de activated Constant Speed 1 activated 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input See above 7 DI1 2 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI1 and DI2 e Inverse operation uses two digital inputs as defined below 0 DI de activated 1 DI activated DI1 DI2 Function 1 1 No constant speed 0 1 Constant speed 1 1202 1 0 Constant speed 2 1203 0 0 Constant speed 3 1204 8 DI2 3 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using Di2 and DI3 e See above DI1 2 INV for code 9 DI3 4 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI3 and D14 See above DI1 2 INV for code 10 DI4 5 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using D14 and DI5 e See above DI1 2 INV for code 11 DI5 6 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI5 and DI6 e See above DI1 2 INV for code Start Up
152. Type 12 enclosures have an additional internal fan to circulate air inside the enclosure Frame Sizes R1 to R4 2 Remove the front cover 5 Disconnect the fan cable 6 Install the fan in reverse order noting that Remove power from drive To replace the internal enclosure fan in frame sizes R1 to R4 The housing that holds the fan in place has barbed retaining clips at each corner Press all four clips toward the center to release the barbs When the clips barbs are free pull the housing up to remove from the drive The fan air flow is up refer to arrow on fan The fan wire harness is toward the front The notched housing barb is located in the right rear corner The fan cable connects just forward of the fan at the top of the drive Frame Sizes R5 and R6 Capacitors To replace the internal enclosure fan in frame sizes R5 or R6 Remove power from drive Remove the front cover Lift the fan out and disconnect the cable Install the fan in reverse order e Restore power The drive intermediate circuit employs several electrolytic capacitors Their life span is from 35 000 90 000 hours depending on drive loading and ambient temperature Capacitor life can be prolonged by lowering the ambient temperature It is not possible to predict a capacitor failure Capacitor failure is usually followed by a input power fuse failure or a fault trip Co
153. UTION CNT 0142 1 MREV 0 32767 1 RATED SPEED is a percent of maximum frequency parameter 2008 if the drive is in scalar mode and is a percent of maximum speed parameter 2002 in speed mode N2 Binary Input Objects The following table lists all of the N2 Binary Input objects defined for the ACH550 drive N2 Binary Inputs Number Object Drive Parameter Range BI1 STOP RUN Status Word 0 Stop 1 Drive Running Bl2 FORWARD REVERSE Status Word 0 Forward 1 Reverse BI3 FAULT STATUS Status Word 0 OK 1 Drive Fault BI4 RELAY 1 STATUS 0122 bit mask 04 0 Off 1 On BI5 RELAY 2 STATUS 0122 bit mask 02 0 Off 1 On BI6 RELAY 3 STATUS 0122 bit mask 01 0 Off 1 On BI7 RELAY 4 STATUS 0123 bit mask 04 0 Off 1 On BI8 RELAY 5 STATUS 0123 bit mask 02 0 Off 1 On BI9 RELAY 6 STATUS 0123 bit mask 01 0 Off 1 On BI10 INPUT 1 STATUS 0118 bit mask 04 0 Off 1 On B111 INPUT 2 STATUS 0118 bit mask 02 0 Off 1 On BI12 INPUT 3 STATUS 0118 bit mask 01 0 Off 1 On B113 INPUT 4 STATUS 0119 bit mask 04 0 Off 1 On Serial Communication EFB ACH550 UH User s Manual 175 N2 Binary Inputs Number Object Drive Parameter Range B114 INPUT 5 STATUS 0119 bit mask 02 0 Off 1 On B115 INPUT 6 STATUS 0119 bit mask 01 0 Off 1 On BI16 EXTERNAL 2 SELECT Stat
154. V Reference voltage 10 VDC Q 5 JAl2 PID feedback 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common J1 Jumper Settings D 7 AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA Sp Al1 0 2 10v MA 8 AO2 Output current 0 4 20 mA Sp Al2 0 4 20 mA 9 AGND Analog output circuit common 10 124V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC l11 GND Common for DI return signals L 12 DCOM171 Digital input common for all LU 243 011 Timer enable Activate to start stop drive from timer bl Ma4 DI2 Run permissive Deactivate to stop drive P 1601 LU 5 D13 Timer override Activate to start drive T16 Di4 Safety interlock 1 Deactivate to stop drive P 1608 Lo 471 DI5 Safety interlock 2 Deactivate to stop drive P 1609 18 DI6 Not configured 19 RO1C Relay output 1 P 1401 20 RO1A fi Default operation Started gt 19 connected to 21 21 RO1B f 22 RO2C Relay output 2 P 1402 23 RO2A fx Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 24 RO2B f 25 RO3C f Relay output 3 P 1403 26 RO3A Mx Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 27 RO3B Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 APPLIC MACRO 8 INT TIMER 1609 START ENABLE 2 5 DI5 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 11 TIMER1 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 11 TIMER1 3601 TIMERS ENABLE 1 D11 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 0 NOT SEL 3622 BOOST SEL 3 DI3 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 START
155. _110 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 141 GND Common for DI return signals L 12 DCOM1 Digital input common for all LU 43 D1 Start Stop Activate to start drive LU M41DI2 Run permissive Deactivate to stop drive P 1601 LU 115 DI3 Constant Preset speed 1 P 1202 __146 DI4 Safety interlock 1 Deactivate to stop drive P 1608 Lo 47 DI5 Safety interlock 2 Deactivate to stop drive P 1609 18 DI6 Not configured 19 RO1C f Relay output 1 P 1401 20 RO1A _ Default operation Ready gt 19 connected to 21 21 RO1B 22 RO02C Relay output 2 P 1402 23 RO2A a Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 24 RO2B f 25 RO3C Relay output 3 P 1403 26 RO3A fr Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 57 RO3B Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 APPLIC MACRO 6 BOOSTERPUMP 2203 DECELER TIME 1 5 0s 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 STARTED 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 1601 RUN ENABLE 2 DI2 4001 GAIN 1 0 1609 START ENABLE 2 5 DI5 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 60 0 s 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 5 0s Start Up ACH550 User s Manual Pump Alternation 43 This macro configures for pump alternation applications usually used in booster stations To adjust maintain pressure in the network the speed of the one pump changes according to a signal received from a pressure transducer When the variable speed pump re
156. a protocol is configured for the ABB Drives profile Reference scaling is fieldbus type specific See the user s manual provided with the FBA module and or the following sections as appropriate e ABB Drives Profile Technical Data Generic Profile Technical Data Actual Values Planning Actual Values are 16 bit words containing information on selected operations of the drive Drive Actual Values for example group 01 parameters can be mapped to Input Words using group 51 parameters protocol dependent but typically parameters 5104 5126 Network planning should address the following questions e What types and quantities of devices must be connected to the network e What control information must be sent down to the drives e What feedback information must be sent from the drives to the controlling system Serial Communication FBA 196 ACH550 UH User s Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation FBA A Warning Connections should be made only while the drive is disconnected from the power source Overview The FBA fieldbus adaptor is a plug in module that fits in the drive s expansion slot 2 The module is held in place with plastic retaining clips and two screws The screws also ground the shield for the module cable and connect the module GND signals to the drive control board On installation of the module electrical connection to the drive is automatically established through the 34 pin c
157. aaan 244 shipping limit a 244 relay output activation condition parameters 71 off delay parameters 72 on delay parameters 72 parameter group aa 71 status data parameter 54 relays specifications 237 remove COVE asaca ee 11 reports FLN fieldbus 179 reset automatic analog input less than min parameter 100 delay time parameter 100 external fault parameter 100 number of trials parameter 100 overcurrent parameter 100 parameter group trial time parameter 100 undervoltage parameter 100 resonance avoiding select parameter 4 92 revolution counter data parameter 55 REV TING ca sy cient aga aed LA Wa a Re deed EN 236 RS232 baud rate parameter 127 panel parameter group 127 parity parameter 127 station id parameter 127 RS232 counts buffer overruns parameter 127 CRC errors parameter 127 frame errors parameter 127 ok messages parameter 127 parity errors parameter 127 RS4BB a a EE AN NAN dae inked aed 240 RS485 comm 145 run enable source select parameter 76 run time data parameter 53
158. aches a maximum speed limit auxiliary pumps start as needed When using process PID see General Considerations on page 35 To use more than one the default Auxiliary pump see parameter group 81 x1 fI SCR Signal cable shield screen G 2 JAH External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 110V Reference voltage 10 VDC Q 5 JAl2 PID feedback 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common J1 Jumper Settings D 7 AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA Sp Al1 0 2 10 V MA 8 AO2 Output current 0 4 20 mA Sp Al2 0 4 20 mA 9 AGND Analog output circuit common 4 Q DAV Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC l11 GND Common for DI return signals L 12 DCOM171 Digital input common for all LU 143 D1 Start Stop Activate to start drive bl Ma4 DI2 Run permissive Deactivate to stop drive P 1601 15 DI3 Not configured T16 Di4 PFA interlock 1 Deactivate to stop drive P 1608 Lo 471 DI5 PFA interlock 2 Deactivate to stop drive P 1609 18 DI6 Not configured 19 RO1C Relay output 1 P 1401 20 RO1A x Default operation PFA starts lag pump 21 RO1B 22 RO2C Relay output 2 P 1402 23 RO2A fx Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 24 RO2B 25 RO3C Relay output 3 P 1403 26 RO3A _ Default opera
159. age 26 for parameter editing instructions Tuning Parameters The system can benefit from one or more of the ACH550 special features and or fine tuning 1 Review the parameter descriptions in Parameter Descriptions starting on page 51 Enable options and fine tune parameter values as appropriate for the system 2 Edit parameters as appropriate Fault and Alarm Adjustments The ACH550 can detect a wide variety of potential system problems For example initial system operation may generate faults or alarms that indicate set up problems 1 Faults and alarms are reported on the control panel with a number Note the number reported 2 Review the description provided for the reported fault alarm Use the fault and alarm listings on pages 213 and 218 respectively or e Press the help key Assistant Control Panel only while fault or alarm is displayed 3 Adjust the system or parameters as appropriate Installation 22 ACH550 UH User s Manual Start Up HVAC Control Panel Features The ACH550 HVAC control panel ACS CP B features crag Status LED Green when normal if flashing or red see Diagnostics UP SOFT KEY 1 DOWN as a e wo N OFF HAND SOFT KEY 2 HELP always available x0201 e Language selection for the display e Drive connection that can be made or detached at any time e Start up assistant to facilitate drive commissioning e Copy function for moving parameter
160. ake up level and lasts longer than 4026 F WAKE UP DELAY PID function wakes up 4026 WAKE UP DELAY 0 00 60 00 s 0 01 s 0 50 s Defines the wake up delay a deviation from the setpoint greater than 4025 WAKE UP DEVIATION for at least this time period re starts the PID controller e See 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL above 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET 6 11 1 0 Defines how selections are made between PID Set 1 and PID Set 2 PID parameter set selection When set 1 is selected parameters 4001 4026 are used When set 2 is selected parameters 4101 4126 are used 0 SET 1 PID Set 1 parameters 4001 4026 is active 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for PID Set selection e Activating the digital input selects PID Set 2 e De activating the digital input selects PID Set 1 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for PID Set selection e See DI1 above 7 SET 2 PID Set 2 parameters 4101 4126 is active 8 11 TIMER 1 4 Defines the Timer as the control for the PID Set selection Timer de activated PID Set 1 Timer activated PID Set 2 See parameter Group 36 Timer Functions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for PID Set selection e Activating the digital input selects PID Set 1 e De activating the digital input selects PID Set 2 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for PID Set selection
161. alue of Parameter 1303 FILTER Al1 or 1306 FILTER Al2 until the noise is filtered from the signal o o o Start Up 116 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 40 Process PID Set 1 0 1 600 0 Integration time seconds See 4001 for adjustment procedure A Error B Error value step C Controller output with Gain 1 D Controller output with Gain 10 Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 0 0 600 0 s 0 1s 3 0s Defines the PID Controller s integration time A A Integration time is by definition is the time required to increase the output by the error value Bas e Error value is constant and 100 D P 4001 10 e Gain 1 e Integration time of 1 second denotes that a 100 change is C P 4001 1 _ achieved in 1 second 0 0 NOT SEL Disables integration I part of controller t 4003 DERIVATION TIME 0 0 10 0 s 0 1s 0 0s Defines the PID Controller s derivation time Error Process Error Value e You can add the derivative of the error to the PID controller output The derivative is the error value s rate of change For example if the 100 7 N 79 process error value changes linearly the derivative is a constant added to the PID controller output The error derivative is filtered with a 1 pole filter The time constant of the filter is defined by parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER 0 0 NOT SEL Disables the error derivative part of th
162. ameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 A Voltage SCALAR SPEED Keep IR compensation as low as possible to prevent A overheating e Typical IR compensation values are A IR Compensated B No compensation 380 480 V Units P 2603 Pry kW 3 75 15 37 132 Rcomp V 21 18 15110 4 f Hz gt B IR Compensation P 2604 e When enabled IR Compensation provides an extra voltage boost to the motor at low speeds Use IR Compensation for example in applications that require a high breakaway torque 2604 R COMP FREQ 0 100 1 80 Sets the frequency at which IR compensation is 0 V in of motor frequency 2605 U f RATIO 1 2 1 2 Selects the form for the U f voltage to frequency ratio below field weakening point 1 LINEAR Preferred for constant torque applications 2 SQUARED Preferred for centrifugal pump and fan applications Square is more silent for most operating frequencies Start Up 94 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 26 Motor Control Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2606 SWITCHING FREQ 1 4 8 kHz 4 kHz Sets the switching frequency for the drive e Higher switching frequencies mean less noise 2607 SW FREQ CTRL 0 1 1 The switching frequency may be reduced if the ACH550 Switching frequency limit internal temperature rises above 90 C See Figure This A oa X function allows the highes
163. ameterized to accept start stop direction or reference from the control panel To correct check Communication lines and connections e Parameter 3002 PANEL LOSS e Parameters in groups 10 COMMAND INPUTS and 11 REFERENCE SELECT if drive operation is REM 2009 Reserved 2010 MOT OVERTEMP Motor is hot based on either the drive s estimate or on temperature feedback This alarm warns that a Motor Underload fault trip may be near Check e Check for overloaded motor Adjust the parameters used for the estimate 3005 3009 Check the temperature sensors and Group 35 parameters 2011 UNDERLOAD Motor load is lower than expected This alarm warns that a Motor Underload fault trip may be near Check Motor and drive ratings match motor is NOT undersized for the drive Settings on parameters 3013 to 3015 2012 MOTOR STALL Motor is operating in the stall region This alarm warns that a Motor Stall fault trip may be near 2013 AUTORESET This alarm warns that the drive is about to perform an automatic fault note 1 reset which may start the motor To control automatic reset use parameter group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET 2014 AUTOCHANGE This alarm warns that the PFA autochange function is active note 1 To control PFA use parameter group 81 PFA CONTROL 2015 PFA INTERLOCK This alarm warns that the PFA interlocks are active which means that the drive cannot start the following Any motor when Autochange is used The speed regulated
164. and voltage rating The format is XXXY where e XXX The nominal current rating of the drive in amps If present an A indicates a decimal point in the rating for the current For example XXX 8A8 indicates a nominal current rating of 8 8 Amps e Y The voltage rating of the drive where Y 2 indicates a 208 240 Volt rating and Y 4 indicates a 380 480 Volt rating Start Up 104 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 34 Panel Display Process Variables This group defines the content for control panel display middle area when the control panel is in the control mode Group 34 Panel Display Process Variables Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 100 199 1 103 Selects the first parameter by number displayed on the control panel e Definitions in this group define display content when the control panel is in the control mode e Any Group 01 parameter number can be selected Using the following parameters the display value can be scaled converted to convenient units and or displayed as a bar graph The figure identifies selections made by parameters in this group 100 not selected First parameter not displayed 101 199 Displays parameter 0101 0199 If parameter does not D00001 exist the display shows n a 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Depends on selection 0 0 Hz Defines the minimum expected value for the first display parameter Display Use parameters 3402 3403
165. and year with the UP DOWN buttons and select OK to save the values The active value is displayed in inverted color 11 Scroll to Date Format with the UP DOWN buttons and select SEL 12 The Date formats are displayed Select a date format with the UP DOWN buttons and select OK to confirm the selection 13 Select EXIT twice to return to the main menu Start Up 34 O Settings Mode To view and edit the I O settings follow these steps ACH550 UH User s Manual Select MENU to enter the main menu u Scroll to I O Settings with the UP DOWN buttons and select ENTER kah N wT Scroll to the I O setting you want to view with the UP DOWN buttons and select SEL CI u Select the setting you want to view with the UP DOWN buttons and select OK EA Sy wT You can change the value with the UP DOWN buttons and save it by selecting SAVE Gy If you do not want to change the setting select CANCEL T7 tc Select EXIT to return to the main menu A Start Up ACH550 User s Manual 35 Application Macros Overview Macros change a group of parameters to new predefined values designed for specific applications Use macros to minimize the need for manual editing of parameters Selecting a macro sets all other parameters to their default values except Group 99 Start up Data parameters The PARAMETER LOCK 1602 The PARAM S
166. anel and select SEL CA 3 ww u The text Copying parameters and a progress diagram is displayed CV 4 Select ABORT if you want to stop the process The text Parameter upload successful is displayed and the 4 control panel returns to the PAR BACKUP menu Select EXIT to return to the main menu Now you 5 can disconnect the panel To download all parameters to drive follow these steps Select MENU to enter the menu Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 31 Select PAR BACKUP with the UP DOWN buttons AN 2 NT Scroll to Download to drive all and select SEL Ah 3 N 4 GS The text restoring parameters is displayed Select ABORT if you want A 4 to stop the process After the download stops the message Parameter download CV successful is displayed and the control panel goes back to PAR BACKUP menu Select EXIT to return 5 to the main menu To download application to drive follow these steps Select MENU to enter the menu GF 1 Select PAR BACKUP with the UP DOWN buttons CA gt a Y Scroll to DOWNLOAD APPLICATION and select SEL T 3 The text Downloading parameters partial is displayed Select ABORT mA 4 if you want to stop the process Start Up 32 ACH550 UH User s Manual The text Parameter download successful is displayed and the control panel returns to PAR BACKUP
167. ange and scaling of the REFERENCE see the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Generic Profile Reference Reference Range Type Scaling Remarks REF Fieldbus Speed 100 par 9908 Final reference limited by specific 0 1104 1105 0 100 par 9908 Actual motor speed limited by 2001 2002 speed Frequency 100 par 9907 Final reference limited by 0 0 1104 1105 100 par 9907 Actual motor speed limited by 2007 2008 frequency Actual Values As described earlier in Control Interface Actual Values are words containing drive values Actual Value Scaling For Actual Values scale the feedback integer using the parameter s resolution See Parameter Descriptions section for parameter resolutions For example Feedback Parameter Feedback Integer Parameter Resolution Integer Resolution Scaled Value 1 0 1 mA 1 0 1 mA 0 1 mA 10 0 1 10 0 1 1 Where parameters are in percent the Parameter Descriptions section specifies what parameter corresponds to 100 In such cases to convert from percent to engineering units multiply by the value of the parameter that defines 100 and divide by 100 For example Value of the Feedback Integer Parameter Resolution Paang alate el Parameter that Value of 100 Ref 100 9 defines 100 Scaled Value 10 0 1 1500 rpm 10 0 1 1500 RPM 100 15 rpm 100 0 1
168. arameter value is 07 00 00 then the period will peas be activated at 7 a m es e The figure shows multiple periods on different 17 00 00 weekdays HC When editing parameters to set times 19 00 09 e Use arrow keys to select desired hour setting 13 00 00 i e Press NEXT to advance to minutes e Use arrow keys to select desired minutes setting 12 00 00 L e Press NEXT to advance to minutes e Use arrow keys to select desired seconds setting 10 30 00 e Press SAVE 09 00 00 00 00 00 Ss eS ee Se a a Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun 3603 STOP TIME 1 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 12 00 00 Defines the daily stop time e The time can be changed in steps of 2 seconds e If the parameter value is 09 00 00 then the period will be deactivated at 9 a m 3604 START DAY 1 1 7 1 1 Defines the weekly start day 1 Monday 7 Sunday If parameter value is 1 then period 1 weekly is active from Monday midnight 00 00 00 3605 STOP DAY 1 1 7 1 1 Defines weekly stop day 1 Monday 7 Sunday If parameter value is 5 then timer 1 weekly will be deactivated on Friday midnight 23 59 58 3606 START TIME 2 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 12 00 00 Defines timer2 daily start time e See parameter 3602 3607 STOP TIME 2 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 12 00 00 Defines timer2 daily stop time e See parameter 3603 3608 START DAY 2 1 7 1 1 Defines timer 2 weekly start day e See parameter 3604 Start Up 112 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 36 Timer
169. arning sticker in the appropriate language over the existing warning on the top of the module IP 54 UL Type 12 Peo 3 Re install the rubber plugs As required for access remove the rubber plugs For the IP54 UL Type 12 enclosures rubber plugs are required in the holes provided for access to the drive mounting slots Push plugs out from the back of the drive Position the ACH550 onto the mounting screws or bolts and securely tighten in all four corners Note Lift the ACH550 by its metal chassis Non English speaking locations Add a warning sticker in the appropriate language over the existing warning on the top of the module Install the Wiring Conduit Kit Wiring drives with the IP 21 UL type 1 Enclosure requires a conduit kit with the following items e conduit box screws e cover The kit is included with IP 21 UL type 1 Enclosures Installation ACH550 UH User s Manual 13 A Wiring Overview Warning Ensure the motor is compatible for use with the ACH550 The ACH550 must be installed by a competent person in accordance with the considerations defined in Preparing for Installation on page 8 If in doubt contact your local ABB sales or service office As you install the wiring observe the following There are two sets of wiring instructions one set for each enclosure type IP 21 UL type and IP
170. atic Reset A Warning If an external source for start command is selected and it is active the ACH550 may start immediately after fault reset Flashing Red LED To reset the drive for faults indicated by a flashing red LED Turn off the power for 5 minutes Red LED To reset the drive for faults indicated by a red LED on not flashing correct the problem and do one of the following e From the control panel press RESET Turn off the power for 5 minutes Depending on the value of 1604 FAULT RESET SELECT the following could also be used to reset the drive e Digital input e Serial communication When the fault has been corrected the motor can be started Diagnostics 218 Correcting Alarms History ACH550 UH User s Manual For reference the last three fault codes are stored into parameters 0401 0412 0413 For the most recent fault identified by parameter 0401 the drive stores additional data in parameters 0402 0411 to aid in troubleshooting a problem For example parameter 0404 stores the motor speed at the time of the fault To clear the fault history all of the Group 04 Fault History parameters 1 Using the control panel in Parameters mode select parameter 0401 2 Press EDIT 3 Press UP and Down simultaneously 4 Press SAVE The recommended corrective action for alarms is e Determine if the Alarm requires any corrective action action is not always required e Use Alar
171. b MOTOR THERM TIME equals 35 times t6 where t6 in seconds is specified by the motor manufacturer as the time that the motor can safely operate at 100 e The thermal time for a Class 10 trip curve is 350 s for a Class 20 trip curve 700 s and for a Class 30 trip curve 1050 s Temp Rise 4 Motor load 4 1050 s Vo 3007 MOT LOAD CURVE nominal 50 150 1 Sets the maximum allowable operating load of the motor e When set to 100 the maximum allowable load is equal to the value of Start up Data parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURRENT e Adjust the load curve level if the ambient temperature differs from P 3007 100 150 Output current relative 4 to 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR Frequency 7 a P 3009 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD 25 150 1 70 Sets the maximum allowable current at zero speed e Value is relative to 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ 1 250 Hz 1 35 Hz Sets the break point frequency for the motor load curve Example Thermal protection trip A loll A times when parameters 3006 3 57 ON MOT THERM TIME 3007 MOT t LOAD CURVE and 3008 ZERO 3 0 60s SPEED LOAD have default 25 values a 0 5 0 r r 0 02 04 06 0 8 1 0 1 2 H 90s 1 5 a s 600 s Co fo fBRK gt lo Output current IN Nominal motor current fo Output frequency fgrk Break point frequency A Trip time Start Up
172. bination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 16 Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 17 Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 Al1 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 65 Group 11 Reference Select Code Description Range Resolution Default S Analog Input Reference Correction Parameter values 9 10 and 14 17 use the formula in the following table Value Al reference is calculated as following Setting C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value 50 of reference value B value C B C value 50 of reference value B value Where e C Main Reference value COMM for values 9 10 and All for values 14 17 e B Correcting reference Al1 for values 9 10 and Al2 for values 14 17 Example The figure shows the reference source curves for value settings 9 10 and 14 17 where C 25 P 4012 SETPOINT MIN 0 P 4013 SETPOINT MAX O B varies along the horizontal axis eee 1104 REF1 MIN 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 0 rpm Sets the minimum for external reference 1 e The minimum analog input signal as a p
173. ce of speed references 1 and 2 e Prompts for reference limits e Prompts for frequency or speed limits Start Stop Control e Prompts for the source for start and stop commands e Prompts for start and stop mode definition e Prompts for acceleration and deceleration times Protections e Prompts for current and torque limits e Prompts for the use of Run enable and Start enable signals e Prompts for the use of emergency stop e Prompts for Fault function selection e Prompts for Auto reset functions selection Constant Speeds e Prompts for the use of constant speeds e Prompts for constant speed values PID Control e Prompts for PID settings e Prompts for the source of process reference e Prompts for reference limits e Prompts for source limits and units for the process actual value Defines the use of Sleep function Low Noise Setup e Prompts for switching frequency e Prompts for definition of Flux optimization e Prompts for the use of Critical speeds Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual Task name Description Panel Display Prompts for display variable and unit settings Timed Functions Prompts for the use of Timed functions Output Prompts for the signals indicated through the relay outputs Prompts for signals indicated through the analog outputs AO1 and AO2 Sets the minimum maximum scaling and inversion values Changed Parameters Mode To view changed param
174. ches pump no 2 and then pump no 3 etc on and off as needed These motors are auxiliary motors The ACH550 PID control uses two signals a process reference and an actual value feedback The PID controller adjusts the speed frequency of the first pump such that the actual value follows the process reference When demand defined by the process reference exceeds the first motor s capacity user defined as a frequency limit the PFA automatically starts an auxiliary pump The PFA also reduces the speed of the first pump to account for the auxiliary pump s addition to total output Then as before the PID controller adjusts the speed frequency of the first pump such that the actual value follows the process reference If demand continues to increase PFA adds additional auxiliary pumps using the same process When demand drops such that the first pump speed falls below a minimum limit user defined by a frequency limit the PFA automatically stops an auxiliary pump The PFA also increases the speed of the first pump to account for the auxiliary pump s missing output e An Interlock function when enabled identifies off line out of service motors and the PFA skips to the next available motor in the sequence An Autochange function when enabled and with the appropriate switchgear equalizes duty time between the pump motors Autochange periodically increments the position of each motor in the rotation the speed regulate
175. ck and automatically adjusts the speed of the drive to match the two signals The difference between the two signals is the error value ACH550 UH User s Manual Typically PID control mode is used when the speed of a fan or pump needs to be controlled based on pressure flow or temperature In most cases when there is only 1 transducer signal wired to the ACH550 only parameter group 40 is needed A Schematic of setpoint feedback signal flow using parameter group 40 is presented Panel REF1 P 1101 REF1 Panel REF 2 ia P1106 5 0 17 REF2 500 PID Setpoint Ni Panel REF2 5000 19 Al P4016 G40 Current PID1 Torque Power Gaga P4017 P4014 1P4015 F Torque PID Act Value Power Panel REF 1 P1103 Gis P1102 DI Const P1104 Al Speed P1105 EXT 1 Comm REF 1 EXT 2 Panel REF 2 al P1106 Gis Const Al 4 Speed Comm REF 2 P1106 PanelREF2 p4010 PID Setpoint 0 17 P1107 Ali P4012 P1108 Ala P4013 19 Comm Internal t G40 AlP4016 PID1 Current PID1 Out Torque Power P4014 74P4015 Sune PID Act Value Torque Power PANEL Hand Auto Select
176. contamination levels environment limit 244 shipping limit a 244 contrast control panel 22 control connection specifications 237 location data parameter 53 terminal descriptions 239 control cable requirements a 237 ACH550 UH User s Manual control panel backup drive parameters 29 cable requirements 238 changed parameters mode 29 ej oe AA APA 32 comm error fault parameter 96 CONT ASE saci aaria angie ee ate te arate ares Doig dae NG 22 display contrast 2 05 22 display decimal point form parameters 104 display max parameters 105 display min parameters 105 display process variables parameter group 104 display selection parameters 104 display units parameters 105 features ce eee 22 i o settings mode a 34 MOOS NA dna ya dna 25 operating the drive 26 parameter editing 23 parameter lock parameter 76 parameters mode 5 26 pass code parameter 76 reference control parameter 63 signal max parameters 104 signal min parameters 104 SOM KEY Sina ANAN NA NAAN e E RAE 22 start up assistant 2 23
177. creases the reference the D stands for down e Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal s rate of change e R Stop command resets the reference to zero e NC Reference value is not copied 12 DIJU 4D NC Same as DI3U 4D RNC above except Stop command does not reset reference to zero At restart the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored reference 13 DI5U 6D NC Same as DI3U 4D NC above except e Uses digital inputs DI5 and DI6 14 Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 15 Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 16 All Al2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 17 Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 Al1 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 19 INTERNAL A constant value set using parameter 4011 provides reference Start Up 118 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 40 Process PID Set 1 Code Description Range Resolution Default S Analog Input Reference Correction Parameter values 9 10 and 14 17 use the formula in the following table
178. d motor becomes the last auxiliary motor the first auxiliary motor becomes the speed regulated motor etc Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference e Applies only when at least one auxiliary constant speed motor is running Default value is 0 Example An ACH550 operates three parallel pumps that maintain water pressure in a pipe 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT sets a constant pressure reference that controls the pressure in the pipe The speed regulated pump operates alone at low water consumption levels As water consumption increases first one constant speed pump operates then the second As flow increases the pressure at the output end of the pipe drops relative to the pressure measured at the input end As auxiliary motors step in to increase the flow the adjustments below correct the reference to more closely match the output pressure When the first auxiliary pump operates increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 When both auxiliary pumps operate increase the reference with parameter 8103 reference step 1 parameter 8104 reference step 2 When three auxiliary pumps operate increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 parameter o 0 0 o o 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 parameter 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3 Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 131
179. d regulated 3 connected direct on line and 2 spare motors e This value includes also the speed regulated motor This value must be compatible with number of relays allocated to PFA if the autochange function is used e If Autochange function is not used the speed regulated motor does not need to have a relay output allocated to PFA but it needs to be included in this value Start Up 142 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 98 Options This group configures for options in particular enabling serial communication with the drive Group 98 Options Code Description Range Resolution Default S 9802 COMM PROT SEL 0 1 4 1 0 Selects the communication protocol 0 NOT SEL No communication protocol selected 1 STD MODBUS Enables fieldbus communication with the drive using Modbus protocol via the RS485 serial link X1 communications terminal e See also parameter Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL 2 N2 Enables fieldbus communication with the drive using Metasys N2 protocol via the RS485 serial link X1 communications terminal 3 FLN Enables fieldbus communication with the drive using FLN protocol via the RS485 serial link X1 communications terminal 4 EXT FBA The drive communicates via a fieldbus adapter module in option slot 2 of the drive e See also parameter Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE 5 BACNET Enables fieldbus communication with the drive using BACnet protocol via the RS485 serial link X1 communicatio
180. d to digital input DI1 In order to start the drive the digital input DI3 must be activated during the pulse in DI1 e Start Reverse command is through a normally open push button connected to digital input D12 In order to start the drive the digital input DI3 must be activated prior the pulse in DI2 e Connect multiple Start push buttons in parallel Stop is through a normally closed push button connected to digital input DI3 e Connect multiple Stop push buttons in series e Requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST 6 DI6 Two wire Start Stop e Start Stop is through digital input DI6 DI6 activated Start DI6 de activated Stop e Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecting 1003 3 REQUEST is the same as 1003 1 FWD 7 DI6 5 Two wire Start Stop Direction e Start Stop is through digital input DI6 DI6 activated Start DI6 de activated Stop e Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST is through digital input DI5 DI5 activated Reverse de activated Forward 8 KEYPAD Control Panel e Start Stop and Direction commands are through the control panel when EXT1 is active e Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST 9 DI1F 2R Start Stop Direction commands through DI1 and DI2 combinations e Start forward DI1 activated and DI2 de activated e Start reverse DI1 de activated and DI2 activated e Stop both DI1 and D12 activated or both de activated e Requires paramete
181. dervoltage automatic reset parameter 100 control enable parameter 83 units PID parameter 116 user parameter set change control parameter 77 U f ratio parameter 000 02005 93 V vibration environment limit 244 shipping limit 000 244 virtual object N2 171 ANA AP 173 voltage at fault history parameter 60 rating code ee 9 voltage frequency ratio parameter 93 W wake up delay PID parameter 121 wake up deviation PID parameter 121 Index ACH550 UH User s Manual warning automatic startup 3 19 dangerous voltages 3 high temperatures aa 3 ISANG a anap nna AMG map Nag 3 not field repairable 3 parallel control connections 3 qualified installer 3 WEIQME diese aa anna bA ON NG Nana Na 242 wiring installation 2 eee 12 XYZ zero speed load fault parameter 97 257 Index Ab ED ED FADED ACH550 US 04 3AUA0000004092 Rev B EN EFFECTIVE Mar 1 2004 SUPERSEDES Nov 26 2003 ABB Oy AC Drives P O Box 184 FIN 00381 HELSINKI FINLAND Telephone 358 10 22 11 Telefax 358 10 22 22681 Internet http www abb com ABB Inc Automation Technologies Drives amp Machines 16250 West Glendale
182. e the IP 54 UL type 12 enclosure has The same internal plastic shell as the IP 21 enclosure A different outer plastic cover An additional internal fan to improve cooling e Larger dimensions The same rating does not require a derating Ambient Conditions The following table lists the ACH550 environmental requirements Ambient Environment Requirements Altitude Installation Site 0 1000 m 0 3 300 ft e 1000 2000 m 3 300 6 600 ft if Pn and Ip derated 1 every 100 m above 1000 m 300 ft above 3 300 ft Storage and Transportation in the protective package Ambient temperature e 15 40 C 5 104 F e Max 50 C 122 F if P and Io derated to 90 40 70 C 40 158 F Relative humidity Contamination levels IEC 721 3 3 lt 95 non condensing No conductive dust allowed e The ACH550 should be installed in clean air according to enclosure classification e Cooling air must be clean free from corrosive materials and free from electrically conductive dust e Chemical gases Class 3C2 Solid particles Class 382 Storage No conductive dust allowed chemical gases Class 1C2 solid particles Class 152 Transportation No conductive dust allowed e Chemical gases Class 2C2 Solid particles Class 252 Sinusoidal vibration e Mechanical conditions Class 3M4 IEC60721 3 3 2 9 Hz 3 0 mm 0 12 in 9 2
183. e Iy is drive current 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 10 0 500 Hz 0 1 Hz 60 Hz US v Defines the nominal motor frequency e Range 10 500 Hz typically 50 or 60 Hz e Sets the frequency at which output voltage equals the MOTOR NOM VOLT e Field weakening point Norm freq Supply Volt Mot Nom Volt 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 50 18000 rpm 1 rpm 1580 rpm US v Defines the nominal motor speed e Must equal the value on the motor rating plate 9909 IMOTOR NOM POWER 0 15 1 5 Pn 0 1 Hp 0 2 HP US v Defines the nominal motor power e Must equal the value on the motor rating plate 9910 MOTOR ID RUN 0 1 1 0 v This parameter controls a self calibration process called the Motor Id Run During this process the drive operates the motor in order to identify it s characteristics and then optimizes control by creating a motor model This motor model is especially effective when e Operation point is near zero speed e Operation requires a torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback i e without a pulse encoder If no Motor Id Run is performed the drive uses a less detailed motor model created when the drive is first run This First Start model is updated automatically after any motor parameter is changed To update the model the drive magnetizes the motor for 10 to 15 seconds at zero speed Creating the First Start model does require that either 9904 1 V
184. e PID controller output 0 1 10 0 Derivation time seconds PID output D part of controller output Gain_ P 401 t gt H P4003 Pi 4004 PID DERIV FILTER 0 0 10 0 s 0 1s 1 0s Defines the filter time constant for the error derivative part of the PID controller output Before being added to the PID controller output the error derivative is filtered with a 1 pole filter e Increasing the filter time smooths the error derivative reducing noise 0 0 NOT SEL Disables the error derivative filter 0 1 10 0 Filter time constant seconds 4005 ERROR VALUE INV 0 1 0 Selects either a normal or inverted relationship between the feedback signal and the drive speed 0 NO Normal a decrease in feedback signal increases drive speed Error Ref Fok 1 YES Inverted a decrease in feedback signal decreases drive speed Error Fbk Ref 4006 UNIT 0 31 4 Selects the unit for the PID controller actual values PID1 parameters 0128 0130 and 0132 See parameter 3405 for list of available units 4007 DSP FORMAT 0 4 1 1 Defines the decimal point location in PID controller actual values Enter the decimal point location counting in from the right of the entry 4007 Value Entry Display e See table for example using pi 3 14159 0 0003 3 1 0031 3 1 2 0314 3 14 3 3142 3 142 Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 117 Group 40 Process
185. e integrating ACH550 drives with Johnson Controls Metasys Drive Device Type For the Metasys and Metasys Companion products the device type for the ACH550 drive is VND N2 Analog Input Objects The following table lists all of the N2 Analog Input objects defined for the ACH550 drive N2 Analog Inputs Number Object P Baa af langg b Units Range Alt OUTPUT FREQUENCY 0103 10 Hz 0 250 Al2 RATED SPEED Note 1 10 0 100 Al3 SPEED 0102 1 rom 0 9999 Al4 CURRENT 0104 10 A 0 9999 Al5 TORQUE 0105 10 200 200 Al6 POWER 0106 10 kW 0 9999 Al7 DRIVE TEMPERATURE 0110 10 C 0 125 AI8 KILOWATT HOURS 0115 1 kWh 0 9999 Serial Communication EFB 174 ACH550 UH User s Manual N2 Analog Inputs Number Object P paha kit a Units Range Al9 MEGAWATT HOURS 0141 1 MWh 0 999 Al10 RUN TIME 0114 1 H 0 9999 Al11 DC BUS VOLTAGE 0107 1 0 999 Al12 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 0109 1 V 0 999 Al13 PRC PID FEEDBACK 0130 10 Yo 0 100 Al14 PRC PID DEVIATION 0132 10 Yo 0 100 Al15 EXT PID FEEDBACK 0131 10 Yo 0 100 Al16 EXT PID DEVIATION 0133 10 Yo 0 100 Al17 LAST FAULT 0401 1 fault code Al18 PREV FAULT 0402 1 fault code Al19 OLDEST FAULT 0403 1 fault code Al20 Al 1 ACTUAL 0120 10 Yo 0 100 Al21 Al 2 ACTUAL 0121 10 0 100 Al22 AO 1 ACTUAL 0124 10 mA 0 20 Al23 AO 2 ACTUAL 0125 10 mA 0 20 Al24 MOTOR TEMP 0145 1 nG 0 200 Al25 REVOL
186. e screen as described in Effective Motor Cable Screens on page 235 e Must be earthed at the motor end with an EMC cable gland The earthing must contact the cable screen all the way around the cable Technical Data 236 ACH550 UH User s Manual Longer than 30 m 100 ft must be limited as specified in the table below Follow the instructions in the filter package for all cable screen connections Cable Requirements for CE Compliance Drive Type RFI EMC Filter Switching Frequency Parameter 2606 1 or 4 kHz 1 or 4 8 kHz 8 Maximum motor cable length ACH550 UH 059A 4 ACH550 UH 072A 4 AGH550 UH 03A3 4 ACS400 IF11 3 100m Not CE compliant for AGH550 UH 04A1 4 330 ft more than 30 m AGH550 UH 06A9 4 AGH550 UH 08A8 4 ACH550 UH 012A 4 AGH550 UH 015A 4 ACS400 IF21 3 100m 100 m ACH550 UH 023A 4 83010 330 ft ACH550 UH 031A 4 ACS400 IF31 3 100m 100 m ACH550 UH 038A 4 39010 330 ft ACH550 UH 044A 4 ACS400 IF41 3 100m 100 m 330 ft 330 ft ACH550 UH 077A 4 ACH550 UH 180A 4 Not defined at time of publication A Warning Do not use filters in a floating or high impedance earthed network Technical Data ACH550 UH User s Manual Control Connections Control Connection Specifications 237 Control Connection Specifications Analog Inputs and Outputs See table heading Drive Control Terminal Descr
187. e start up and configuration e Changed parameters mode Shows changed parameters Drive parameter backup mode Stores or uploads the parameters e Clock set mode Sets the time and date for the drive I O settings mode Checks and edits the I O settings Standard Display Mode Use the standard display mode to read information on the drive s status and to operate the drive To reach the standard display mode press EXIT until the LCD display shows status information as described below Status Information Top The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive e HAND Indicates that the drive control is local that is from the control panel e AUTO Indicates that the drive control is remote such as the basic I O X1 or fieldbus e Indicates the drive and motor rotation status as follows Control panel display Significance Rotating arrow clockwise or e Drive is running and at setpoint counterclockwise e Shaft direction is forward or reverse Rotating arrow blinking Drive is running but not at setpoint Stationary arrow Drive is stopped Upper right shows the active reference Middle Using parameter group 34 the middle of the LCD display can be configured to display e One to three parameter values The default display shows parameters 0103 OUTPUT FREQ in percentages 0104 CURRENT in amperes and 0120 Al1 in milliamperes A bar meter rath
188. e time set by parameter 3014 UNDERLOAD TIME e Output frequency is higher than 10 of the nominal frequency 0 NOT SEL Underload protection is not used 1 FAULT When the protection is activated the drive coasts to stop A fault indication is displayed 2 WARNING A warning indication is displayed 3014 UNDERLOAD TIME 10 400 s 1s 20s Time limit for underload protection 3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE 1 5 1 1 This parameter provides five selectable curves T shown in the figure 4 A Underload curve types Ifthe load drops below the set curve for longer than the time set by parameter 3014 the 80 underload protection is activated 70 e Curves 1 3 reach maximum at the motor rated frequency set by parameter 9907 MOTOR 60 NOM FREQ Tm nominal torque of the motor J 50 e fy nominal frequency of the motor 40 1 J 30 20 f 0 T T Eo fn 2 4 fy 3017 EARTH FAULT 0 1 1 1 Defines the drive response if the drive detects a ground fault in the motor or motor cables 0 DISABLE No response 1 ENABLE Displays a fault 16 EARTH FAULT and the drive coasts to stop Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 99 Group 30 Fault Functions Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3018 3019 COMM FAULT FUNC 0 3 1 0 Defines the drive response if the fieldbus communication is lost 0 NOT SEL No response 1 FAULT Displays a fault 28 SE
189. e used in a floating network remove screws at EM1 and EM3 Frame size R1 R4 or F1 and F2 Frame size R5 or R6 See diagrams on page 14 and page 15 respectively Note For more technical information contact the factory or your local ABB sales representative Safety ACH550 UH User s Manual Use of Warnings and Notes GB There are two types of safety instructions throughout this manual e Notes draw attention to a particular condition or fact or give information on a subject e Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury or death and or damage to the equipment They also tell you how to avoid the danger The warning symbols are used as follows Dangerous voltage warning warns of high voltage which can cause physical injury and or damage to the equipment General warning warns about conditions other than those caused by electricity which can result in physical injury and or damage to the equipment Safety ACH550 UH User s Manual 5 Table of Contents Safety Use of Warnings and Notes cece eee 4 Table of Contents Installation Installation Flow Ghart 2a c2e sila aa wie ewe we WD NABANG eE R 7 Preparing for Installation 2 Ae can ot Ana ara SAL cheetah At Kana kagaanan angang Uk ama st 8 Installing th Drive s 2 NG BA NABA MARYA KA nah AA yee tag tee KGG KANG 10 Start Up HVAC Control Panel Features 2 74 ng eves NA eed NG DAGA bA WA 22 Star UP cist ma etek KA dake
190. e will coast to stop and not start until the run enable signal resumes 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the run enable signal e See DI1 INV above 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 0 2 1 1 Determines if the control panel can change parameter values e This lock does not limit parameter changes made by macros e This lock does not limit parameter changes written by fieldbus inputs 0 LOCKED You cannot use the control panel to change parameter values e The lock can be opened by entering the valid pass code to parameter 1603 1 OPEN You can use the control panel to change parameter values 2 NOT SAVED You can use the control panel to change parameter values but they are not stored in permanent memory e Set parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE to 1 SAVE to store changed parameter values to memory 1603 PASS CODE 0 65535 1 0 Entering the correct pass code unlocks the parameter lock See parameter 1602 above The code 358 opens the lock e This entry reverts back to 0 automatically 1604 FAULT RESET SEL 6 8 1 0 Selects the source for the fault reset signal The signal resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists 0 KEYPAD Defines the control panel as the only fault reset source Fault reset is always possible with control panel 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as a fault reset source e Activating the digital input resets
191. ear connects this motor to the ACH550 power output A Area above 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Delays motor start for the time 8122 PFA START DELAy autochange not allowed Starts the speed regulated motor B Autochange occurs Identifies the next constant speed motor in the rotation 1PFA etc PID output associated with each motor Switches the above motor on but only if the new speed regulated motor had been running as a constant speed motor This step keeps an equal number of motors running before and after autochange e Continues with normal PFA operation Starting Order Counter 4PFA P8118 te P8118 Output The operation of the starting order counter frequency The relay output parameter definitions 1401 1403 and Aa No aux 1410 1412 establish the initial motor sequence The lowest parameter number with a value 31 PFA identifies the relay connected to 1PFA the first motor and so on e Initially 1PFA speed regulated motor 2PFA 1st auxiliary motor etc The first autochange shifts the sequence to 2PFA speed regulated motor 3PFA 1st auxiliary motor 1 PFA last auxiliary motor Area The next autochange shifts the sequence again and so on Autochange If the autochange cannot start a needed motor because all is Allowed PID output inactive motors are interlocked the drive displays an alarm gt 2051 PFA INTERLOCK P 8119 100 When ACH550 power supply is s
192. ective Action OVERLOAD Inverter overload condition The drive output current exceeds the ratings given in Ratings on page 225 DC UNDERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient Check for and correct e Missing phase in the input power supply e Blown fuse e Undervoltage on mains Al1 LOSS Al2 LOSS Analog input 1 loss Analog input value is less than AI1FLT LIMIT 3021 Check for and correct e Source and connection for analog input e Parameter settings for AI1FLT LIMIT 3021 and 3001 AIxMIN FUNCTION Analog input 2 loss Analog input value is less than AI2FLT LIMIT 3022 Check for and correct e Source and connection for analog input e Parameter settings for AI2FLT LIMIT 3022 and 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION MOT TEMP Motor is too hot based on either the drive s estimate or on temperature feedback e Check for overloaded motor e Adjust the parameters used for the estimate 3005 3009 e Check the temperature sensors and Group 35 parameters 10 PANEL LOSS Panel communication is lost and either e Drive is in local control mode the control panel displays HAND or e Drive is in remote control mode REM and is parameterized to accept start stop direction or reference from the control panel To correct check e Communication lines and connections e Parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERROR e Parameters in Group 10 Command Inputs and Group 11 Reference Select if drive op
193. ed e See DI1 above 7 COMM Defines bit 15 of the Command Word 1 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used e The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The Command Word is a parameter 0301 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used e Activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 1 value e De activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 2 value 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used e See DI1 INV above 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL 6 7 1 0 Defines control of the selection between two maximum torque limits 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 and 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 0 MAX TORQUE 1 Selects 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 as the maximum limit used 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used Activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 2 value De activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 1 value 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used e See DI1 above 7 COMM Defines bit 15 of the Command Word 1 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The Command Word is a parameter 0301 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input di1 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used e Activa
194. ediately if damaged components are found IP2040 3 Check the contents against the order and the shipping label to verify that all parts have been received Drive Identification Drive Labels To determine the type of drive you are installing refer to either Serial number label attached on upper part of the chokeplate between the mounting holes ACH550 UH 08A8 4 ae AT e Type code label attached on the heat sink on the right side of the unit cover Input U1 3 380 480 V 1N 88A f1 48 63 Hz us C Output U2 3 0 U4V LISTED WN 88A A L f2 0 500 Hz Ser no 2030700001 Motor PN 4 ACH550 UH 08A8 4 Installation ACH550 UH User s Manual 9 Type Code Use the following chart to interpret the type code found on either label ACH550 UH 08A8 4 AC HVAC Drive 550 product series Construction region specific 01 Setup and parts specific to IEC installation and compliance UH Setup and parts specific to US installation and NEMA compliance Output current rating See Ratings chart for details Voltage rating 2 208 240 VAC 4 380 480 VAC Enclosure protection class No specification IP 21 UL type 1 B055 IP 54 UL type 12 Ratings and Frame Size The chart in Ratings on page 225 lists technical specifications and identifies the drive s frame size significant since some instructions in this document vary depending on the drive
195. ek kaaga anga in icon ahaa ratte SO hd ok 247 Index Table of Contents ACH550 UH User s Manual Installation Study these installation instructions carefully before proceeding Failure to observe the warnings and instructions may cause a malfunction or personal hazard A Warning Before you begin read Safety on page 3 Installation Flow Chart The installation of the ACH550 adjustable speed AC drive follows the outline below The steps must be carried out in the order shown At the right of each step are references to the detailed information needed for the correct installation of the unit Task PREPARE for installation A PREPARE the Mounting Location Vv REMOVE the front cover v MOUNT the drive A INSTALL wiring Vv CHECK installation v RE INSTALL the cover A APPLY power START UP See Preparing for Installation on page 8 Prepare the Mounting Location on page 11 Remove Front Cover on page 11 Mount the Drive on page 12 Install the Wiring on page 12 Check Installation on page 18 Re install Cover on page 18 Apply Power on page 19 Start Up on page 20 Installation 8 ACH550 UH User s Manual Preparing for Installation Lifting the Drive Lift the drive only by the metal chassis Unpack the Drive 1 Unpack the drive 2 Check for any damage and notify the shipper imm
196. eld screen ala JAN Not configured 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 110V Reference voltage 10 VDC 5 Al2 Not configured 6 AGND Analog input circuit common J1 Jumper Settings 7 AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA Sp Alt 0 2 10 V A3 8 AO2 Output current 0 4 20 mA S p AI2 0 4 20 mA y H9 AGND Analog output circuit common 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 111GND Common for DI return signals L 12 DCOM1 Digital input common for all 13 DI1 Not configured 14 DI2 Not configured 15 DI3 Not configured 16 DI4 Not configured 17 DI5 Not configured 18 DI6 Not configured 19 RO1C Relay output 1 P 1401 20 RO1A _ Default operation Ready gt 19 connected to 21 21 RO1B f 22 RO02C Relay output 2 P 1402 23 RO2A Xa Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 24 RO2B f 25 RO3C Relay output 3 P 1403 26 RO3A Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 57 RO3B Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 APPLIC MACRO 14 HAND CONTROL 3415 SIGNAL 3 PARAM 100 NOT SEL 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS O NOT SEL 3416 SIGNAL 3 MIN 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS O NOT SEL 3417 SIGNAL 3 MAX 1106 REFS SEL 2 Al2 3418 OUTPUT 3 DSP FORM 1201 CONST SPEED SEL O NOT SEL 3419 OUTPUT 3 DSP UNIT 1301 MINIMUM All 0 0 3420 OUTPUT 3 MIN 1304 MINIMUM Al2 0 0 3421 OUTPUT 3 MAX 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 STARTED 4001 G
197. elect ASSISTANTS with the Up Down buttons and select ENTER eA 2 lt 7 wT Scroll to COMMISSION DRIVE with the Up Down buttons and select SEL aA 3 we G Start Up 28 ACH550 UH User s Manual Change the values suggested by the assistant to your preferences and then 4 press SAVE after every change 7 u A The Start Up Assistant will guide you through the start up The Start Up Assistant guides you through the basic programming of a new drive You should familiarize yourself with basic control panel operation and follow the steps outlined above At the first start the drive automatically suggests entering the first task Language Select The assistant also checks the values entered to prevent entries that are out of range The Start Up Assistant is divided into tasks You may activate the tasks one after the other as the Start Up Assistant suggests or independently Note If you want to set the parameters independently use the Parameters mode The order of tasks presented by the Start up Assistant depends on your entries The following task list is typical Task name Description Spin the motor e Prompts for control panel display language selection e Prompts for motor data e Guides user through rotation check Commission drive Prompts for motor data Application Prompts for application macro selection References 1 42 e Prompts for the sour
198. en 8112 LOW FREQ 1 e 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 1 fMIN 8110 START FREQ 2 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 60 0 US Sets the frequency limit used to start the second auxiliary motor e See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The second auxiliary motor starts if e One auxiliary motor is running e ACH550 output frequency exceeds the limit 8110 1 Output frequency stays above the relaxed limit 8110 1 Hz for at least the time 8115 AUX MOT START D 8111 START FREQ 3 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 60 0 US Sets the frequency limit used to start the third auxiliary motor e See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The third auxiliary motor starts if e Two auxiliary motors are running ACH550 output frequency exceeds the limit 8111 1 Hz Output frequency stays above the relaxed limit 8111 1 Hz for at least the time 8115 AUX MOT START D Start Up 132 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S 8112 LOW FREQ 1 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 30 0 US Sets the frequency limit used to stop the first auxiliary motor The first auxiliary motor stops if e The first auxiliary motor is running alone e ACH550 output frequency drops below the limit f Hz 4 8112 1 e Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit fmax 8112 1 Hz for at least the time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D P 810
199. ends on selection 4 6 A Sets the maximum content value See AO1 CONTENT MAX above 1510 MINIMUM AO2 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 4 0 mA Sets the minimum output current See MINIMUM AO1 above 1511 MAXIMUM AO2 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 20 0 mA Sets the maximum output current See MAXIMUM A01 above 1512 FILTER AO2 0 0 10 0s 0 1s 0 1s Start Up 76 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 16 System Controls This group defines a variety of system level locks resets and enables Group 16 System Controls Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1601 RUN ENABLE 6 7 1 0 v Selects the source of the run enable signal 0 NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external run enable signal 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the run enable signal e This digital input must be activated for run enable If the voltage drops and de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and not start until the run enable signal resumes 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the run enable signal e See DI1 above 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the run enable signal Bit 6 of the Command Word 1 parameter 0301 activates the run disable signal See fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the run enable signal e This digital input must be de activated for run enable If this digital input activates the driv
200. ent used in European Economic Area The EMC product standard EN 61800 3 covers the requirements stated for drives such as the ACH550 The drive complies with the First environment restricted distribution and Second Environment limits of EN IEC 61800 3 C Tick Marking A C Tick mark is attached to the ACH550 drive to verify compliance with the relevant standard IEC 61800 3 1996 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific test methods mandated by the Trans Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme The drive complies with the First environment restricted distribution and Second Environment limits of EN IEC 61800 3 with the following provisions The motor and control cables are chosen as specified in this manual e The installation instructions in this manual are followed Technical Data ACH550 UH User s Manual 247 Electromechanical Environments Product standard EN 61800 3 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific test methods defines First Environment as environment that includes domestic premises It also includes establishments directly connected without intermediate transformers to a low voltage power supply network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes Second Environment includes establishments other than those directly connected to a low voltage power supply network which supplies build
201. ents of the STATUS WORD is status information sent by the drive to the master station The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the status word content ABB Drives Profile FBA STATUS WORD Bit name Value Correspond to Pre n the state diagram 0 RDY ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON 0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON 1 RDY RUN 1 READY TO OPERATE 0 OFF1 ACTIVE 2 RDY REF 1 OPERATION ENABLED 0 OPERATION INHIBITED 3 TRIPPED 0 1 FAULT 0 No fault Serial Communication FBA ACH550 UH User s Manual 205 ABB Drives Profile FBA STATUS WORD Bit Name Value Description Correspond to states boxes in the state diagram OFF 2 STA 1 OFF2 inactive OFF2 ACTIVE OFF_3_STA OFF3 inactive OFF3 ACTIVE SWC_ON_INHIB SWITCH ON INHIBIT ACTIVE SWITCH ON INHIBIT NOT ACTIVE ALARM Warning alarm See Alarm Listing in the Diagnostics section for details on alarms No warning alarm AT_SETPOINT OPERATING Actual value equals within tolerance limits the reference value Actual value is outside tolerance limits not equal to reference value REMOTE Drive control location REMOTE EXT1 or EXT2 Drive control location LOCAL 10 ABOVE LIMIT Supervised parameter s value 5 supervision high limit Bit remains 1 until supervised parameter s value lt supervision low limit See g
202. equirements ground a 2 GNG i dee kee wet KG 231 input power 230 MOOR Aaa ee BLK TA Da a Kab Heth a gene aes 233 CE marking cece eee eee 246 COCK 22 Sian shim ceeded Gana 32 com EFB baud rate parameter 128 config file fault code 215 control profile parameter 128 CRC errors count parameter 128 fault codes a 215 ok messages count parameter 128 parameters 00 129 parity parameter a 128 protocol id parameter 128 protocol parameter group 128 station id parameter 128 status parameter 128 UART errors count parameter 128 comm fault function parameter 99 fault time parameter 99 protocol select parameter 142 relay output word data parameter 55 values data parameter 55 249 comm EFB actual value scaling 152 actual values 0 a 151 also see RS232 0 ee 127 analog output control activate 150 comm fault response 151 configuration 146 configure for loss of communication 154 control interface 0 144 control word eee 162 diagnostics eee 153 drive control of functions activate 147 exception codes 2 0005 162 fault code
203. er than one of the parameter values Bottom The bottom of the LCD display shows e Lower corners show the functions currently assigned to the two soft keys e Lower middle displays the current time if configured to show the time Start Up 26 ACH550 UH User s Manual Operating the Drive AUTO HAND The very first time the drive is powered up it is in the auto control AUTO mode and is controlled from the Control terminal block X1 To switch to hand control HAND and control the drive using the control panel press and hold the gt or p button e Pressing the HAND button switches the drive to hand control while keeping the drive running e Pressing the OFF button switches to hand control and stops the drive To switch back to auto control AUTO press and hold the button Hand Auto Off To start the drive press the HAND or AUTO buttons to stop the drive press the OFF button Reference To modify the reference only possible if the display in the upper right corner is in reverse video press the UP or DOWN buttons the reference changes immediately The reference can be modified in the local control mode and can be parameterized using Group 11 reference select to also allow modification in the remote control mode Parameters Mode To change the parameters follow these steps Select MENU to enter the main menu GF 1 Select the Parameters mode with the UP E DOWN bu
204. er values see the Actual Value Scaling in the following sections as appropriate Serial Communication FBA ACH550 UH User s Manual 201 e ABB Drives Profile Technical Data e Generic Profile Technical Data Diagnostics FBA Fault Handling The ACH550 provides fault information as follows e The control panel display shows a fault code and text See Diagnostics starting on page 212 for a complete description Parameters 0401 LAST FAULT 0402 PREVIOUS FAULT1 and 0403 PREVIOUS FAULT2 store the most recent faults e For fieldbus access the drive reports faults as a hexadecimal value assigned and coded according to the DRIVECOM specification See table below Not all profiles support requesting fault codes using this specification For profiles that support this specification the profile documentation defines the proper fault request process Drive Fault Code Fieldbus Fault Code DRIVECOM specification 1 OVERCURRENT 2310h 2 DC OVERVOLT 3210h 3 DEV OVERTEMP 4210h 4 SHORT CIRC 2340h 5 OVERLOAD FF6Bh 6 DC UNDERVOLT 3220h 7 Al1 LOSS 8110h 8 Al2 LOSS 8110h 9 MOT TEMP 4310h 10 PANEL LOSS 5300h 11 ID RUN FAIL FF84h 12 MOTOR STALL 7121h 14 EXT FAULT 1 9000h 15 EXT FAULT 2 9001h 16 EARTH FAULT 2330h 17 UNDERLOAD FF6Ah 18 THERM FAIL 5210h 19 OPEX LINK 7500h 20 OPEX PWR 5414h 21 CURR MEAS 2211h 22 SUPPLY PHASE 3130h 23 ENCODER ERR 730
205. eration is REM 11 ID RUN FAIL The motor ID run was not completed successfully Check for and correct e Motor connections 12 MOTOR STALL Motor or process stall Motor is operating in the stall region Check for and correct e Excessive load e Insufficient motor power e Parameters 3010 3012 13 RESERVED Not used 14 EXTNAL FLT 1 Digital input defined to report first external fault is active See parameter 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 15 EXTERNAL FLT 2 Digital input defined to report second external fault is active See parameter 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 16 EARTH FAULT The load on the input power system is out of balance e Check for correct faults in the motor or motor cable e Verify that motor cable does not exceed max specified length 17 UNDERLOAD Motor load is lower than expected Check for and correct e Disconnected load e Parameters 3013 UNDERLOAD FUNCTION 3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE Diagnostics ACH550 UH User s Manual 215 Fault Fault Name In a a Code Panel Description and Recommended Corrective Action 18 THERM FAIL Internal fault The thermistor measuring the internal temperature of the drive is open or shorted Contact your local ABB sales representative 19 OPEX LINK Internal fault A communication related problem has been detected on the fiber optic link between the OITF and
206. ercent of the full signal in volts or amps corresponds to REF1 MIN in HZ rpm e Parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 or 1304 MINIMUM Al2 sets the minimum analog input signal e These parameters reference and analog min and max settings provide scale and offset adjustment for the reference 1105 REF1 MAX 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 60 0 Hz US 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 1800 rpm US Sets the maximum for external reference 1 e The maximum analog input signal as a percent of full the signal in volts or amps corresponds to REF1 MAX in HZ rpm e Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 or 1305 MAXIMUM Al2 sets the maximum analog input signal A Ext ref A Ext ref P 1104 P 1105 MIN MAX P 1104 Analog eee eee LL LO N MIN input signal max Analog gt i P 1301 P 1302 P 1301 P1302 input signal or 1304 or 1305 or 1304 or 1305 Start Up 66 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 11 Reference Select Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1106 REF2 SELECT 0 19 1 19 v Selects the signal source for external reference REF2 0 17 Same as for parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT 19 PID1OUT The reference is taken from the PID1 output See Groups 40 and 41 19 PID1 REF2 LIMIT If PFA is used SELECT p max 1107 1108 _ PFA 1 17 Lo MIN 1107 1108 1107 REF2 MIN 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 torque 0 600 Sets the minimum for external refere
207. eric display Enter negative values in parameter 3405 for a bar graph display O NOTSEL 8 kh 16 F 24 GPM 32 kHz 40 m3 m 48 galm 56 FPS 1 A 9 C 17 hp 25 PSI 33 Ohm 41 kg s 49 gal h 57 ft s 2 V 10 lb ft 18 MWh 26 CFM 34 ppm 42 kg m 50 ft s 58 inH20 3 Hz 11 mA 19 m s 27 ft 35 pps 43 kg h 51 ft m 59 in wg 4 12 mV 20 mh 28 MGD 36 s 44 mbar 52 ft h 60 ft wg 5 s 13 kW 21 dm3 s 29 inHg 37 l min 45 Pa 53 Ib s 61 Ibsi 6 h 14 W 22 bar 30 FPM 38 I h 46 GPS 54 Ib m 62 ms 7 rpm 15 kWh 23 kPa 31 kb s 39 m s 47 gal s 55 Ib h 63 Mrev 17 ref 119 dev 121 SP 123 lout 125 Fout 127 Vdc 118 act 120 LD 122 FBK 124 Vout 126 Tout 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN Depends on selection 0 096 Sets the minimum value displayed for the first display parameter 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX Depends on selection 1000 0 Sets the maximum value displayed for the first display parameter 3408 SIGNAL 2 PARAM 100 199 1 104 Selects the second parameter by number displayed on the control panel See parameter 3401 3409 SIGNAL 2 MIN Depends on selection 4 3 A Defines the minimum expected value for the second display parameter See parameter 3402 3410 SIGNAL 2 MAX Depends on selection 9 2A Defines the maximum expected value for the second display parameter See parameter 3403 3411 OUTPUT 2 DSP FORM 0 8 1 5 Defines the decimal point location for the second display parameter See parameter 3
208. eriod 2 selected in the timer 19 B P2 P1 Boost and Time Periods 1 and 2 selected in the timer 20 B P3 Boost and Time Period 3 selected in the timer function 21 B P3 P1 Boost and Time Period 3 and 1 selected in the timer 22 B P3 P2 Boost and Time Periods 3 and 2 selected in the timer 23 B P3 P2 P1 Boost and Time Periods 3 2 and 1 selected in the timer 24 B P4 Boost and Time Periods 4 selected in the timer 25 B P4 P1 Boost and Time Period 4 and Timer 1 selected in the timer 26 B P4 P2 Boost and Time Period 4 and 2 selected in the timer 27 B P4 P2 P1 Boost and Time Periods 4 2 and 1 selected in the timer 28 B P4 P3 Boost and Time Periods 4 3 29 B P4 P3 P1 Boost and Time Periods 4 3 and 1 selected in the timer 30 B P4 P3 P2 Boost and Time Periods 4 3 and 2 selected 31 B P4 P3 P2 P1 Boost and Time Periods 4 3 2 and 1 selected 3627 TIMER 2 SRC 0 31 1 0 e See parameter 3626 3628 TIMER 3 SRC 0 31 1 0 e See parameter 3626 3629 TIMER 4 SRC 0 31 1 0 e See parameter 3626 Start Up 114 Group 40 Process PID Set 1 This group defines a set of parameters used with the Process PID PID1 controller Typically only parameters in this group are needed PID Controller Basic Set up In PID control mode the drive compares a reference signal setpoint to an actual signal feedba
209. ers Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 APPLIC MACRO 12 DUAL SPNTCS 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 2 DI2 4001 GAIN 0 7 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 11 DI5 6 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 10 0s 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 STARTED 4010 SETPOINT SEL 19 INTERNAL 1608 START ENABLE 1 O NOT SEL 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT 50 0 2108 START INHIBIT 1 ON 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET 3 D13 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 10 0s 4101 GAIN 0 7 2203 DECELER TIME 1 10 0s 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 10 0s 3105 AR OVERVOLTAGE O DISABLE 4110 SETPOINT SEL 19 INTERNAL 3107 AR AI lt MIN O DISABLE 4111 INTERNAL SETPNT 100 0 Start Up ACH550 User s Manua l E bypass 49 This macro configures for an Electronic Bypass device which can bypass the drive and connect the motor direct on line When using direct speed reference in AUTO mode or process PID see General Considerations on page 35 X1 1 TSCR Signal cable shield screen Q Liyj2 Ali External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 110V Reference voltage 10 VDC O 5 Al2 PID feedback 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common J1 Jumper Settings 7 AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA o gt Al1 0 2 10 V D 8 AO2 Output current 0 4 20 mA
210. erved 7 Al2 LOSS OVERSPEED Reserved 8 MOT OVERTEMP DC HIGH RUSH Reserved 9 PANEL LOSS DRIVE ID Reserved 10 JID RUN FAIL CONFIG FILE Reserved 11 MOTOR STALL SERIAL 1 ERR System Error 12 Reserved EFB CON FILE System Error 13 JEXT FLT 1 FORCE TRIP System Error 14 EXT FLT 2 MOTOR PHASE Hardware Error 15 EARTH FAULT OUTPUT WIRING Param Setting Fault 0306 FAULT WORD 2 1 0000 hex Read only copy of the Fault Word 2 e See parameter 0305 0307 FAULT WORD 3 1 0000 hex Read only copy of the Fault Word 3 e See parameter 0305 Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 59 Group 03 Actual Signals Code Description Range Resolution Default S 0308 ALARM WORD 1 1 0000 hex Read only copy of the ALARM WORD 1 e When a fault is active the corresponding bit for the active fault is set in the Fault Words e Each fault has a dedicated bit allocated within Fault Words e Bits remain set until the whole alarm word is reset Reset by writing zero to the word e The control panel displays the word in hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit O displays a 0001 All zeros and a 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000 Bit 0308 ALARM WORD 1 0309 ALARM WORD 2 0 Reserved Reserved OFFBUTTON 0 1 PID SLEEP 2 ID RUN 3 DIR LOCK Reserved 4 O COMM 5 JAI LOSS 6 Al2 LOSS 7 PANEL LOSS 8 Reserved 9 MOT OVERTEMP 10 JUNDERLOAD 11 MOTOR STALL 12 AUTORESET 13 AUT
211. es these parameters in detail Diagnostic Situations The sub sections below describe various diagnostic situations the problem symptoms and corrective actions Normal Operation During normal network operation 5306 5309 parameter values act as follows at each drive e 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES advances advances for each message properly received and addressed to this drive e 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS does not advance at all advances when an invalid message CRC is received Serial Communication EFB 154 ACH550 UH User s Manual 5308 EFB UART ERRORS does not advance at all advances when character format errors are detected such as parity or framing errors e 5309 EFB status value varies depending on network traffic Loss of Communication The ACH550 behavior if communication is lost was configured earlier in Communication Fault The parameters are 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME The Parameter Descriptions section describes these parameters in detail No Master Station on Line If no master station is on line Neither the EFB OK MESSAGES nor the errors 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS and 5308 EFB UART ERRORS increase on any of the stations To correct e Check that a network master is connected and properly programmed on the network e Verify that the cable is connected and is not cut or short circuited Duplicate Stations If two or more stations have duplicate numbers Two or more drives can
212. ese steps Select MENU to enter the main menu al a Pla CB id GP Select ASSISTANTS with the Up Down buttons and select ENTER Scroll to APPLICATION and select ENTER Select a macro with the Up Down buttons and select SAVE Restoring Defaults To restore the factory default settings select the application macro HVAC Default Control Wiring Each macro has specific requirements for control wiring For general details about the ACH550 control wiring terminals see Control Terminal Descriptions on page 238 Specific wiring requirements are included with each macro description Start Up ACH550 User s Manual HVAC Default 37 This macro provides the factory default parameter settings for the ACS550 UH Factory defaults can be restored at any time by setting parameter 9902 to 1 The diagram below shows typical wiring using this macro When using direct speed reference in AUTO mode or process PID see General Considerations on page 35 X1 T7 ISCR Signal cable shield screen G Liy2 Ali External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 110V Reference voltage 10 VDC Q 5 AI2 PID feedback 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common J1 Jumper Settings 7 AO1 Ou
213. essing convention 157 EFB CONS ana Kaun hane Sheet a 157 EFB discrete inputs 158 EFB holding registers 160 EFB input registers 159 EFB mapping details 157 EFB mapping summaty 156 EFB supported features 155 EFB technical data 155 motor aux start delay PFA parameter aux stop delay PFA parameter compatibility a connection specifications control mode parameter id run parameter nananana load curve break point frequency load curve max fault parameter load curve zero speed load maintenance triggers nominal current parameter nominal frequency parameter nominal power parameter nominal speed parameter nominal voltage parameter number of aux parameter phase fault code stall fault code temperature alarm limit parameter temperature fault limit parameter temperature measure parameter group temperature sensor selection parameter temperature sensor type parameter temperature data parameter thermal protection fault parameter thermal time fault parameter motor cable max length 0 0 c eee eee eee max length
214. eter 5314 to select by 5314 select an actual value for this register 40010 Actual 6 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5315 to select by 5315 select an actual value for this register 40011 Actual 7 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5316 to select by 5316 select an actual value for this register 40012 Actual 8 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5317 to select by 5317 select an actual value for this register Serial Communication EFB ACH550 UH User s Manual 161 Modbus ACH550 Register Standard Profile Access Remarks ABB DRIVES 40031 ACH550 CONTROL R W Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the WORD LSW ACH550 Drive Profile CONTROL WORD See parameter 0301 40032 ACH550 CONTROL R Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the WORD MSW ACH550 Drive Profile CONTROL WORD See parameter 0302 40033 ACH550 STATUS R Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the WORD LSW ACH550 Drive Profile STATUS WORD See parameter 0303 40034 ACH550 STATUS R Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the WORD MSW ACH550 Drive Profile STATUS WORD See parameter 0304 For the Modbus protocol drive parameters in group 53 report the parameter mapping to 4xxxx Registers Code Description 5310 EFB PAR 10 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40005 5311 EFB PAR 11 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40006 5312 EFB
215. eters follow these steps Select MENU to enter the menu GF 1 Select CHANGED PAR with the UP gt DOWN buttons and select ENTER CI 2 k T4 u A list of changed parameters is displayed Select EXIT to exit the parameters mode v4 3 Drive Parameter Backup Mode Use the parameter backup mode to export parameters from one drive to another The parameters are uploaded from a drive to the control panel and downloaded from the control panel to another drive Two options are available Download all copies all application and motor parameters to the drive Useful where drives of the same size use the same application Also useful to create a backup for recovery if drive parameters are corrupted or erased pm Control mo ia a Panel 7 la la AE ane Download BO Bo mm N D X0202 IP2100 IP2100 Start Up 30 ACH550 UH User s Manual Download application copies only the application to the drive Useful where drives of different sizes use the same application Parameters 9905 9909 1605 1607 5201 group 51 parameters and internal motor parameters are NOT copied Control Panel Upload Download J to panel E ipai T SN HHI P Xo202 IP2100 1P2101 To upload parameters to control panel follow these steps Select MENU to enter the main menu G Select PAR BACKUP with the UP DOWN buttons and select ENTER 2 b 4 G Scroll to Upload to P
216. faster Control becomes unstable if the integration time is too short e The figure shows the speed controller output after an error step error remains constant 0 01 s 2 50 Controller Output Gain Kp 1 Ti Integration time gt 0 Tp Derivation time 0 ee umi a Na e Error value t Note You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN to automatically set proportional gain gt 2303 DERIVATION TIME 0 10000 ms Sets the derivation time for the speed controller Derivative action makes the control more responsive to error value changes e The longer the derivation time the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change If the derivation time is set to zero the controller works as a PI controller otherwise as a PID controller The figure shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant Gain Ky 1 T Integration time gt 0 Tp Derivation time gt 0 T Sample time period 2 ms Ae Error value change between two samples Coates Output Error Value VA he e Error value gt t Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 91 Group 23 Speed Control Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2304 ACC COMPENSATION 0 00 600 00 s 0 01s 0 00 Sets the derivation time for acceleration compensation Adding a derivative of the reference to the output of the speed cont
217. fault S 4001 GAIN 0 1 100 0 0 1 2 5 Defines the PID Controller s gain The setting range is 0 1 100 At 0 1 the PID Controller output changes one tenth as much as the error value e At 100 the PID Controller output changes one hundred times as much as the error value Use the proportional gain and integration time values to adjust the responsiveness of the system e A low value for proportional gain and a high value for integral time ensures stable operation but provides sluggish response If the proportional gain value is too large or the integral time too short the system can become unstable Procedure Initially set e 4001 GAIN 0 0 e 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 20 seconds Start the system and see if it reaches the set point quickly while maintaining stable operation If not increase GAIN 4001 until the actual signal or drive speed oscillates constantly It may be necessary to start and stop the drive to induce this oscillation Reduce GAIN 4001 until the oscillation stops Set GAIN 4001 to 0 4 to 0 6 times the above value Decrease the INTEGRATION TIME 4002 until the feedback signal or drive speed oscillates constantly It may be necessary to start and stop the drive to induce this oscillation Increase INTEGRATION TIME 4002 until the oscillation stops Set INTEGRATION TIME 4002 to 1 15 to 1 5 times the above value If the feedback signal contains high frequency noise increase the v
218. figured 19 RO1C Relay output 1 P 1401 20 RO1A fi Default operation Started gt 19 connected to 21 21 RO1B 22 RO2C Relay output 2 P 1402 23 RO2A fu Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 24 RO2B f 25 RO3C Relay output 3 P 1403 26 RO3A fx Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 27 RO3B Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 APPLIC MACRO 9 INT TIMER CS 3416 SIGNAL 3 MIN 200 0 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 0 NOT SEL 3417 SIGNAL 3 MAX 200 0 1103 REF1 SEL O KEYPAD 3419 OUTPUT 3 DSP UNIT 4 1106 REFS SEL 2 Al2 3420 OUTPUT 3 MIN 200 0 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 15 TIMER1 3421 OUTPUT 3 MAX 200 0 1301 MINIMUM Al1 0 0 3622 BOOST SEL 3 DI3 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 STARTED 4001 GAIN 1 0 1601 RUN ENABLE 2 D12 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 60 0 s 1609 START ENABLE 2 5 DI5 4101 GAIN 1 0 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 60 0 s 3415 SIGNAL 3 PARAM 0105 TORQUE 4110 SETPOINT SEL 1 Al1 Start Up 46 Floating Point ACH550 User s Manual This application macro is for applications where speed reference needs to be controlled through digital inputs DI5 amp DI6 By activating digital input 5 the speed reference increases by activating digital input 6 the speed reference decreases If both digital inputs are active or inactive the reference does not change Note When co
219. fines an inverted digital input DI1 as the external fault input e De activating the digital input indicates a fault The drive displays a fault 14 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 and the drive coasts to stop 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the external fault input e See DI1 INV above 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 6 6 1 0 Defines the External Fault 2 signal input and the drive response to an external fault See parameter 3003 above 3005 MOT THERM PROT 0 2 1 1 Defines the drive response to motor overheating 0 NOT SEL No response and or motor thermal protection not set up 1 FAULT When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 90 C displays a warning 2010 MOT OVERTEMP When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 110 C displays a fault 9 MOT OVERTEMP and the drive coasts to stop 2 WARNING When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 90 C displays a warning 2010 MOT OVERTEMP Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 97 Group 30 Fault Functions Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3006 MOT THERM TIME model temperature with steady load six times its rated current Sets the motor thermal time constant for the motor temperature 256 9999 s 1 e This is the time required for the motor to reach 63 of the final e For thermal protection according to UL requirements for NEMA class motors use the rule of thum
220. for Modbus using ABB Drive profile 2 BACnet not defined at time of publication Reference Scaling Where required REFERENCES can be scaled See the following as appropriate e Modbus Register 40002 in the Modbus Protocol Technical Data section e Reference Scaling in the ABB Drives Profile Technical Data section e N2 Analog Output Objects in the N2 Protocol Technical Data section The slope of points 60 and 61 in the FLN Protocol Technical Data section e TBD in the BACnet Technical Data section Serial Communication EFB ACH550 UH User s Manual 149 Miscellaneous Drive Control Using the fieldbus for miscellaneous drive control requires Drive parameter values set as defined below Fieldbus controller supplied command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent the table shows samples Protocol Reference Modbus N2 FLN BACnet Run enable by fieldbus 40001 BO4 35 Drive Parameter Value Setting 1601 RUN ENABLE 7 COMM bit 3 1604 FAULT RESET 8 COMM Fault reset by fieldbus 40001 BO6 94 SEL bit 7 1607 PARAM SAVE 1 SAVE Saves altered parameters 41607 BO18 N A to memory then value returns to O 1 Applies only for Modbus using ABB Drive profile 2 BACnet not defined at time of publication 3 Use Memorize Point command Relay Output Contro
221. function on or off The critical speed foutput function avoids specific speed ranges 0 OFF Disables the critical speeds function 1 ON Enables the critical speeds function D2 ia a pas Example To avoid speeds at which a fan system vibrates AG AA badly Determine problem speed ranges Assume they are found to 23 be 18 23 Hz and 46 52 Hz 17 Set 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL 1 1 Set 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 18 Hz Set 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 23 Hz Set 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO 46 Hz HL AH f2L f2H gt frer Hz Set 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI 52 HZ 18 23 46 52 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 0 30000 rpm 1rpm 0 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 1 The value must be less than or equal to 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI e Units are rpm unless 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR SPEED then units are Hz 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 0 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 1 The value must be greater than or equal to 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO Units are rpm unless 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR SPEED then units are Hz 2504 CRIT SPEED 2LO 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 0 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 2 See parameter 2502 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 0 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 2 See para
222. gn of the fieldbus reference interact to produce REFERENCE values REF1 Serial Communication FBA ACH550 UH User s Manual 209 and REF2 Note fieldbus references are bipolar that is they can be positive or negative ABB Drives Profile Parameter Value Setting Al Reference Scaling 1003 DIRECTION 1 FORWARD Resultant Ref Max Ref r rn fF i l oi poai l l l l l l l Fieldbus l l l l Reference 163 100 100 163 Max Ref 1003 DIRECTION 2 REVERSE Max Ref a p Eisa Resultant Ref Fieldbus 163 100 100 163 Reference Max Ref 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Resultant Ref Max Ref x 7 i l l iu H Fieldbus 163 100 a ag Reference i 100 163 l l E Max Ref __uZ _ Actual Value As described earlier in Control Interface Actual Values are words containing drive values Actual Value Scaling The scaling of the integers sent to the fieldbus as Actual Values depends on the resolution of the selected drive parameter Except as noted for Data Words 5 and 6 below scale the feedback integer using the resolution listed for the parameter in the Parameter Descriptions section For example Feedback Integer Parameter Resolution Scaled Value 1 0 1 mA 1 0 1 mA 0 1 mA 10 0 1 10 0 1 1 Serial Communication FBA 21
223. h the FBA module e Parameter 5101 is automatically configured Parameters 5102 5126 are protocol dependent and define for example the profile used and additional I O words These parameters are referred to as the fieldbus configuration parameters See the user s manual provided with the FBA module for details on the fieldbus configuration parameters e Parameter 5127 forces the validation of changes to parameters 5102 5126 If parameter 5127 is not used changes to parameters 5102 5126 take affect only after the drive power is cycled e Parameters 5128 5133 provide data about the FBA module currently installed e g component versions and status The Parameters Description section lists the group 51 parameters Activate Drive Control Functions FBA Fieldbus control of various drive functions requires configuration to Tell the drive to accept fieldbus control of the function Define as a fieldbus input any drive data required for control Define as a fieldbus output any control data required by the drive The following sections describe at a general level the configuration required for each control function The last column in each table below is deliberately blank See the user s manual supplied with the FBA module for the appropriate entry Start Stop Direction Control Using the fieldbus for start stop direction control of the drive requires Drive parameter values set as defined below e Fieldbus control
224. hanical and Electrical Installation EFB A Warning Connections should be made only while the drive is disconnected from the power source Drive terminals 28 32 are for RS485 communications e Use Belden 9842 or equivalent Belden 9842 is a dual twisted shielded pair cable with a wave impedance of 120 Q e Use one of these twisted shielded pairs for the RS485 link Use this pair to connect all A terminals together and all B terminals together Use one of the wires in the other pair for the logical ground terminal 31 leaving one wire unused e Do not directly ground the RS485 network at any point Ground all devices on the network using their corresponding earthing terminals e As always the grounding wires should not form any closed loops and all the devices should be earthed to a common ground Connect the RS485 link in a daisy chained bus without dropout lines To reduce noise on the network terminate the RS485 network using 120 Q resistors at both ends of the network Use the DIP switch to connect or disconnect the termination resistors See following diagram and table Terminated Terminated Station Station Station Station 00000 00000 X1 Identification Hardware Description 28 Screen RS485 Multidrop application RS485 interface 29 B Positive SCR a SOR J2 J2 30 A Negative S0TA A i A ON 31 AGND GND 31
225. he DC undervoltage controller increases power loss ride through on systems with a high inertia such as a centrifuge or a fan 0 DISABLE Disables controller 1 ENABLE TIME Enables controller without a maximum time limit for operation Start Up 84 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 20 Limits Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 500 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz v Defi the mini limit for the drive output frequency Pisa PIRO ra speed value defines fue tides Bie 2007 value is lt 0 one positive and one negative P 2008 e A negative minimum speed value defines one speed range See figure 0 p lime Note Keep MINIMUM FREQ lt MAXIMUM FREQ P 2007 Freq 2007 value is gt 0 P 2008 E ai p lime P 2007 rrequency ra P 2008 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 60 0 Hz US v Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency 2013 MIN TORQUE SEL 6 7 1 0 Defines control of the selection between two minimum torque limits 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 and 2016 MIN TORQUE 2 O MIN TORQUE 1 Selects 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 as the minimum limit used 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used e Activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 2 value e De activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 1 value 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the minimum limit us
226. he PID control setpoint requires e Drive parameter values set as defined below Serial Communication EFB ACH550 UH User s Manual 151 Fieldbus controller supplied setpoint value in the appropriate location As defined in Analog Output Control above Protocol Reference Drive Parameter Value Setting 7 Modbus N2 FLN BACnet 4010 SETPOINT 8 COMM VALUE 1 Setpointis 0135 See Analog Output Control SEL 9 COMM Alt value plus or 10 COMM AI1 Umes A 1 BACnet not defined at time of publication Communication Fault When using fieldbus control specify the drive s action if serial communication is lost T PE Protocol Drive Parameter Value Description Reference 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 0 NOT SEL Set for appropriate drive response 1 FAULT 2 CONST SP7 3 LAST SPEED 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Set time delay before acting on a communication loss Feedback from the Drive EFB Pre defined Feedback Inputs to the controller drive outputs have pre defined meanings established by the protocol This feedback does not require drive configuration The following table lists a sample of feedback data For a complete listing see input word point object listings in the technical data for the appropriate protocol starting on page 155 Dive Paranveiar Protocol Reference Modbus N2 FLN BACnet 0102 SPEED 40102
227. he multiplier as a percent plus or minus used in the trim mode Start Up 124 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 42 External PID Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4232 CORRECTION SRC tad 1 1 Defines the trimming reference for the Add correction source Ramped Ref gt 1 PID2 REF Uses appropriate REF Switch Select MAX SWITCH A OR B par 4230 Trim immed 1105 REF 1 MAX when REF1 is pj Ext ref 1 Scale MUl ma Ipa active A max A off 9 x a S 1108 REF 2 MAX when REF2 is gt Ext ref 2 prop or gt gt active B max B direct 2 PID2 OUTPUT Uses the absolute Abs Max maximum speed or frequency gt Speed Freq Switch C C Select 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED if 9904 par 4232 MOTOR CONTROL MODE 1 SPEED 7671 Trimming PID2 ret Or 2 TORQUE PID ref PID 2 e 2008 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY IF 9904 Trimming PID2 out MOTOR CONTROL MODE 3 SCALAR Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 125 Group 51 Ext Comm Module This group defines set up variables for a fieldbus adaptor FBA communication module For more information on these parameters refer to the user s manualation supplied with the FBA module Group 51 Ext Comm Module Code Description Range Resolution Default S 5101 FBA TYPE 1 0 Displays the type of the connected fieldbus adapter
228. ieee PAG TGA AN Na 23 LY lee AA AA ANA ane ew PP eis ee bad oop ga te 25 Application Macros s 02 5545 0 5 saunas ng Re pee RES LINA ANG KANG heey ES 35 Parameter Descriptions ies aay een gees Sart Aes Reed ee RAG Sle eee oe 51 Serial Communication EFB OVEVIOW vn eros pna NAGP dr naba a aao ma a GR e bay HG a ba ole ang 143 PIANMING a saya ead NAL be Digna PAS EL hd Do Taba Da Na danh 144 Mechanical and Electrical Installation EFB 145 Communication Set up EFB 0 146 Activate Drive Control Functions EFB a 147 Feedback from the Drive EFB 0 aa 151 Diagnostics EFB diarrea aaa ma a a el Pee ese NOI eee ee 153 Modbus Protocol Technical Data a 155 ABB Drives Profile Technical Data 00 0 a 162 N2 Protocol Technical Data 0 a 170 FLN Protocol Technical Data 0 aa 179 BACnet Technical Data cc ee es 192 Serial Communication FBA OVENVIOW Sn a ete dl ALA NG a PG TUNGGAL yeaa 193 Planning ee i ra Da Pa ala tte NG KEAN NAN ANA NAAN BUNGA NG 195 Mechanical and Electrical Installation FBA 0055 196 Communication Set up FBA 000 e ee es 197 Activate Drive Control Functions FBA a 197 Feedback from the Drive FBA 0 00 00 ccc cee ee eee 200 Diagnostics S FBA ce tink oo oid AR 201 ABB Drives Profile Technical Data 0 0 000 ccc eee 203 Generic
229. ignals The following describes how the drive keeps track of motors and relays The ACH550 provides relay outputs RO1 RO3 e An external digital output module can be added to provide relay outputs RO4 RO6 e Parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 define respectively how relays RO1 RO6 are used the parameter value 31 PFA defines the relay as used for PFA The ACH550 assigns auxiliary motors to relays in ascending order If the Autochange function is disabled the first auxiliary motor is the one connected to the first relay with a parameter setting 31 PFA and so on If the Autochange function is used the assignments rotate Initially the soeed regulated motor is the one connected to the first relay with a parameter setting 31 PFA the first auxiliary motor is the one connected to the second relay with a parameter setting 31 PFA and so on Relay Logic AGHSS ACH550 me Standard PFA mode PFA with Autochange mode e The table below shows the ACH550 PFA motor assignments for some typical settings in the Relay Output parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 where the settings are either 31 PFA or X anything but 31 and where the Autochange function is disabled 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 Parameter Setting ACH550 Relay Assignment TUT TO Autochange Disabled 4 41 4 41 4 4 1 RO
230. in a group with the UP DOWN buttons Select 4 EDIT to change the parameter value Press the UP DOWN buttons to change the parameter value cP id Cl Select SAVE to store the modified value or select CANCEL to leave the set mode 6 Any modifications not saved are cancelled al Select EXIT to return to the listing of parameter groups and again to return to CV 7 the main menu 4 To complete the control connections by manually entering the parameters see Parameters Mode in this section For detailed hardware description see the Technical Data section Note The current parameter value appears below the highlighted parameter Note To view the default parameter value press the UP DOWN buttons simultaneously Note The most typical and necessary parameters to change are parameter groups 99 Start up data 10 Start Stop Dir 11 Reference Select 20 Limits 21 Start Stop 22 Accel Decel 26 Motor Control and 30 Fault Functions Note To restore the default factory settings select the application macro HVAC default Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 25 Modes The HVAC control panel has several different modes for configuring operating and diagnosing the drive The modes are Standard display mode Shows drive status information and operates the drive e Parameters mode Edits parameter values individually e Start up assistant mode Guides th
231. ines an inverted digital input DI1 as the start enable 2 signal 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 2 signal See DI1 INV above Start Up 80 Group 17 Override ACH550 UH User s Manual This group defines the source for the override activation signal the override speed frequency and pass code and how the override is enabled and disabled When override DI is activated the drive stops and then accelerates to the preset speed or frequency When the DI is deactivated the drive stops and reboots If the start command run enable and start enables are active in the AUTO mode the drive starts automatically and continues normally after override mode In the HAND mode the drive returns to OFF mode When override is active Drive runs at preset speed Drive ignores all keypad commands Drive ignores all commands from communication links Drive ignores all digital inputs except override activation deactivation RUN ENABLE and START ENABLE Drive displays alarm message 2020 OVERRIDE MODE The following faults are ignored 3 DEVICE OVERTEMP 5 OVERLOAD 6 DC UNDERVOLT 7 Al1 LOSS 8 Al2 LOSS 9 MOTOR TEMP 10 PANEL LOSS 12 MOTOR STALL 14 EXTERNAL FLT 1 15 EXTERNAL FLT 2 17 UNDERLOAD 18 THERM FAIL 21 CURR MEAS 22 SUPPLY PHASE 24 OVERSPEED 28 SERIAL 1 ERR 29 EFB CONFIG FILE
232. ines the actual value of the motor s accumulated revolutions counter The parameter is reset by writing 0 to it 2905 RUN TIME TRIG 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 1 kh 0 0 Sets the trigger point for the drive s run time counter e 0 0 NOT SEL 2906 RUN TIME ACT 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 1 kh 0 0 Defines the actual value of the drive s run time counter The parameter is reset by writing 0 0 to it 2907 USER MWh TRIG 0 0 6553 5 MWh 0 1 MWh 0 0 Sets the trigger point for the drive s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours counter e 0 0 NOT SEL 2908 USER MWh ACT 0 0 6553 5 MWh 0 1 MWh 0 0 Defines the actual value of the drive s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours counter The parameter is reset by writing 0 0 to it Start Up 96 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 30 Fault Functions This group defines situations that the drive should recognize as potential faults and defines how the drive should respond if the fault is detected Group 30 Fault Functions Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION 0 3 1 0 Defines the drive response if the analog input Al signal drops below the fault limits and Al is used in reference chain e 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT and 3022 Al2 FAULT LIMIT set the minimum limits 0 NOT SEL No response 1 FAULT Displays a fault 7 All Loss or 8 Al2 LOSS and the drive coasts to stop 2 CONST SP 7
233. ings used for domestic purposes Liability Limits The manufacturer is not responsible for Any costs resulting from a failure if the installation commissioning repair alteration or ambient conditions of the drive do not fulfil the requirements specified in the documentation delivered with the unit and other relevant documentation Units subjected to misuse negligence or accident Units comprised of materials provided or designs stipulated by the purchaser In no event shall the manufacturer its suppliers or subcontractors be liable for special indirect incidental or consequential damages losses or penalties If you have any questions concerning your ABB drive please contact the local distributor or ABB office The technical data information and specifications are valid at the time of printing The manufacturer reserves the right to modifications without prior notice Technical Data 248 Index Numerics Oxxxx register EFB function codes 158 EFB mapping 0 e ee eee 157 1xxxx register EFB function codes 159 EFB mapping 0 eee eee 158 3xxxx register EFB function codes 160 EFB mapping 0 e ee eee 159 4xxxx register EFB function codes 162 EFB MAPPING waw maana Gt DAGA 160 A acceleration at aux stop PFA parameter 140 compensation parameter 91 ramp
234. input and DCOM The 24 V may be provided by the Ta ACH550 X1 10 or by an external 12 24 V source of either polarity 3 2 13 DH Digital input 1 programmable Default start stop 14 DI2 Digital input 2 programmable Default not configured 15 DIZ Digital input 3 programmable Default constant preset speed 16 DI4 Digital input 4 programmable Default safety interlock 17 DI5 Digital input 5 programmable Default not configured 18 DIE Digital input 6 programmable Default not configured 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable Default Ready 20 RO1A Maximum 250 VAC 30 VDC 2 A N Minimum 500 mW 12 V 10 mA a 21 RO1B 2 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable Default Running 6 23 RO2A Maximum 250 VAC 30 VDC 2 A gt NG Minimum 500 mW 12 V 10 mA amp 24 RO2B o 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable Default Fault 1 26 RO3A Maximum 250 VAC 30 VDC 2 A NT Minimum 500 mW 12 V 10 mA 27 RO3B _4 1 Digital input impedance 1 5 kQ Maximum voltage for digital inputs is 30 V 2 Default values depend on the macro used Values specified are for the HVAC default macro See Application Macros on page 35 Technical Data 240 ACH550 UH User s Manual You can wire the digital input terminals in either a PNP or NPN configuration PNP connection source X1 24V 11 GND 12
235. input power connections at U1 V1 and W1 are connected and tightened as specified The input power branch circuit protection is installed The motor connections at U2 V2 and W2 are connected and tightened as specified The input power motor and control wiring are routed through separate conduit runs NO power factor compensation capacitors are in the motor cable The control connections are connected and tightened as specified NO tools or foreign objects such as drill shavings are inside the drive NO alternate power source for the motor such as a bypass connection is connected no voltage is applied to the output of the drive Re install Cover IP 21 UL Type 1 1 Align the cover and slide it on 2 Tighten the captive screw 2 3 Re install the control panel N 3 7 T NG BI wif S LETTTTTI amp IP2009 Installation ACH550 UH User s Manual 19 IP 54 UL Type 12 1 Align the cover and slide it on 2 Tighten the captive screws around the edge of the cover 3 Slide the hood down over the top of the cover 4 Install the two screws that attach the hood 5 Re install the control panel Note The control panel window must be closed to comply with IP 54 UL type 12 6 Optional Add a lock not supplied to secure the control panel window Appl
236. instead HAND mode at the panel has priority over this point Thus this point is only effective in temporarily taking control from the analog inputs or some other internal control functionality 70 DI1 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Digital Input 1 1 ON O OFF 0118 bit 2 71 DI2 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Digital Input 2 1 ON O OFF 0118 bit 1 72 DI3 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Digital Input 3 1 ON O OFF 0118 bit 0 73 DI 4 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Digital Input 4 1 ON 0 OFF 0119 bit 2 74 DI5 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Digital Input 5 1 ON 0 OFF 0119 bit 1 75 DI 6 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Digital Input 6 1 ON O OFF 0119 bit 0 76 RO 1 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Relay Output 1 1 ON 0 OFF 0122 bit 2 77 RO 2 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Relay Output 2 1 ON 0 OFF 0122 bit 1 78 RO 3 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Relay Output 3 1 ON 0 OFF 0122 bit 0 79 RO 4 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Relay Output 4 1 ON 0 OFF 0123 bit 2 80 RO5 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Relay Output 5 1 ON 0 OFF 0123 bit 1 81 RO6 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Relay Output 6 1 ON 0 OFF 0123 bit 0 82 Al 1 ACTUAL Indicates the input level of Analog Input 1 0120 83 Al 2 ACTUAL Indicates the input level of Analog Input 2 0121 84 AO 1 ACTUAL Indicates the output level of Analog Output 1 0124 85 AO 2 ACTUAL Indicates the output
237. ion HAND AUTO Note In order to activate and use the PID controller Parameter 1106 must be set to value 19 Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 115 PID Controller Advanced ACH550 has 2 separate PID Controllers e Process PID PID1 and e External PID PID2 Process PID PID1 has 2 separate sets of parameters e Process PID PID1 SET1 defined in Group 40 and e Process PID PID1 SET2 defined in Group 41 You can select between the 2 different sets by using parameter 4027 Typically two different PID Controller sets are used when the load of the motor changes considerably from one situation to another You can use External PID PID2 defined in Group 42 in 2 different ways Instead of using additional PID controller hardware you can set outputs of the ACH550 to control a field instrument like a damper or a valve In this case set Parameter 4230 to value 0 0 is the default value You can use External PID PID2 as an additional PID controller to Process PID PID1 to trim or fine tune the speed of the ACH550 An example of the trimming is a return fan that follows the speed of the supply fan As the return fan needs to run faster or slower then the supply fan in order to create under or overpressure correction factors to the supply fan speed are needed Use External PID PID2 in the return fan drive to provide these corrections Group 40 Process PID Set 1 Code Description Range Resolution De
238. iption on page 239 Digital Inputs Relays Digital Outputs Digital input impedance 1 5 kQ Maximum voltage for digital inputs is 30 V Max contact voltage 30 V DC 250 V AC Max contact current power 6 A 30 V DC 1500 VA 250 V AC Max continuous current 2 A rms cos 1 1 Arms cos 0 4 Minimum load 500 mW 12 V 10 mA Contact material Silver nickel AgN Isolation between relay digital outputs test voltage 2 5 kV rms 1 minute Control Cables General Recommendations Use multi core cables with a braided copper wire screen temperature rated at 60 C 140 F or above se Double Shielded Single Shielded Example JAMAK by Draka NK Cables Example NOMAK by Draka NK Cables At the drive end twist the screen together into a bundle not longer than five times its width and connected to terminal X1 1 for digital and analog I O cables or to either X1 28 or X1 32 for RS485 cables Route control cables to minimize radiation to the cable Route as far away as possible from the input power and motor cables at least 20 cm 8 in Where control cables must cross power cables make sure they are at an angle as near 90 as possible e Stay at least 20 cm 8 in from the sides of the drive Use care in mixing signal types on the same cable e Do not mix analog and digital input signals on the same cable e Run relay controlled signals as twisted pairs es
239. iscrete Input 0x02 Read discrete inputs status For the ACH550 the individual bits Status of the status word are mapped to Inputs 1 16 or 1 32 depending on the active profile Terminal inputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Input 33 e g DI1 Input 33 Read Multiple 0x03 Read multiple holding registers For the ACH550 the entire Holding Registers parameter set is mapped as holding registers as well as command status and reference values Read Multiple Input 0x04 Read multiple input registers For the ACH550 the 2 analog input Registers channels are mapped as input registers 1 amp 2 Force Single Coil 0x05 Write a single discrete output For the ACH550 the individual bits mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 e g RO1 Coil 33 of the control word are mapped to Coils 1 16 Relay outputs are Serial Communication EFB 156 ACH550 UH User s Manual Function Code Hex Description Write Single 0x06 Write single holding register For the ACH550 the entire Holding Register parameter set is mapped as holding registers as well as command status and reference values Diagnostics 0x08 Perform Modbus diagnostics Subcodes for Query 0x00 Restart 0x01 4 Listen Only 0x04 are supported Force Multiple Coils OxOF Write multiple discrete outputs For the ACH550 the individual bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1 16 Relay outputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33
240. it clamps not supplied Connect conduit runs for input power motor and control cables to the box Route input power and motor wiring through separate conduits Connect power motor and ground wires to the drive terminals See Wiring Overview on page 13 IP2004 Route the control cables through the conduit not the same conduit as either input power or motor wiring Strip the control cable sheathing and twist the copper screen into a pig tail Connect the ground screen pig tail for digital and analog I O cables at X1 1 Ground only at drive end Connect the ground screen pig tail for RS485 cables at X1 28 or X1 32 Ground only at drive end Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals See Wiring Overview Lok on page 13 TH m P2005 Install the conduit box cover 1 screw Installation ACH550 UH User s Manual Wiring IP 54 UL Type 12 Enclosure 1 Step depends on Frame Size e Frame Sizes R1 R4 Remove and discard the cable seals where conduit will be installed The cable seals are cone shaped rubber seals on the bottom of the drive e Frame Sizes R4 and R5 Use punch to create holes for conduit connections as needed For each conduit run input power motor and control wiring must be separate install water tight conduit connectors not supplied 3 Route the power wiring through conduit 4 Route the motor wiring through conduit not the
241. ither Receive all of its control information from the fieldbus or Be controlled from some combination of fieldbus control and other available control locations such as digital or analog inputs and the control panel Connect using either 4 Fieldbus Controller Fieldbus Other Devices Standard EFB embedded fieldbus at _ terminals X1 28 32 AA FBA fieldbus adapter module mounted in slot 2 option Rxxx TST Two basic serial communications configurations are available e EFB embedded fieldbus See Serial Communication EFB on page 143 e FBA fieldbus adapter With one of the optional FBA modules in the drive s expansion slot 2 the drive can communicate to a control system using one of the following protocols Profibus DP LonWorks CANopen DeviceNet ControlNet Ethernet The ACH550 detects automatically which communication protocol is used by the plug in fieldbus adapter The default settings for each protocol assume that the profile used is the protocol s industry standard drive profile e g PROFldrive for PROFIBUS AC DC Drive for DeviceNet All of the FBA protocols can also be configured for the ABB Drives profile Configuration details depend on the protocol and profile used These details are provided in a user s manual supplied with the FBA module Serial Communica
242. ive The drive switches between states according to the bit coded instructions in the CONTROL WORD Using the CONTROL WORD requires that The drive is in remote REM control Serial Communication FBA ACH550 UH User s Manual 195 The serial communication channel is defined as the source for controlling commands from EXT1 set using parameters 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS and 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL The external plug in fieldbus adapter is activated Parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL 4 EXT FBA The external plug in fieldbus adapter is configured to use the drive profile mode or drive profile objects The content of the CONTROL WORD depends on the protocol profile used See the user s manual provided with the FBA module and or the ABB Drives Profile Technical Data Status Word The STATUS WORD is a 16 bit word containing status information sent by the drive to the fieldbus controller The content of the STATUS WORD depends on the protocol profile used See the user s manual provided with the FBA module and or the ABB Drives Profile Technical Data section Reference The contents of each REFERENCE word e Can be used as speed or frequency reference Isa 16 bit word comprised of a sign bit and a 15 bit integer e Negative references indicating reversed rotation direction are indicated by the two s complement of the corresponding positive reference value The use of a second reference REF2 is supported only when
243. jects support the following features e Analog Output value in engineering units e Override value is used to change the Analog Output value It is not possible to return to the previous value by removing the override The override feature is used only to change the value Binary Output The binary output objects support the following features e Binary Output value e Override value is used to change the Binary Output value It is not possible to return to the previous value by removing the override The override feature is used only to change the value Metasys Integration The following diagram shows the drives integration to the Johnson Controls Metasys system N1LAN N2 Fieldbus Serial Communication EFB ACH550 UH User s Manual 173 The following diagram shows the drives integration to the Johnson Controls Metasys Companion system m PC Version Panel Version LTD ibi RS232 RS485 Converter N2 Fieldbus Ca Ha id IN JN LIB On the N2 Fieldbus each ACH550 drive can be accessed by the full complement of Metasys FMS features including Change of State COS monitoring alarm notification scheduling trend and totalization On one N2 Fieldbus segment there can be up to 32 nodes whil
244. l Using the fieldbus for relay output control requires e Drive parameter values set as defined below e Fieldbus controller supplied binary coded relay command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent y Protocol Reference Drive Parameter Value Setting CUA a a es Modbus N2 FLN BACnet 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 35 COMM Relay Output 1 40134 BO7 40 controlled by bit O or fieldbus 00033 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 35 COMM Relay Output 2 40134 BO8 41 controlled by bit 1 or fieldbus 00034 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 35 COMM Relay Output 3 40134 BO 9 42 controlled by bit 2 or fieldbus 00035 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 35 COMM Relay Output 4 40134 BO10 43 controlled by bit 3 or fieldbus 00036 1411 RELAY OUTPUT 5 35 COMM Relay Output 5 40134 BO11 44 controlled by bit 4 or fieldbus 00037 1412 RELAY OUTPUT 6 35 COMM Relay Output 6 40134 BO12 45 controlled by bit 5 or fieldbus 00038 Serial Communication EFB 150 ACH550 UH User s Manual 1 More than 3 relays requires the addition of a relay extension module 2 Applies only for Modbus using ABB Drive profile 3 BACnet not defined at time of publication For example To control relays 1 and 2 using serial communication Set parameters 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 and 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 1 35 COMM Then for example using N2
245. lay DI3 First PFA Relay DI3 Second PFA Relay DI4 Second PFA Relay D14 Third PFA Relay DI5 Third PFA Relay DI5 Fourth PFA Relay DI6 Fourth PFA Relay DI6 Free 5 Not allowed DI1 Free pi2 First PFA Relay DI3 Second PFA Relay D14 Third PFA Relay DI5 Fourth PFA Relay D16 Fifth PFA Relay 6 Not allowed Not allowed Default S Start Up 138 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution 3 DI3 Enables the Interlocks function and assigns a digital input starting with DI3 to the interlock signal for each PFA relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on e The number of PFA relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFA e The Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No PFA Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled Relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 DI2 Free Not allowed DI3 Speed Reg Motor DI4 DI6 Free 1 DI1 DI2 Free DI1 DI2 Free DI3 Speed Reg Motor DI3 First PFA Relay DI4 First PFA Relay D14 D16 Free DI5 DI6 Free 2 DI1 DI2 Free DI1 DI2 Free DI3 Speed Reg Motor DI3 First PFA Relay DI4 First PFA Relay 73 DI4 Second PFA Relay DI5 Second PFA Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI6 Free 3 DI1 DI2 Free DI1 DI2 Free DI3 Speed Reg Motor D13 First PFA Relay DI4 First PFA Relay 73 DI4 Second PFA Relay DI5 Sec
246. lay after a few seconds The message returns periodically as long as the alarm condition exists Correcting Faults The recommended corrective action for faults is e Use the Fault Listing table below to find and address the root cause of the problem e Reset the drive See Fault Resetting on page 217 Fault Listing Fault Code Fault Name In Panel Description and Recommended Corrective Action 1 OVERCURRENT Output current is excessive Check for and correct Excessive motor load Insufficient acceleration time parameters 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 and 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 Faulty motor motor cables or connections DC OVERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is excessive Check for and correct Static or transient overvoltages in the input power supply Insufficient deceleration time parameters 2203 DECELER TIME 1 and 2206 DECELER TIME 2 Undersized brake chopper if present DEV OVERTEMP Drive heatsink is overheated Temperature is at or above 115 C 239 F Check for and correct Fan failure Obstructions in the air flow Dirt or dust coating on the heat sink Excessive ambient temperature Excessive motor load SHORT CIRC Fault current Check for and correct A short circuit in the motor cable s or motor Supply disturbances Diagnostics 214 ACH550 UH User s Manual Fault Code Fault Name In Panel Description and Recommended Corr
247. ldbus command is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus controller The command consists of two Command Words Bit coded instructions in the Command Words switch the drive between states To control the drive using the Command Words an external location EXT1 or EXT2 must be active and set to COMM See parameters 1001 and 1002 The control panel displays the word in hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit 0 displays as 0001 All zeros and a 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000 Bit 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 0 STOP FBLOCAL_CTL 1 START FBLOCAL_REF 2 REVERSE START_DISABLE1 3 LOCAL START DISABLE2 4 RESET Reserved 5 EXT2 Reserved 6 RUN DISABLE Reserved 7 STPMODE R Reserved 8 STPMODE EM Reserved 9 STPMODE C Reserved 10 RAMP 2 Reserved 11 RAMP OUT 0 REF CONST 12 RAMP HOLD REF AVE 13 RAMP IN O LINK ON 14 RREQ LOCALLOC REQ STARTINH 15 TORQLIM2 OFF INTERLOCK 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 z Read only copy of the Fieldbus Command Word 2 See parameter 0301 Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 57 Group 03 Actual Signals Code Description Range Resolution Default S 0303 FB STS WORD 1 1 hex Read only copy of the Status Word 1 e The drive sends status information to the fieldbus controller The status consists of two Status Words Bit
248. ler supplied command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent B baa Protocol Drive Parameter Value Description Reference 1001 EXT1 10 COMM Start Stop controlled by fieldbus with COMMANDS Ext1 selected Serial Communication FBA 198 ACH550 UH User s Manual p ERE Protocol Drive Parameter Value Description Reference 1002 EXT2 10 COMM Start Stop by controlled fieldbus with COMMANDS Ext2 selected 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Direction controlled by fieldbus Input Reference Select Using the fieldbus to provide input reference to the drive requires Drive parameter value set as defined below e Fieldbus controller supplied reference word s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent pisa Protocol Drive Parameter Value Description Reference 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 8 COMM Ref selected by fieldbus Required only if 2 references used 1103 REF1 SEL 8 COMM Input reference 1supplied by fieldbus 9 COMM A11 10 COMM A11 1106 REF2 SEL 8 COMM Input reference 1 supplied by fieldbus 9 COMM AI Required only if 2 references used 10 COMMFAI Note Multiple references are supported only when using the ABB Drives profile Scaling Where required REFERENCES can be scaled
249. level of Analog Output 2 0125 86 OK ALARM Indicates the current alarm state of the drive 1 ALARM 0 OK 87 OK MAINT Indicates the current maintenance state of the drive 1 MAINT O OK Maintenance triggers are configured in drive parameter Group 29 88 ALARM WORD1 This point is a bit field indicating active alarms in the drive 0308 89 ALARM WORD2 This point is a bit field indicating active alarms in the drive 0309 90 LAST FAULT This point is first in the drive s fault log and indicates the most 0401 recent fault declared 91 PREV FAULT 1 This point is second in the drive s fault log and indicates the 0412 previous fault declared 92 PREV FAULT 2 This point is last in the drive s fault log and indicates the 0413 oldest fault in the log 93 OK FAULT Indicates the current fault state of the drive 1 FAULT 0 OK Serial Communication EFB 192 ACH550 UH User s Manual FLN Detailed Point Descriptions Drive Point Description Parameter 94 RESET FAULT Command by FLN to reset a faulted drive 1 RESET 0 NO Parameter 1604 must be set to COMM for FLN to control this state The control input is rising edge sensitive so once the command is issued this point automatically returns to its inactive state This momentary operation avoids any need for an explicit command to clear the point before a subsequent reset can be issued 95 MBOX PARAM Sets the
250. ling of references When parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to COMM AI1 or COMM AI1 the reference is scaled as follows ABB Drives Profile FBA 100 0 5 Par 1105 100 0 5 par 1105 Value Reference Setting Al Reference Scaling REF1 COMM AI1 COMM Al 96 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus Reference Correction Coefficient 0 50 Alt Input Signal T gt 100 Serial Communication FBA 208 ACH550 UH User s Manual ABB Drives Profile FBA Value i Reference Setting Al Reference Scaling REF1 COMM AI COMM Al 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus Reference Correction Coefficient 200 7 l l l 100 l l Al1 Input Signal 100 0 5 par 1105 HP P 0 50 100 REF2 COMM AI1_ COMM Al 96 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus Reference Correction Coefficient 100 0 5 Par 1108 l l l 100 l l Al1 Input Signal 100 0 5 par 1108 HI p Npa 50 100 REF2 COMM AI1 COMM Al 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus Reference 4 Correction Coefficient 200 7 l l l 100 l l i Al1 Input Signal 0 lt Kb 0 50 100 Reference Handling Use group 10 parameters to configure for control of rotation direction for each control location EXT1 and EXT2 The following diagrams illustrate how group 10 parameters and the si
251. llowed on line e Range 1 247 5202 BAUDRATE 9 6 115 2 kbits s 9 6 kbits s Defines the communication speed of the drive in kbits per second kbits s 9 6 19 2 38 4 57 6 115 2 5203 PARITY 0 3 1 0 Sets the character format to be used with the panel communication 0 8N1 No parity one stop bit 1 8N2 No parity two stop bits 2 8E1 Even parity one stop bit 3 801 Odd parity one stop bit 5204 5205 OK MESSAGES 0 65535 1 Contains a count of valid Modbus messages received by the drive e During normal operation this counter is increasing constantly PARITY ERRORS 0 65535 1 Contains a count of the characters with a parity error that is received from the fieldbus For high counts check e Parity settings of devices connected on the fieldbus they must not differ e Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors 5206 FRAME ERRORS 0 65535 1 Contains a count of the characters with a framing error that the fieldbus receives For high counts check e Communication speed settings of devices connected on the fieldbus they must not differ e Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors 5207 BUFFER OVERRUNS 0 65535 1 Contains a count of the characters received that cannot be placed in the buffer e Longest possible message length for the drive is 128 bytes e Received messages exceeding 128
252. m Listing below to find and address the root cause of the problem Alarm Listing The following table lists the alarms by code number and describes each Alarm z paya Code Display Description 2001 Reserved 2002 2003 2004 DIR LOCK The change in direction being attempted is not allowed Either e Do not attempt to change the direction of motor rotation or e Change parameter 1003 DIRECTION to allow direction change if reverse operation is safe 2005 1 0 COMM Fieldbus communication has timed out Check for and correct e Fault setup 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Communication settings Group 51 or 53 as appropriate e Poor connections and or noise on line 2006 Al1 LOSS Analog input 1 is lost or value is less than the minimum setting Check e Input source and connections e Parameter that sets the minimum 3021 e Parameter that sets the Alarm Fault operation 3001 2007 Al2 LOSS Analog input 2 is lost or value is less than the minimum setting Check e Input source and connections e Parameter that sets the minimum 3022 e Parameter that sets the Alarm Fault operation 3001 Diagnostics ACH550 UH User s Manual 219 Alarm Dane Code Display Description 2008 PANEL LOSS Panel communication is lost and either Drive is in local control mode the control panel displays LOC or e Drive is in remote control mode REM and is par
253. mage prior to installation store and transport the drive according to the environmental requirements specified for storage and transportation See Ambient Conditions on page 244 Confirm that the enclosure is appropriate based on the site contamination level IP 21 UL type 1 enclosure The site must be free of airborne dust corrosive gases or liquids and conductive contaminants such as condensation carbon dust and metallic particles IP 54 UL type 12 enclosure This enclosure provides protection from airborne dust and light sprays or splashing water from all directions Suitable Mounting Location Confirm that the mounting location meets the following constraints The drive must be mounted vertically on a smooth solid surface and in a suitable environment as defined above The minimum space requirements for the drive are the outside dimensions see Outside Dimensions on page 243 plus air flow space around the unit see Cooling on page 240 The distance between the motor and the drive is limited by the maximum motor cable length See either Motor Connection Specifications on page 232 or EN61800 3 Compliant Motor Cables on page 235 The mounting site must support the drive s modest weight See Weight on page 242 Installing the Drive Warning Before installing the ACH550 ensure the input power supply to the drive is off Installation ACH550 UH User s Manual 11 Prepare the Mounting Locati
254. mal hysteresis 6 t LO gt HI Operating data supervision using relay outputs when 7 Hat EO HI a p STEE Value of Supervised Parameter Active Limit The lowest limit H 3203 is active initially and remains A active until the supervised parameter goes above the Lo 3202 4 highest limit Lo 3202 making that limit the active limit HI 3203 That limit remains active until the supervised parameter goes below the lowest limit HI 3203 making that limit m active Case A e Case A Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 A RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 OVER Or SUPRV2 Energized 1 4 i OVER Initially the relay is de energized It is energized 0 gt whenever the supervised parameter goes above the active limit Case B A e Case B Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 Energized 1 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 UNDER or SUPRV2 UNDER Initially the relay is energized It is de energized 0 whenever the supervised parameter goes below the Y active limit Note Case LO gt HI represents a special hysteresis with two separate supervision limits 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO Depends on selection 60 0 Hz Sets the low limit for the first supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI Depends on selection 60 0 Hz Sets the high limit for the first supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above 3204 SUPERV
255. matically when all parameters are saved 1 SAVE Saves altered parameters to permanent memory Start Up 78 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 16 System Controls Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1608 ISTART ENABLE 1 6 7 1 4 Selects the source of the start enable 1 signal Note Start enable functionality differs from the run enable functionality 0 NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external start enable signal 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the start enable 1 signal This digital input must be activated for start enable 1 signal If the voltage drops and de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and show alarm 2021 on panel display The drive will not start until start enable 1 signal resumes 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 1 signal See DI1 above 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start enable 1 signal Bit 2 of the Command word 2 parameter 0302 activates the start disable 1 signal See fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the start enable 1 signal 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 1 signal See DI1 INV above Drive Started START STOP COMMAND Par Group 10 START ENABLE SIGNAL Params 1608 amp 1609 Relay
256. mer4 3629 Timer 4 Src 3615 Time4 Daily Stp 3616 Time4 Weekly Str 3617 Time4 Weekly Stp Boost 3622 Boost Sel 3623 Boost Time A parameter can be connected to only one time l 1001 ext 1 commands Timer 1002 ext 2 commands 3626 Timer 1 Src 1102 ext 1 2 sel 1201 const speed sel 1401 relay output 1 1403 relay output 3 1410 relay output 4 1412 relay output 6 4027 pid param set 8126 timed autochange Timer2 3627 Timer 2 Src Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 111 Group 36 Timer Functions Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3601 TIMERS ENABLE 6 7 1 0 Selects the source for the timer enable signal 0 NOT SEL Timed functions are disabled 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the timed function enable signal e The digital input must be activated for timed functions enable 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the timed function enable signal 7 ENABLED Timed functions are enabled 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the timed function enable signal e This digital input must be de activated for timed function enable 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the timed function enable signal 3602 START TIME 1 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 12 00 00 Defines the daily start time e The time can be changed in steps of 2 seconds 20 30 00 e If p
257. meter 2503 2506 CRIT SPEED 3 LO 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 0 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 3 e See parameter 2502 2507 CRIT SPEED 3 HI 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 0 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 3 See parameter 2503 Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 93 Group 26 Motor Control This group provides controls for fine tuning the motor control Group 26 Motor Control Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2601 2602 FLUX OPTIMIZATION 0 1 1 1 Changes the magnitude of the flux depending on the actual load Flux Optimization can reduce the total energy consumption and noise and should be enabled for drives that usually operate below nominal load O OFF Disables the feature 1 ON Enables the feature FLUX BRAKING 0 1 1 0 Provides faster deceleration by raising the level of Braking magnetization in the motor when needed instead of limiting Torque Rated Motor Power the deceleration ramp By increasing the flux in the motor o Q 2 2 kw the energy of the mechanical system is changed to thermal 120 W O Flux Braking 2 15 kW energy in the motor 3 37 kW 0 OFF Disables the feature 80 1 ON Enables the feature 4 75 kW 2603 IR COMP VOLT 0 0 100 0 V Sets the IR compensation voltage used for 0 Hz Motor e Requires par
258. meter Sets and does not change if User Parameter Sets change Note You can use a relay output to supervise the selection of User Parameter Set 2 See parameter 1401 0 NOT SEL Defines the control panel using parameter 9902 as the only control for changing User Parameter Sets 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets e The drive loads User Parameter Set 1 on the falling edge of the digital input e The drive loads User Parameter Set 2 on the rising edge of the digital input e The User Parameter Set changes only when the drive is stopped 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets e See DI1 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets e The drive loads User Parameter Set 1 on the rising edge of the digital input e The drive loads User Parameter Set 2 on the falling edge of the digital input e The User Parameter Set changes only when the drive is stopped 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets e See DI1 INV above LOCAL LOCK 6 8 1 0 Defines control for the use of the HAND mode The HAND mode allows drive control from the control panel e When LOCAL LOCK is active the control panel cannot change to HAND mode 0 NOT SEL Disables the lock The control panel can select HAND and con
259. mmediate start from zero frequency 2 DC MAGN Selects the DC Magnetizing start mode Note The DC Magnetizing start mode cannot start a rotating motor Note The drive starts when the set pre magnetizing time param 2103 has passed even if motor magnetization is not complete VECTOR control modes Magnetizes the motor within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current The normal control is released exactly after the magnetizing time This selection guarantees the highest possible break away torque SCALAR SPEED mode Magnetizes the motor within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current The normal control is released exactly after the magnetizing time 3 SCALAR FLYSTART Selects the flying start mode VECTOR control modes Not applicable SCALAR control mode The drive will automatically selects the correct output frequency to start a rotating motor Useful if the motor is already rotating and the drive will start smoothly at the current frequency 4 TORQ BOOST Selects the automatic torque boost mode SCALAR SPEED mode only May be necessary in drives with high starting torque e Torque boost is only applied at start ending when output frequency exceeds 20 Hz or when output frequency is equal to reference In the beginning the motor magnetizes within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current e See parameter 2110 TORQ BOOST CUR
260. ms might also be caused by marginally loose connections wear on wires caused by equipment vibrations e insufficient grounding and shielding on both the devices and on the communication cables Modbus Protocol Technical Data Overview The Modbus protocol was introduced by Modicon Inc for use in control environments featuring Modicon programmable controllers Due to its ease of use and implementation this common PLC language was quickly adopted as a de facto standard for integration of a wide variety of master controllers and slave devices Modbus is a serial asynchronous protocol Transactions are half duplex featuring a single Master controlling one or more Slaves While RS232 can be used for point to point communication between a single Master and a single Slave a more common implementation features a multi drop RS485 network with a single Master controlling multiple Slaves The ACH550 features RS485 for its Modbus physical interface RTU The Modbus specification defines two distinct transmission modes ASCII and RTU The ACH550 supports RTU only Feature Summary The following Modbus function codes are supported by the ACH550 Function Code Hex Description Read Coil Status 0x01 Read discrete output status For the ACH550 the individual bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1 16 Relay outputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 e g RO1 Coil 33 Read D
261. n cee eee eee 197 control interface 194 control word aessa eee 194 control word ABB drives 203 diagnostics 0 ce eee eee 201 drive feedback 4 200 fieldbus control activate 197 fieldbus CPI firmware revision parameter 125 fieldbus parameter refresh parameter 125 fieldbus parameters 125 fieldbus status parameter 125 fieldbus type parameter 125 input ref sel activate 198 installation 196 OVEIVIOW anaana eee 193 parameter group 0 125 PID control setpoint source activate 200 planning a ma 2a ces ave te Aart ree diel es 195 protocol listing aaa 193 reference ec eee 195 relay output control activate 199 SOUP re Fe ke a Ge NG a DAG NY Pee te a 197 start stop control activate 197 state diagram ABB drives 206 status WOJ pa oroe aa aanas RAEES 195 status word ABB drives 204 conduit Kitt ab nG hina KG eno EE eset Ah SS 12 config file CPI firmware revision parameter 125 id revision parameter 125 revision parameter 125 config file faultcode 215 connections EFB comm 200000e eee 145 FBA module 00000005 196 constant speed see speed constant construction code eee eee eee 9
262. n off delays are ignored when relay output 1401 is set to Control event PFA Relay status ait ale Ca m 1404 ON DELAY 1405 OFF DELAY 1405 RO1 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s Defines the switch off delay for relay 1 On off delays are ignored when relay output 1401 is set to PFA 1406 RO 2 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s Defines the switch on delay for relay 2 e See RO 1 ON DELAY Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 73 Group 14 Relay Outputs Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1407 RO 2 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s Defines the switch off delay for relay 2 e See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1408 RO3 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s Defines the switch on delay for relay 3 e See RO 1 ON DELAY 1409 RO3 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s Switch off delay for relay 3 e See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 6 0 45 1 0 1412 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 4 6 what relay output 4 6 means e See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1413 RO4 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s Defines the switch on delay for relay 4 e See RO 1 ON DELAY 1414 RO 4 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s Defines the switch off delay for relay 4 e See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1415 RO5 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s Defines the switch on delay for relay 5 e See RO 1 ON DELAY 1416 RO5 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s Defines the switch off delay for relay 5
263. nce 2 The minimum analog input signal in volts or amps corresponds to REF2 MIN in Parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 or 1304 MINIMUM Al2 sets the minimum analog input signal This parameter sets the minimum frequency reference The value is a percentage of the maximum frequency or speed maximum process reference nominal torque 1108 REF2 MAX 0 0 100 096 0 1 100 0 torque 0 600 Sets the maximum for external reference 2 The maximum analog input signal in volts or amps corresponds to REF2 MAX in e Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 or 1305 MAXIMUM Al2 sets the maximum analog input signal This parameter sets the maximum frequency reference The value is a percentage of the maximum frequency or speed maximum process reference nominal torque Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 67 Group 12 Constant Speeds This group defines a set of constant speeds In general e You can program up to 7 constant speeds ranging from 0 500 Hz or 0 30000 rpm e Values must be positive No negative speed values for constant speeds e Constant speed selections are ignored if the torque control is active or the process PID reference is followed or the drive is in local control mode or PFA Pump and Fan Alternation is active Note Parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7 acts also as a so called fault speed which may be activated if the control signal is lost Refer to parameter 3001 AI lt
264. nce is scaled as follows ABB Drives Profile 100 0 5 Par 1105 1 100 0 5 par 1105 Value Reference Setting Al Reference Scaling REF1 COMM AI COMM Al Yo 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus Reference Correction Coefficient 0 Al1 Input Signal 50 100 Serial Communication EFB ACH550 UH User s Manual 169 ABB Drives Profile Value Reference Setting Al Reference Scaling REF 1 COMM AI1 COMM Al 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus Reference Correction Coefficient 200 1 l l l 100 I l Al1 Input Signal 100 0 5 par 1105 96 gt l p 096 50 100 REF2 COMM AI1 COMM Al 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus Reference Correction Coefficient 100 0 5 Par 1108 7 7 7 7 rrr l l l 100 7 l l Al1 Input Signal 100 0 5 par 1108 gt P Npa 50 100 REF2 COMM AI1 COMM Al 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus Reference A Correction Coefficient 200 1 l l i 100 a l Al1 Input Signal 0 0 50 100 Reference Handling Use group 10 parameters to configure for control of rotation direction for each control location EXT1 and EXT2 The following diagrams illustrate how group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce REFERENCE values REF1 Serial Communication EFB 170 AC
265. nding See Ground Connections in Input Power Connections above For CE compliant installations and installations where EMC emissions must be minimized see Effective Motor Cable Screens below Drive s Motor Connection Terminals The drive s motor and input power terminals have the same specifications See Drive s Power Connection Terminals above Motor Cable Requirements for CE amp C Tick Compliance The requirements in this section apply for CE or C Tick compliance Minimum Requirement CE 8 C Tick The motor cable must be a symmetrical three conductor cable with a concentric PE conductor or a four conductor cable with a concentric shield however a symmetrical constructed PE conductor is always recommended The following figure shows the minimum requirement for the motor cable screen for example MCMK NK Cables Insulation Jacket Copper Wire Screen Helix of Copper Tape Inner Insulation D able Core Input filters designed for ACH550 cannot be used in an isolated or high impedance earthed industrial distribution network Technical Data ACH550 UH User s Manual 235 Recommendation for Conductor Layout The following figure compares conductor layout features in motor cables Recommended CE 8 C Tick Allowed CE 8 C Tick Symmetrical shielded cable three phase A separate PE conductor is required if the conductors and a concentric or otherwise conductivity of the cable shield is lt 50 of
266. not be addressed Every time there is a read or write to one particular station the value for 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS or 5308 EFB UART ERRORS advances To correct Verify the station numbers of all stations Change conflicting station numbers Swapped Wires If the communication wires are swapped terminal A on one drive is connected to terminal B on another e The value of 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES does not advance The values of 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS and 5308 EFB UART ERRORS are advancing To correct Check that the RS 485 lines are not swapped Fault 28 Serial 1 Err If the drive s control panel shows fault code 28 SERIAL 1 ERR check for either of the following The master system is down To correct resolve problem with master system The communication connection is bad To correct check communication connection at the drive The time out selection for the drive is too short for the given installation The master is not polling the drive within the specified time out delay To correct increase the time set by parameter 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Serial Communication EFB ACH550 UH User s Manual Faults 31 33 EFB1 EFB3 The three EFB fault codes listed for the drive in Diagnostics starting on page 212 fault codes 31 33 are not used Intermittent Off line Occurrences 155 The problems described above are the most common problems encountered with ACH550 serial communication Intermittent proble
267. ns terminal Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 143 Serial Communication EFB Overview The ACH550 can be set up to accept control from an external system using standard serial communication protocols When using serial communication the ACH550 can either Receive all of its control information from the fieldbus or Be controlled from some combination of fieldbus control and other available control locations such as digital or analog inputs and the control panel Fieldbus Controller Fieldbus Other Devices Connect using either H Standard EFB embedded fieldbus at _ terminals X1 28 32 AA FBA fieldbus adapter module mounted in slot 2 option Rxxx TST Two basic serial communications configurations are available EFB embedded fieldbus Using the RS485 interface at terminals X1 28 32 on the control board a control system can communicate through the drive s standard EFB using one of the following protocols For protocol descriptions see Modbus Protocol Technical Data ABB Drives Profile Technical Data etc starting on page 155 Modbus Metasys N2 APOGEE FLN BACnet Not available at the time of printing e FBA fieldbus adapter See Serial Communication FBA on page 193 Serial Communication EFB 144 Control In
268. nstant speed 1 is activated using digital input 3 DI3 the reference speed is the value of parameter 1202 The value remains as the reference speed when digital input 3 is deactivated X1 7T SCR Signal cable shield screen AA GA A 2 All Not configured 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 110V Reference voltage 10 VDC 5 Al2 Not configured 6 AGND Analog input circuit common J1 Jumper Settings 7 AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA Sp Alt 0 2 10V na 8 AO2 Output current 0 4 20 mA o l w Baunen _ Al2 0 4 20 mA m9 AGND Analog output circuit common 2b 4 m 024V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 111 GND Common for DI return signals L M12 DCOM1 Digital input common for all LU 143 D1 Start Stop Activate to start drive LU 14 DI2 Run permissive Deactivate to stop drive P 1601 bo 45 DI3 Constant Preset speed 1 P 1202 LU 1M6 DI4 Safety interlock 1 Deactivate to stop drive P 1608 LU 17 D15 Reference up Activate to increase reference 18 DI6 Reference down Activate to decrease reference 19 RO1C Relay output 1 P 1401 20 RO1A Default operation Started gt 19 connected to 21 21 RO1B f 22 RO2C f Relay output 2 P 1402 23 RO2A Fx Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 24 RO2B M 25 RO3C Relay output 3 P 1403 26 RO3A Default operation
269. nt conductors at 8 000 Hz Motor cable signals are pulses at up to 8 000 Hz and the common mode frequency can reach 48 000 Hz 8k Hz x 3 phases x 2 pulse edges Alternate paths Where multiple paths exist the most conductive path draws the most current So the ground wiring must be a significantly better path in order to reduce the current in the alternate paths the paths through parasitic capacitors The high frequencies associated with motor cables also increase the potential for electromagnetic noise radiation See Motor Cable Requirements for CE amp C Tick Compliance below Motor Cable Shielding Motor cables require shielding using conduit armored cable or power shield cable Conduit When using conduit Bridge joints with a ground conductor bonded to the conduit on each side of the joint Bond conduit run to the drive enclosure Use a separate conduit run for motor cables also separate input power and control cables Use a separate conduit run for each drive Armored Cable When using armored cable Use six conductor 3 phases and 3 grounds type MC continuous corrugated aluminum armor cable with symmetrical grounds Armored motor cable can share a cable tray with input power cables but not with control cables Technical Data 234 ACH550 UH User s Manual e Power Shield Cable For power shield cable details see Motor Cable Requirements for CE amp C Tick Compliance below Grou
270. nt of the full analog signal range See example below e The minimum analog input signal corresponds to 1104 REF1 MIN or 1107 REF2 MIN e MINIMUM Al cannot be greater than MAXIMUM Al e These parameters reference and analog min and max settings provide scale and offset adjustment for the reference e See figure at parameter 1104 Example To set the minimum analog input value to 4 mA e Configure the analog input for 0 20 mA current signal e Calculate the minimum 4 mA as a percent of full range 20 mA 4 mA 20 mA 100 20 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 0 0 100 0 0 1 100 0 Defines the maximum value of the analog input e Define value as a percent of the full analog signal range e The maximum analog input signal corresponds to 1105 REF1 MAX or 1108 REF2 MAX e See figure at parameter 1104 1303 FILTER Al1 0 0 10 0s 0 1s 0 1s Defines the filter time constant for analog input 1 A11 A Unfiltered signal The filtered signal reaches 63 of a step change within the time specified 100 Oo re Filtered signal t Time constant 1304 MINIMUM Al2 0 0 100 0 0 1 20 0 Defines the minimum value of the analog input e See MINIMUM Al1 above 1305 MAXIMUM Al2 0 0 100 0 0 1 100 0 Defines the maximum value of the analog input e See MAXIMUM Alt above 1306 FILTER Al2 0 0 10 0s 0 1s 0 1s Defines the filter time constant for analog input 2 A12 e See FILTER Al1 above Start Up ACH550 UH User s
271. ntact ABB if capacitor failure is suspected Replacements for frame size R5 and R6 are available from ABB Do not use other than ABB specified spare parts Maintenance 224 ACH550 UH User s Manual Control Panel Cleaning Use a soft damp cloth to clean the control panel Avoid harsh cleaners which could scratch the display window Battery A battery is only used in Assistant control panels that have the clock function available and enabled The battery keeps the clock operating in memory during power interruptions The expected life for the battery is greater than ten years To remove the battery use a coin to rotate the battery holder on the back of the control panel Replace the battery with type CR2032 Maintenance ACH550 UH User s Manual Technical Data Ratings 225 By type code the table below provides ratings for the ACH550 adjustable speed AC drive including IEC ratings NEMA ratings shaded columns Frame size Ratings 380 480 Volt Drives Abbreviated column headers are described in Symbols on page 226 Type Code Valid up to 40 C 104 F ACH550 UH see lon Pry Py Frame Size below A kW HP Three phase supply voltage 380 480 V 03A3 4 3 3 1 1 1 5 R1 04A1 4 4 1 1 5 2 R1 06A9 4 6 9 3 3 R1 08A8 4 8 8 4 5 R1 012A 4 11 9 5 5 7 5 R1 015A 4 15 4 7 5 10 R2 023A 4 23 11 15 R2 031A 4 31 15 20 R3 038A 4 38 18 5 25 R3 044A 4 44 22 30 R4
272. ntrol 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 0 336 0 h 0 1 h 0 0 y Controls operation of the Autochange function and sets the interval between changes The Autochange time interval only applies to the time when the speed regulated motor is running e See parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL for an overview of the Autochange function The drive always coasts to a stop when autochange is performed e Autochange enabled requires parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS value gt 0 0 0 NOT SEL Disables the Autochange function 0 1 336 The operating time interval the time when the start signal is on between automatic motor changes Warning When enabled the Autochange function requires the interlocks 8120 interlocks value gt 0 enabled During autochange the drive s power output is interrupted and the drive coasts to stop preventing damage to the contacts Relay Logic ACS550 mura PFA with Autochange mode 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL 0 0 100 0 0 1 50 0 Sets an upper limit as a percent of output capacity for the autochange logic When the output from the PID PFA control block exceeds this limit autochange is prevented For example use this parameter to deny autochange when the Pump Fan system is operating near maximum capacity Autochange Overview The purpose of the autochange operation is to equalize duty time between multiple motors used in a system At each autochange operation e A different
273. om serial link 0136 COMM VALUE 2 32768 32767 0 Free data location that can be written from serial link 0137 PROCESS VAR 1 Process variable 1 Defined by parameters in Group 34 Panel Display Process Variables 0138 PROCESS VAR 2 Process variable 2 Defined by parameters in Group 34 Panel Display Process Variables 0139 PROCESS VAR 3 Process variable 3 Defined by parameters in Group 34 Panel Display Process Variables 0140 RUN TIME 0 499 99 kh 0 kh The drive s accumulated running time in thousands of hours kh 0141 MWH COUNTER 0 9999 MWh The drive s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours Can not be reset 0142 REVOLUTION CNTR 0 9999 0 The motor s accumulated revolutions in millions of revolutions 0143 DRIVE ON TIME HI 0 65535 days 0 The drive s accumulated power on time in days 0144 DRIVE ON TIME LO 0 43200hh mm ss 0 The drive s accumulated power on time in 2 second ticks 30 ticks 60 seconds 0145 MOTOR TEMP 10 200 C 0 ane Ohm Motor temperature in degrees centigrade PTC resistance in Ohms e Applies only if motor temperature sensor is set up See parameter 3501 Start Up 56 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 03 Actual Signals This group monitors fieldbus communications Group 03 Actual Signals Code Description Range Resolution Default S 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 Read only copy of the Fieldbus Command Word 1 The fie
274. on Remove Front Cover IP 21 UL Type 1 1 2 3 IP 54 UL Type 12 1 Mark the position of the mounting holes 1 If hood is present Slide hood up and off of the The ACH550 should only be mounted where all of the requirements defined in Preparing for Installation on page 8 are met Drill holes of appropriate size x0002 Note Frame sizes R3 and R4 have four holes along the top Use only two If possible use the two outside holes to allow room to remove the fan for maintenance Note ACH400 drives can be replaced using the original mounting holes For R1 and R2 frame sizes the mounting holes are identical For R3 and R4 frame sizes the inside mounting holes on the top of ACH550 drives match ACH400 mounts Remove the control panel if attached Loosen the captive screw at the top Pull near the top to remove the cover IP2000 If hood is present Remove screws 2 holding the hood in place 7 COVET T Loosen the captive screws around the edge of the cover Remove the cover N A FM Installation 12 Mount the Drive IP 21 UL Type 1 1 ACH550 UH User s Manual Position the ACH550 onto the mounting screws or bolts and securely tighten in all four corners Note Lift the ACH550 by its metal chassis Non English speaking locations Add a w
275. ond PFA Relay DI5 Third PFA Relay DI6 Third PFA Relay DI6 Free 4 Not allowed DI1 DI2 Free DI3 First PFA Relay DI4 Second PFA Relay DI5 Third PFA Relay DI6 Fourth PFA Relay 5 6 Not allowed Not allowed INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled 4 D14 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with D14 to the interlock signal for each PFA relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on e The number of PFA relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFA The Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG No PFA Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled Relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 DI3 Free Not allowed DI4 Speed Reg Motor DI5 DI6 Free DI1 DI3 Free DI4 Speed Reg Motor DI5 First PFA Relay DI6 Free DI1 DI3 Free D14 First PFA Relay DI5 DI6 Free 2 DI1 DI3 Free DI1 DI3 Free DI4 Speed Reg Motor D14 First PFA Relay DI5 First PFA Relay DI5 Second PFA Relay DI6 Second PFA Relay DI6 Free 3 Not allowed DI1 DI3 Free D14 First PFA Relay DI5 Second PFA Relay DI6 Third PFA Relay 4 6 Not allowed Not allowed Default S Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 139 Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S 5 DI5 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with DI5 to the interlock signal for
276. onnector Mounting Procedure Note Install the input power and motor cables first 1 Insert the module carefully into the drive expansion slot 2 until the retaining clips lock the module into position 2 Fasten the two screws included to the stand offs Note Correct installation of the screws is essential for fulfilling the EMC requirements and for proper operation of the module 7 X00301 YI AAHH 3 Open the appropriate knockout in the conduit box and install the cable clamp for the network cable 4 Route the network cable through the cable clamp emman 5 Connect the network cable to the module s network connector 6 Tighten the cable clamp 7 Install the conduit box cover 1 screw 8 For configuration information see the following X00302 e Communication Set up FBA below e Activate Drive Control Functions FBA on page 197 e The protocol specific documentation provided with the module Serial Communication FBA ACH550 UH User s Manual 197 Communication Set up FBA Serial Communication Selection To activate the serial communication use parameter 9802 COMM PROTOCOL SEL Set 9802 4 EXT FBA Serial Communication Configuration Setting 9802 together with mounting a particular FBA module automatically sets the appropriate default values in parameters that define the communication process These parameters and descriptions are defined in the user s manual supplied wit
277. or 1 hour and 30 minutes after activation DI is released Boost active I Activation DI lt lt Boost time Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 113 Group 36 Timer Functions Code Description Range Resolution Default 3626 TIMER 1 SRC 0 31 1 0 Collects all wanted timers to a timer function 0 NOT SEL No timers have been selected 1 P1 Time Period 1 selected in the timer 2 P2 Time Period 2 selected in the timer 3 P2 P1 Time Periods 1 and 2 selected in the timer 4 P3 Time Period 3 selected in the timer 5 P3 P1 Time Periods 1 and 3 selected in the timer 6 P3 P2 Time Periods 2 and 3 selected in the timer 7 P3 P2 P1 Time Periods 1 2 and 3 selected in the timer 8 P4 Time Period 4 selected in the timer 9 P4 P1 Time Periods 4 and 1 selected in the timer 10 P4 P2 Time Periods 4 and 2 selected in the timer 11 P4 P2 P1 Time Periods 4 2 and 1 selected in the timer 12 P4 P3 Time Periods 4 and 3 selected in the timer 13 P4 P3 P1 Time Periods 4 3 and 1 selected in the timer 14 P4 P3 P2 Time Periods 4 3 and 2 selected in the timer 15 P4 P3 P2 P1 Time Periods 4 3 2 and 1 selected in the timer 16 BOOST B Boost selected in the timer 17 B P1 Boost and Time Period 1 selected in the timer 18 B P2 Boost and Time P
278. or enabling external PID control Activating the start command drive is running enables external PID control 8 ON Defines the power on as the control for enabling external PID control e Activating power to the drive enables external PID control 9 12 TIMER 1 4 Defines the Timer as the control for enabling external PID control Timer active enables external PID control e See parameter Group 36 Timer Functions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for enabling external PID control e Activating the digital input disables external PID control e De activating the digital input enables external PID control 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for enabling external PID control e See DI1 INV above 4229 OFFSET 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 Defines the offset for the PID output e When PID is activated output starts from this value e When PID is deactivated output resets to this value e Parameter is not active when 4230 TRIM MODE not 0 trim mode is active 4230 TRIM MODE 0 2 1 0 Selects the type of trim if any Using the trim it is possible to combine a corrective factor to the drive reference 0 NOT SEL Disables the trim function 1 PROPORTIONAL Adds a trim factor that is proportional to the rom Hz reference 2 DIRECT Adds a trim factor based on the control loop s maximum limit 4231 TRIM SCALE 100 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 Defines t
279. or stops if e Three auxiliary motors are running e ACH550 output frequency drops below the limit 8114 1 e Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8114 1 Hz for at least the time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 8115 AUX MOT START D 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 1s 5 0 s Sets the Start Delay for the auxiliary motors e The output frequency must remain above the start frequency limit parameter 8109 8110 or 8111 for this time period before the auxiliary motor starts e See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 1s 3 0s Sets the Stop Delay for the auxiliary motors The output frequency must remain below the low frequency limit parameter 8112 8113 or 8114 for this time period before the auxiliary motor stops e See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 133 Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S 8117 NR OF AUX MOT 0 3 1 1 v Sets the number of auxiliary motors Each auxiliary motor requires a relay output which the drive uses to send start stop signals e The Autochange function if used requires an additional relay output for the speed regulated motor The following describes the set up of the required relay outputs Relay Outputs As noted above each auxiliary motor requires a relay output which the drive uses to send start stop s
280. otor current A at the time the last fault occurred 0408 TORQUE AT FLT 0 1 0 0 The motor torque at the time the last fault occurred 0409 STATUS AT FLT 1 0000 hex The drive status hex code word at the time the last fault occurred 0410 DI1 3 AT FLT 000 111 1 000 bin 0 7 decimal The status of digital inputs 1 3 at the time the last fault occurred 0411 DI4 6 AT FLT 000 111 1 000 bin 0 7 decimal The status of digital inputs 4 6 at the time the last fault occurred 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 Fault code text 1 0 Fault code of the second last fault Read only 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 Fault code text 1 0 Fault code of the third last fault Read only Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 61 Group 10 Start Stop Dir This group Defines external sources EXT1 and EXT2 for commands that enable start stop and direction changes e Locks direction or enables direction control To select between the two external locations use the next group parameter 1102 Group 10 AcStart Stop Dir Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 0 14 1 1 v Defines external control location 1 ExT1 the configuration of start stop and direction commands 0 NOT SEL No external start stop and direction command source 1 DI1 Two wire Start Stop e Start Stop is through digital input DI1 DI1 activated Start DI1 de activated Stop e Parameter 1003 defines
281. parameter to be used by the mailbox function 96 MBOX DATA Sets or indicates the data value of the mailbox function 97 MBOX READ Command by FLN to read the parameter value specified by Point 95 MBOX PARAM The parameter value is returned in Point 96 MBOX DATA The control input is rising edge sensitive so once the command is issued this point automatically returns to its inactive state This momentary operation avoids any need for an explicit command to clear the point before a subsequent reset can be issued 98 MBOX WRITE Command by FLN to write the data value specified by Point 96 MBOX DATA to the parameter value specified by Point 95 MBOX PARAM The control input is rising edge sensitive so once the command is issued this point automatically returns to its inactive state This momentary operation avoids any need for an explicit command to clear the point before a subsequent reset can be issued 99 ERROR STATUS 1 of the 5 mandatory FLN points required for compatibility None with Siemens control systems It has no functionality in the drive application BACnet Technical Data Not defined at publication Serial Communication EFB ACH550 UH User s Manual 193 Serial Communication FBA Overview The ACH550 can be set up to accept control from an external system using standard serial communication protocols When using serial communication the ACH550 can e
282. pecially if voltage gt 48 V Relay controlled signals using less than 48 V can be run in the same cables as digital input signals Note Never mix 24 VDC and 115 230 VAC signals in the same cable Technical Data 238 ACH550 UH User s Manual Analog Cables Recommendations for analog signal runs e Use double shielded twisted pair cable e Use one individually shielded pair for each signal Do not use a common return for different analog signals Digital Cables Recommendations for digital signal runs e A double shielded cable is the best alternative but single shielded twisted multi pair cable is also usable Control Panel Cable If the control panel is connected to the drive with a cable use only Category 5 Patch ethernet cable Drive s Control Connection Terminals The following table provides specifications for the drive s control terminals Control Frame Size Maximum Wire Size Torque mm AWG Nm lb ft All 1 5 16 0 4 0 3 Control Terminal Descriptions The following full page diagram provides a general description of the control terminals on the drive For specific application details see the Application Macros on page 35 Note Terminals 3 6 and 9 are at the same potential Note For safety reasons the fault relay signals a fault when the ACH550 is powered down Technical Data ACH550 UH User s Manual 239
283. perature rises over the PTC reference temperature T ef as does the voltage over 1330 the resistor The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input Al1 and converts it into ohms e The figure shows typical PTC sensor resistance values as a function of the motor operating temperature 330 Temperature Resistance 100 Normal 0 1 5 kohm Excessive 5 4 kohm Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 109 Group 35 Motor Temp Meas Code Description Range Resolution Default S 5 THERMISTOR 0 Sensor configuration uses a thermistor Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input Connect either a PTC sensor or a normally closed thermistor relay to a digital input The drive reads the digital input states as shown in the above table e When the digital input is 0 the motor is overheated e See the figures in the introduction to this Group 6 THERMISTOR 1 Sensor configuration uses a thermistor e Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input Connect a normally open thermistor relay to a digital input The drive reads the digital input states as shown in the above table e When the digital input is 1 the motor is overheated See the figures in the introduction to this Group 3502 INPUT SELECTION 1 8 1 1 Defines the input used for the temperature sensor 1 Al1 PT100 and PTC 2 Al2 PT100 and PTC 3
284. plications where fan speed is controlled according to signals received from a transducer When using direct speed reference in AUTO mode or process PID see General Considerations on page 35 X1 1 TSCR Signal cable shield screen Q 42 Alt External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC K 3 5 Al2 PID feedback 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common J1 Jumper Settings Ar 7 AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA Sp Al 0 2 10V 9 8 AO2 Output current 0 4 20 mA o I Al2 0 4 20 mA 9 AGND Analog output circuit common 2p 0 4 bani 024V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC l11 GND Common for DI return signals pu DCOM1 Digital input common for all DI1 Start Stop Activate to start drive DI2 Run permissive Deactivate to stop drive P 1601 DI3 Constant Preset speed 1 P 1202 DI4 Safety interlock 1 Deactivate to stop drive P 1608 DI5 Safety interlock 2 Deactivate to stop drive P 1609 SEA pA E AA a a NI D A BY CO PO DI6 Not configured 19 RO1C Relay output 1 P 1401 20 RO1A x Default operation Ready gt 19 connected to 21 21 RO1B f 22 RO2C Relay output 2 P 1402 23 RO2A fx Default operation
285. put 5 controlled by fieldbus 1412 RELAY OUTPUT 6 Relay Output 6 controlled by fieldbus 1 More than 3 relays requires the addition of a relay extension module Note Relay status feedback occurs without configuration as defined below Drive Parameter Value Protocol Reference 0122 RO 1 3 STATUS Relay 1 3 status 0123 RO 4 6 STATUS Relay 4 6 status Analog Output Control Using the fieldbus for analog output control e g PID setpoint requires Drive parameter values set as defined below Fieldbus controller supplied analog value s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent ERE Protocol Drive Parameter Value Description Reference 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 135 COMM VALUE 1 Analog Output 1 controlled by AY 7 writing to parameter 0135 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN Set appropriate Used for scaling nek Pa values 1505 MAXIMUM A01 1506 FILTER A01 Filter time constant for A01 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 136 COMM VALUE 2 Analog Output 2 controlled by 156 dana 7 writing to parameter 0136 1508 AO2 CONTENT MIN Set appropriate Used for scaling pa IA values 1511 MAXIMUM A02 1512 FILTER AO2 Filter time constant for A02 Serial Communication FBA 200 ACH550 UH User s Manual PID Control Setpoint Source
286. r 1003 3 REQUEST Start Up 62 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 10 AcStart Stop Dir Code Description Range Resolution Default S 10 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start stop and direction commands Bits 0 1 2 of Command Word 1 parameter 0301 activates the start stop and direction commands e See Fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 11 TIMER 1 Assigns Start Stop control to Timer 1 Timer activated START Timer de activated STOP See Group 36 Timer Functions 12 14 TIMER 2 4 Assigns Start Stop control to Timer 2 4 See Timer Function 1 above 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 0 14 1 1 v Defines external control location 2 EXT2 the configuration of start stop and direction commands See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS above 1003 DIRECTION 1 3 1 1 v Defines the control of motor rotation direction 1 FORWARD Rotation is fixed in the forward direction 2 REVERSE Rotation is fixed in the reverse direction 3 REQUEST Rotation direction can be changed on command Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 63 Group 11 Reference Select This group defines How the drive selects between command sources e Characteristics and sources for REF1 and REF2
287. rame Sizes R5 R6 differ See next page EM3 GND X0003 Terminals Not Used A Warning For floating ungrounded networks remove screws at EM1 and EM3 Installation ACH550 UH User s Manual 15 R5 R6 CI 1 Nissan SB 5 i lil E 4 Ki LOT F2 kai CH cS oaWoe F1 oS Csr erat Fe l f p o o Naga BG H lil l I W omm III PE GND TOO Power Input Power Output to Motor U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 F1 0o00 Filter Connection 1 Terminals Not Used Terminals Not Used ima E o X0013 Power Input Power Output to Motor U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 A Warning For floating ungrounded networks remove screws at F1 and F2 Installation 16 ACH550 UH User s Manual Wiring IP 21 UL Type 1 Enclosure 1 3 Install conduit box 6 Strip wires 10 11 12 13 Open the appropriate knockouts in the conduit box See Conduit Kit above Install thin wall condu
288. rameter 116 derivation filter parameter 116 derivation time parameter 116 deviation data parameter 55 error feedback inversion parameter 116 external source activate parameter 123 external trimming parameter group 123 feedback multiplier parameter 119 feedback select parameter 118 feedback data parameter 54 gain parameter 2 05 115 integration time parameter 116 internal setpoint parameter 118 offset parameter 2 123 output data parameter 54 parameter set select parameter 121 process sets parameter groups 114 scaling 0 100 parameters 117 setpoint maximum parameter 118 setpoint minimum parameter 118 setpoint select parameter 117 setpoint source EFB comm activate 150 setpoint source FBA comm activate 200 setpoint data parameter 54 sleep delay parameter 120 sleep level parameter 120 sleep selection parameter 120 trim mode parameter 123 trim scale parameter 123 units actual signal parameter 116 wake up delay parameter 121 wake up deviation parameter 121 PID controller advanced set
289. rcentage of parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 2107 DC BRAKE TIME 0 250 s 0 1s Os Defines the DC brake time after modulation has stopped if parameter 2104 is 2 DC BRAKING Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 87 Group 21 Start Stop Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2108 2109 START INHIBIT 0 1 1 0 v Sets the Start inhibit function on or off The Start inhibit function ignores a pending start command in any of the following situations a new start command is required e A fault is reset e Run Enable parameter 1601 activates while start command is active e Mode changes from local to remote Mode changes from remote to local Control switches from EXT1 to ExT2 Control switches from EXT2 to EXT1 0 OFF Disables the Start inhibit function 1 ON Enables the Start inhibit function EM STOP SEL 6 6 1 0 Defines control of the Emergency stop command When activated e Emergency stop decelerates the motor using the emergency stop ramp parameter 2208 EM DEC TIME e Requires an external stop command and removal of the emergency stop command before drive can restart O NOT SEL Disables the Emergency stop function through digital inputs 1 DI1 Defines digital input D11 as the control for Emergency stop command e Activating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command e De activating the digital input removes the Emergency stop command 2 6 DI2 DI6
290. rds can be landfilled The DC capacitors contain electrolyte and the printed circuit boards contain lead both of which will be classified as hazardous waste within the EU They must be removed and handled according to local regulations For further information on environmental aspects and more detailed recycling instructions please contact your local ABB distributor Disposal Applicable Standards The drive complies with the following standards The compliance with the European Low Voltage Directive is verified according to standards EN 50178 and EN 60204 1 Applicable Standards EN 50178 1997 Electronic equipment for use in power installations EN 60204 1 1997 Safety of machinery Electrical equipment of machines Part 1 General requirements Provisions for compliance The final assembler of the machine is responsible for installing e An emergency stop device e A supply disconnecting device EN 60529 1991 IEC 529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures IP code IEC 60664 1 1992 EN 61800 3 1996 EMC product standard including specific test methods Amendment A11 2000 UL 508C UL Standard for Safety Power Conversion Equipment second edition Technical Data 246 ACH550 UH User s Manual Compliance is valid with the following provisions The motor and control cables are chosen as specified in this manual e The installation rules of this manual are followed
291. requirements in Motor Cable Requirements for CE amp C Tick Compliance on page 234 For example Properly ground the wire screen cable shields Keep individual un screened wires between the cable clamps and the screw terminals as short as possible Route control cables away from power cables Installation 14 ACH550 UH User s Manual Connection Diagrams The layout of connection terminals is similar for all frame sizes R1 R6 The only significant layout difference is in the power and ground terminals for frame sizes R5 and R6 The following diagrams show e Terminal layout for frame size R3 which in general applies to all frame sizes except as noted above Power and ground terminal layout for frame sizes R5 and R6 R1 R4 Diagram shows the R3 frame J1 DIP Switches for Analog Inputs J1 Q Alt in Voltage Position Q J gt Al2 in Current Position Panel Connector NO o OK a X1 Analog Inputs and Outputs o lt CJ o g and 10 V Ref Voltage Output x gy Power LED Green C Fault LED Red X1 Digital Inputs and 24 V Aux Voltage Output 1 X1 Relay Outputs 5 il J2 DIP Switches eee 1 Optional Module 1 for RS485 Termination zx A A X1 Communications ue J2 i F RS485 A SLOT 2 A ON ON Optional Module 2 off position on position E Power Input cj Power Output to Motor U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 F
292. resets the fault DC OVERVOLT after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation 3106 AR UNDERVOLTAGE 0 1 1 1 Sets the automatic reset for the undervoltage function on or off 0 DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset e Automatically resets the fault DC UNDERVOLTAGE after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation 3107 AR Al lt MIN 0 1 1 1 Sets the automatic reset for the analog input less than minimum value function on or off 0 DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset e Automatically resets the fault Al lt MIN after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation Warning When the analog input signal is restored the drive may restart even after a long stop Make sure that automatic long delayed starts will not cause physical injury and or damage equipment 3108 AR EXTERNAL FLT 0 1 1 1 Sets the automatic reset for external faults function on or off 0 DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset e Automatically resets the fault EXTERNAL FAULT 1 Or EXTERNAL FAULT 2 after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 101 Group 32 Supervision This group defines supervision for up to three signals from Group 01 Operating Data
293. rive motor or motor cable This fault logic e Is NOT a personal safety or fire protection feature e Can be set to trigger only a warning using parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT e Could be tripped by leakage currents input power to ground associated with the use of an optional RFI EMC filter Technical Data ACH550 UH User s Manual 233 Grounding and Routing Background Motor cables require extra care in grounding and routing The reasons have to do with the following factors Parasitic capacitance Capacitors are essentially conductors that don t touch but are in close proximity to each other So for example there is a weak capacitive connection between cables and any conductors they are near Such unintentional but inevitable conductive paths are called parasitic capacitors Currents flowing through these paths often create problems For example current leaks to control cables can create noise interference leaks to the motor can damage bearings and leaks to the drive or other electronic cabinets can damage components Proximity As the conductors get closer together capacitance increases Proximal area As the area in close proximity increases the capacitance increases e g close parallel paths increase parasitic capacitance between conductors AC frequency For a given capacitance increased AC frequency increases current conductance Hence capacitive paths that are negligible at 50 60 Hz can be very significa
294. roller compensates for inertia during acceleration 2303 DERIVATION TIME describes the principle of derivative action Rule of thumb Set this parameter between 50 and 100 of the sum of the mechanical time constants for the motor and the driven machine The figure shows the speed responses when a high inertia load is accelerated along a ramp No Acceleration Compensation 4 4 Acceleration Compensation Speed reference Actual speed t t gt 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN 0 1 1 0 Starts automatic tuning of the speed controller 0 OFF Disables the Autotune creation process Does not disable the operation of Autotune settings 1 ON Activates speed controller autotuning Automatically reverts to OFF Procedure Note The motor load must be connected Run the motor at a constant speed of 20 to 40 of the rated speed Change the autotuning parameter 2305 to ON The drive e Accelerates the motor e Calculates values for proportional gain and integration time e Changes parameters 2301 and 2302 to these values e Resets 2305 to OFF Start Up 92 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 25 Critical Speeds This group defines up to three critical speeds or ranges of speeds that are to be avoided due for example to mechanical resonance problems at certain speeds Group 25 SCritical Speeds Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL 0 1 1 0 Sets the critical speeds
295. roup 32 Supervision Supervised parameter s value lt supervision low limit Bit remains O until supervised parameter s value gt supervision high limit See group 32 Supervision 11 EXT CTRL LOC External control location 2 EXT2 selected External control location 1 EX11 selected 12 EXT RUN ENABLE External Run Enable signal received OI oo No External Run Enable signal received 13 15 Unused Serial Communication FBA 206 ACH550 UH User s Manual The state diagram below describes the start stop function of CONTROL WORD CW and STATUS WORD SW bits From any state From any state From any state Emergency Stop Emergency Off Fault OFF3 CW Bit2 0 OFF2 CW Bit1 0 OFF3 OFF2 FAULT SW Bit3 1 SW Bit5 0 ACTIVE ACTIVE SW Bit4 0 i CW Bit7 1 0 l 0 oy gt D gt From any state OFF1 CW Bit0 0 ET SW Bit1 0 ACTIVE n f 0 11 0 Power ON CW BitO 0 gt A BC D NOT READY en TO SWITCH On SW Bito 0 CW Bit3 0 CW xxxx X1XX xxxx x110 OPERATION READY TO SW Bit2 0 INHIBITED switcH on 1 SW Bito 1 OPERATION INHIBITED CWS xxxx X1XX XXXX X111 gt BCD READY TO nAg OPERATE eee CW Bit4 0 CW Bit3 1 and gt SW Bit12 1 C D OPERATION mg ENABLED SW Bit2 1 A lt CW Bit5 0 CW xxxx x1xx xxx1 1111 gt RFG OUTPUT D ENABLED CW xxxx X1XX xx11 1111 CW Bit6 0 KEY State RFG ACCEL
296. s Odd parity one stop bit Setting 1 is default when protocol is selected Setting 0 is default when protocol is selected 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILEO Selects the communication profile used by the EFB protocol 0 ABB DRIVES Operation of Control Word and Status Word conforms to ABB Drives Profile 1 Acs550 Alternate 32 bit profile Advanced users only Setting 0 is default when protocol is selected N A Setting 0 is default when protocol is selected Note After any changes to the communication settings protocol must be reactivated by either cycling the drive power or by clearing and then restoring the station Id 5302 Activate Drive Control Functions EFB Controlling the Drive Fieldbus control of various drive functions requires configuration to Tell the drive to accept fieldbus control of the function Define as a fieldbus input any drive data required for control Define as a fieldbus output any control data required by the drive The following sections describe at a general level the configuration required for each control function For the protocol specific details see the document supplied with the FBA module Start Stop Direction Control Using the fieldbus for start stop direction control of the drive requires e Drive parameter values set as defined below Serial Communication EFB 148 ACH550 UH User s Manual
297. s Set PID setpoints internal to the drive using parameters 4011 SET1 and 4111 SET2 The digital input DI3 selects the setpoints X1 J1 ISCR Signal cable shield screen 2 Alt External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC O 5 Al2 PID feedback 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common J1 Jumper Settings 7 AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA Sp Al1 0 2 10 V 8 AO2 Output current 0 4 20 mA Sp Al2 0 4 20 mA 9 AGND Analog output circuit common 140f24v Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 141 GND Common for DI return signals M2 DCoM1 Digital input common for all Ll 3 DI1 Start Stop Activate to start drive LU 14 DI2 Presets PID selection Activate to select PID LU 15 DI3 Setpoint selection Activate to select Set2 LU 116 DI4 Preset speed 1 7 147 DI5 Preset speed 2 18 DI6 Not configured 19 RO1C Relay output 1 P 1401 20 RO1A fi Default operation Started gt 19 connected to 21 21 RO1B f 22 RO2C Relay output 2 P 1402 23 RO2A fx Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 24 RO2B f 25 RO3C Relay output 3 P 1403 26 RO3A fi Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 7 R08B Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Paramet
298. s You cannot set these values Group 01 Operating Data Code Description Range Resolution Default S 0102 SPEED 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm The calculated speed of the motor rpm 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz The frequency Hz applied to the motor Also shown by default in OUTPUT display 0104 CURRENT 0 0 1 5 low 0 1A The motor current as measured by the ACH550 Also shown by default in OUTPUT display 0105 TORQUE 200 200 0 1 Output torque Calculated value of torque on motor shaft in of motor nominal torque 0106 POWER 1 5 1 5 Pn 0 1 kW The measured motor power in kw 0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE 0 2 5 Van 1V The DC bus voltage in VDC as measured by the ACH550 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 0 2 0 Van 1V The voltage applied to the motor 0110 IDRIVE TEMP 0 150 C 0 1 C The temperature of the drive heatsink in Centigrade 0111 EXTERNAL REF 1 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 0 500 Hz 0 1 Hz External reference REF1 in rom or Hz units determined by parameter 9904 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 0 100 0 1 torque 0 600 External reference REF2 in 0113 CTRL LOCATION 0 2 1 Active control location Alternatives are 0 HAND 1 EXT1 2 EXT2 0114 IRUN TIME R 0 9999 h 1h 0h The drive s accumulated running time in hours h Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN buttons simultaneously when in parameter set mode 0115 8 KWH COUNTER R 0 9999 kWh 1 kWh
299. s discussed in detail in the following sections e ACH550 Alternate An alternate profile is called the ACH550 Profile It extends the control and status interface to 32 bits and is the internal interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus environment This profile is intended for advanced users only This manual does not cover the ACH550 Profile in detail Contact your ABB supplier if you need more information on this profile Serial Communication EFB ACH550 UH User s Manual 157 Modbus Addressing With Modbus each function code implies access to a specific Modbus reference set Thus the leading digit is not included in the address field of a Modbus message Note The ACH550 supports the zero based addressing of the Modbus specification Holding register 40002 is addressed as 0001 in a Modbus message Similarly coil 33 is addressed as 0032 in a Modbus message Refer again to the Mapping Summary above The following sections describe in detail the mapping to each Modbus reference set 0xxxx Mapping Modbus Coils The drive maps the following information to the Oxxxx Modbus set called Modbus Coils Bit wise map of the CONTROL WORD selected using parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE The first 32 coils are reserved for this purpose e Relay output states numbered sequentially beginning with coil 00033 The following table summarizes the Oxxxx reference set
300. s frame size To read the Ratings table you need the Output current rating entry from the type code see above Also when using the Ratings tables note that there are two tables based on the drive s Voltage rating Motor Compatibility The motor drive and supply power must be compatible Motor Specification Verify Reference Motor type 3 phase induction motor Nominal current Motor value is within this e Type code label on drive entry for Output lon range 0 15 1 5 lon or l2 normal use current Type code on drive and rating table in Technical Data on page 225 Nominal frequency 10 500 Hz Voltage range Motor is compatible with 208 240 V for ACH550 UH XXXX 2 or the ACH550 voltage range 380 480 V for ACH550 UH XXXX 4 Tools Required To install the ACH550 you need the following e Screwdrivers as appropriate for the mounting hardware used e Wire stripper Tape measure e Drill Installation 10 ACH550 UH User s Manual Frame Size R5 or R6 with IP 54 UL type 12 enclosure Punch for conduit mounting holes Mounting hardware screws or nuts and bolts four each The type of hardware depends on the mounting surface and the frame size Frame Size Mounting Hardware R1 R4 M5 10 R5 M6 1 4 in R6 M8 5 16 in Suitable Environment and Enclosure Confirm that the site meets the environmental requirements To prevent da
301. s the identification and program revision of the protocol Do not edit Any non zero value entered for parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL sets this parameter automatically The format is XXYY where xx protocol ID and YY program revision 5302 EFB STATION ID Defines the node address of the RS485 link Set each drive on the network with a unique value for this parameter Note For a new address to take affect the drive power must be cycled OR 5302 must first be set to 0 before selecting a new address Leaving 5302 0 places the RS485 channel in reset disabling communication 5303 EFB BAUD RATE Defines the communication speed of the RS485 link in kbits per second kbits s 1 2 kbits s 2 4 kbits s 4 8 kbits s 9 6 kbits s 19 2 kbits s 38 4 kbits s 57 6 kbits s Setting 9 6 is default when protocol is selected Setting 4 8 is default when protocol is selected Do not edit Serial Communication EFB ACH550 UH User s Manual 147 Code Description EFB Protocol Reference Modbus N2 FLN BACnet 5304 EFB PARITYO Defines the data length parity and stop bits to be used with the RS485 link communication The same settings must be used in all on line stations 0 8N1 8 data bits No parity one stop bit 1 8N2 8 data bits No parity two stop bits 2 8E1 8 data bits Even parity one stop bit 3 801 8 data bit
302. s to other ACH550 drives e Backup function for saving parameter sets e Context sensitive help e Real time clock General Display Features Soft Key Functions The soft key functions are defined by text displayed just above each key Display Contrast To adjust display contrast simultaneously press G and lt a or un w as appropriate Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual Start Up Start Up can be performed in two ways e Using the Start Up Assistant e Changing the parameters individually Start Up by Using the Start Up Assistant To start the Start Up Assistant follow these steps Select MENU to enter the main menu 4 press SAVE after every change The Start Up Assistant will guide you through the start up T 1 Select ASSISTANTS with the Up Down buttons and select ENTER kA 2 wa u Scroll to COMMISSION DRIVE with the Up Down buttons 3 ww Change the values suggested by the assistant to your preferences and then G Start Up by Changing the Parameters Individually To change the parameters follow these steps Select MENU to enter the main menu u 1 Select the Parameters mode with the UP DOWN buttons and select ENTER to il 2 select the Parameters mode W G Select the appropriate parameter group 5 with the UP DOWN buttons and select See bo u Start Up 24 ACH550 UH User s Manual Select the appropriate parameter
303. sed parameter s value gt supervision high limit See group 32 Supervision 11 EXT CTRL LOC External control location 2 EXT2 selected External control location 1 EX11 selected 12 EXT RUN ENABLE External Run Enable signal received oO Oo No External Run Enable signal received 13 15 Unused Note Operation of CONTROL WORD and STATUS WORD conform to the ABB Drives Profile with one exception CONTROL WORD bit 10 REMOTE CMD is not used by the ACH550 Example Using the CONTROL WORD to start the drive e First the requirements for using the CONTROL WORD must be met See above When the power is first connected the state of the drive is not ready to switch on See dotted lined path in the state diagram below e Use the CONTROL WORD to step through the state machine states until the OPERATING State is reached meaning that the drive is running and follows the given reference See table below Step CONTROL WORD Value Description 1 CW 0000 0000 0000 0110 l bit 15 bit 0 ON This CW value changes the drive state to READY TO SWITCH Wait at least 100 ms before proceeding CW 0000 0000 0000 0111 This CW value changes the drive state to READY TO OPERATE CW 0000 0000 0000 1111 This CW value changes the drive state to OPERATION ENABLED The drive starts but will not accelerate Serial Communica
304. select parameter 88 ramp shape parameter 88 ramp time PFA parameter 140 ramp zero select parameter 89 time parameter a 88 deceleration parameter group 88 activate external PID parameter 123 actual input PID parameters 119 actual max PID parameters 119 actual min PID parameters 119 actual signals parameter group 56 actual value mapping FBA generic profile 211 actual values scaling EFBcomm 152 scaling FBA eee 200 scaling FBA ABB drives profile 209 scaling FBA generic profile 211 scaling FLN fieldbus 182 GIO TOW ie kaaa Kala aces aati had Naa Pa hamakin 240 alarm CODES hi beds Ge Show end bees be 218 ISING ce aee nd AA 218 altitude environment limit 244 shipping limit 004 244 altitude derati soser erneak a 227 analog cable requirements a 238 ACH550 UH User s Manual analog input data parameter naana 54 fault limit parameters 99 filter parameters 22205 70 less than min auto reset parameter 100 less than min fault parameter 96 loss fault codes 2000050 214 maximum parameters 70 minimum parameters
305. start up assistant mode 27 status information 25 control panel assistant batem AA tea Re arses 224 control word ABB drives FBA description 203 comm EFB description 162 PBA ici DN Ra casters ee heh Gee 194 FBA generic profile 210 COON ine Eai AREA 240 fan maintenance triggers 95 correction source PID parameter 124 cover TOMOVE 2 faked bh ia new ews eee LNAG 11 replace ee 18 CRC errors count parameter 127 critical speeds avoiding high parameters 0 005 92 low parameters a 92 parameter groyp aaa 92 select parameter a 92 C Tick marking eee aeeee 246 current at fault history parameter 60 data parameter a 53 max limit parameter 83 measurement fault code 215 rating AA AA 9 D DC brake time parameter 86 DC bus voltage data parameter 53 DC current ref parameter 86 dc high rush fault code 215 DC magnetizing time parameter 86 Index ACH550 UH User s Manual DC overvoltage fault code 213 DC undervoltage fault code 214 DDL file N2 176 deceleration at aux start PFA parameter 141 emergency time parameter 89
306. switch to the star connection and then back to the delta connection before the drive applies power e So the PFA Start Delay must be longer than the time setting of the star delta starter 8123 PFA ENABLE 0 1 0 v Selects PFA control When enabled PFA control e Switches in or out auxiliary constant speed motors as output demand increases or decreases Parameters 8109 START FREQ 1 to 8114 LOW FREQ 3 define the switch points in terms of the drive output frequency e Adjusts the speed regulated motor output down as auxiliary motors are added and adjusts the speed regulated motor output up as auxiliary motors are taken off line e Provides Interlock functions if enabled e Requires 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR 0 NOT SEL Disables PFA control 1 ACTIVE Enables PFA control 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP 0 0 1800 0 s 0 1s 0 0 Sets the PFA acceleration time for a zero to maximum frequency ramp This PFA acceleration ramp e Applies to the speed regulated motor when an auxiliary motor is switched off e Replaces the acceleration ramp defined in Group 22 Accel Decel e Applies only until the output of the regulated motor increases by an amount equal to the output of the switched off auxiliary motor Then the acceleration ramp defined in Group 22 Accel Decel applies Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 141 Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S 0 NOT SEL 0 1 1800
307. t 7 ALARM AT SETPOINT 10009 STATUS WORD Bit8 AT SETPOINT LIMIT 10010 STATUS WORD Bit9 REMOTE SUPERVISION 10011 STATUS WORD Bit 10 ABOVE LIMIT REV REF 10012 STATUS WORD Bit 11 EXT2 REV ACT 10013 STATUS WORD Bit 12 RUN ENABLE PANEL LOCAL 10014 STATUS WORD Bit 13 N A FIELDBUS LOCAL 10015 STATUS WORD Bit 14 N A EXT2 ACT Serial Communication EFB ACH550 UH User s Manual 159 ACH550 Modbus 7 Ref Internal Location Standard Profile ABB DRIVES Alternate Profile ACH550 All Profiles 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE 0 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE 1 10016 STATUS WORD Bit 15 N A FAULT 10017 STATUS WORD Bit 16 Reserved ALARM 10018 STATUS WORD Bit 17 Reserved REQ MAINT 10019 STATUS WORD Bit 18 Reserved DIRLOCK 10020 STATUS WORD Bit 19 Reserved LOCALLOCK 10021 STATUS WORD Bit 20 Reserved CTL MODE 10022 STATUS WORD Bit 21 Reserved Reserved 10023 STATUS WORD Bit 22 Reserved Reserved 10024 STATUS WORD Bit 23 Reserved Reserved 10025 STATUS WORD Bit 24 Reserved Reserved 10026 STATUS WORD Bit 25 Reserved Reserved 10027 STATUS WORD Bit 26 Reserved REQ CTL 10028 STATUS WORD Bit 27 Reserved REQ REF1 10029 STATUS WORD Bit 28 Reserved REQ_REF2 10030 STATUS WORD Bit 29 Reserved REQ REF2EXT 10031 STATUS WORD Bit 30 Reserved ACK STARTINH 10032 STATUS WORD Bit 31 Reserved ACK OFF ILCK
308. t possible switching frequency tobe 8 kHz used based on operating conditions Higher switching frequency results in lower acoustic noise 0 OFF The function is disabled 4 kHz 1 ON The switching frequency is limited according to the ACS5550 figure Temperature gt 90 C 100 C 2608 SLIP COMP RATIO 0 200 1 0 Sets gain for slip compensation in A squirrel cage motor slips under load Increasing the frequency as the motor torque increases compensates for the slip e Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE SCALAR SPEED 0 No slip compensation 1 200 Increasing slip compensation 100 means full slip compensation Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 95 Group 29 Maintenance Trig This group contains usage levels and trigger points When usage reaches the set trigger point a notice displayed on the control panel signals that maintenance is due Group 29 Maintenance Trig Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2901 COOLING FAN TRIG 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 1 kh 0 0 Sets the trigger point for the drive s cooling fan counter 0 0 NOT SEL 2902 COOLING FAN ACT 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 1 kh 0 0 Defines the actual value of the drive s cooling fan counter The parameter is reset by writing 0 0 to it 2903 REVOLUTION TRIG 0 65535 MRev 1 MRev 0 Sets the trigger point for the motor s accumulated revolutions counter e 0 0 NOT SEL 2904 REVOLUTION ACT 0 65535 MRev 1 MRev 0 Def
309. t requires parameter 4210 PID Setpoint Select to be set to 19 Internal 63 EXT PID FBCK The External PID feedback signal 0131 64 EXT PID DEV The deviation of the External PID output signal from its 0133 setpoint 65 N A 66 SPD OUT MIN Sets the minimum output speed of the drive as a percentage 2007 of the motor nominal rating SCALAR 2001 SPEED 67 SPD OUT MAX Sets the maximum output speed of the drive as a percentage 2008 of the motor nominal rating SCALAR 2002 SPEED 68 FLN LOC CTL Commanded by FLN to temporarily steal start stop control of the drive from its normal source and place it under FLN control This functionality is analogous to placing the drive in HAND mode at the panel with the control being taken by FLN instead HAND mode at the panel has priority over this point Thus this point is only effective in temporarily taking control from the digital inputs or some other internal control functionality Serial Communication EFB ACH550 UH User s Manual 191 FLN Detailed Point Descriptions E nig Drive Point Description Parameter 69 FLN LOC REF Commanded by FLN to temporarily steal input reference control of the drive from its normal source and place it under FLN control This functionality is analogous to placing the drive in HAND mode at the panel with the reference control being taken by FLN
310. ter 2607 SW FREQ CTRL 1 ON which allows the drive to reduce the switching frequency if when the drive s internal temperature exceeds 90 C See the parameter description for 2607 for details Technical Data 228 ACH550 UH User s Manual Input Power Connections Warning Do not operate the drive outside the nominal input line voltage range Over voltage can result in permanent damage to the drive Input Power Specifications Input Power Connection Specifications 208 220 230 240 VAC 3 phase or 1 phase 10 15 for Voltage U4 230 VAC units 400 415 440 460 480 VAC 3 phase 10 15 for 400 VAC units Prospective short Maximum allowed prospective short circuit current in the supply is 100 kA circuit current in a second providing that the drive s input power is protected with IEC 629 appropriate fuses US 100 000 AIC Frequency 48 63 Hz Imbalance Max 3 of nominal phase to phase input voltage Fundamental power 0 98 at nominal load factor cos Cable Temperature 90 C 194 F rating minimum Rating Branch Circuit Protection The ACH550 does not include a disconnect device A means to disconnect input power must be installed between the AC power source and the ACH550 This branch circuit protection must Be sized to conform to applicable safety regulations including but not limited to both National and local electrical codes Be locked in the open posi
311. terface Planning ACH550 UH User s Manual In general the basic control interface between the fieldbus system and the drive consists of Protocol Control Interface Reference for more information Modbus e Output Words Control word Reference Reference2 Input Words Status word Actual value 1 Actual value 2 Actual value 3 Actual value 4 Actual value 5 Actual value 6 Actual value 7 Actual value 8 Modbus Protocol Technical Data and or ABB Drives Profile Technical Data N2 Binary output objects Analog output objects Binary input objects Analog input objects N2 Protocol Technical Data FLN Binary output points Analog output points Binary input points Analog input points FLN Protocol Technical Data BACnet TBD BACnet Technical Data Note The words output and input are used as seen from the fieldbus controller point of view For example an output describes data flow from the fieldbus controller to the drive and appears as an input from the drive point of view Network planning should address the following questions e What types and quantities of devices must be connected to the network e What control information must be sent down to the drives e What feedback information must be sent from the drives to the controlling system Serial Communication EFB ACH550 UH User s Manual 145 Mec
312. the drive 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as a fault reset source e See DI1 above 7 START STOP Defines the Stop command as a fault reset source Do not use this option when fielbus communication provides the start stop and direction commands 8 COMM Defines the fieldbus as a fault reset source The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The bit 4 of the Command Word 1 parameter 0301 resets the drive 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as a fault reset source e De activating the digital input resets the drive 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as a fault reset source e See DI1 INV above Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 77 Group 16 System Controls Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1605 1606 USER PAR SET CHG 6 6 1 0 Defines control for changing the user parameter set See parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO The drive must be stopped to change User Parameter Sets e During a change the drive will not start Note Always save the User Parameter Set after changing any parameter settings or performing a motor identification Whenever the power is cycled or parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO is changed the drive loads the last settings saved Any unsaved changes to a user parameter set are lost Note The value of this parameter 1605 is not included in the User Para
313. the proportional gain of the active Process PID set as 4001 SET1 selected by Point 54 PRC PID SEL 1 SET2 0 SET1 4101 SET2 51 PRC PID ITIM Sets the integration time of the active Process PID set as 4002 SET1 selected by Point 54 PRC PID SEL 1 SET2 0 SET1 4102 SET2 52 PRC PID DTIM Sets the derivation time of the active Process PID set as 4001 SET1 selected by Point 54 PRC PID SEL 1 SET2 0 SET1 4101 SET2 53 PRC PID DFIL Sets the time constant for the error derivative of the active 4004 SET1 Process PID set as selected by Point 54 PRC PID SEL 4104 SET2 1 SET2 0 SET1 54 PRC PID SEL Selects the active Process PID set 1 SET2 0 SET1 4027 55 EXT PID GAIN Sets the proportional gain of the External PID controller 4201 56 EXT PID ITIM Sets the integration time of the External PID controller 4202 57 EXT PID DTIM Sets the derivation time of the External PID controller 4203 58 EXT PID DFIL Sets the time constant for the error derivative of the External 4204 PID controller 59 LOCK PANEL Command by FLN to lock the panel and prevent parameter 1602 changes 1 LOCK 0 UNLOCK 60 INPUT REF 1 Sets Input Reference 1 Parameter 1102 must be set to COMM for FLN to control this value 61 INPUT REF 2 Sets Input Reference 2 Parameter 1106 must be set to COMM for FLN to control this value 62 EXT PID STPT The setpoint for the External PID controller 4211 The function of this poin
314. the table the rated current of the drive must be higher than or equal to the rated motor current Note 1 The ratings apply in ambient temperature of 40 C 104 F Technical Data ACH550 UH User s Manual 227 Derating The load capacity current and power decreases if the installation site altitude exceeds 1000 meters 3300 ft or if the ambient temperature exceeds 40 C 104 F or if 8 kHz switching frequency parameter 2606 is used Temperature Derating In the temperature range 40 C 50 C 104 F 122 F the rated output current is decreased 1 for every 1 C 1 8 F above 40 C 104 F The output current is calculated by multiplying the current given in the rating table by the derating factor Example If the ambient temperature is 50 C 122 F the derating factor is 100 1 C x 10 C 90 or 0 90 The output current is then 0 90 x lon Altitude Derating In altitudes from 1000 4000 m 3300 13 200 ft above sea level the derating is 1 for every 100 m 330 ft If the installation site is higher than 2000 m 6600 ft above sea level please contact your local ABB distributor or office for further information Single Phase Supply Derating For 208 240 Volt series drives a single phase supply can be used In that case the derating is 50 Switching Frequency Derating If the 8 kHz switching frequency parameter 2606 is used either e Derate Py and lon to 80 or e Set parame
315. ting the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 1 value e De activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 2 value 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used e See DI1 INV above Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 85 Group 20 Limits Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 600 0 0 0 0 1 300 0 Sets the first minimum limit for torque Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque 2016 MIN TORQUE 2 600 0 0 0 0 1 300 0 Sets the second minimum limit for torque Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 0 0 600 0 0 1 300 0 Sets the first maximum limit for torque Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 0 0 600 0 0 1 300 0 Sets the second maximum limit for torque Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque Start Up 86 ACH550 UH User s Manual 21 Start Stop This group defines how the motor starts and stops The ACH550 supports several start and stop modes Group 21 Start Stop Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2101 ISTART FUNCTION 1 5 1 1 v Selects the motor start method 1 AUTO Selects the automatic start mode VECTOR control modes Optimal start in most cases Flying start function to a rotating axis and start at zero speed SCALAR FREQ mode I
316. tion EFB ACH550 UH User s Manual 189 FLN Detailed Point Descriptions Point Description Drive Parameter 37 FLN CTL SRC Indicates if FLN is a source for control inputs 1 YES 0 NO Note that this status point is true if any of the following control inputs are from FLN Run Stop Ext1 2 Select or Run Enable 38 39 FLN REF1 SRC FLN REF2 SRC Indicates if FLN is the source for speed reference 1 1 YES 0 NO Indicates if FLN is the source for speed reference 2 1 YES 0 NO 40 RO1 COMMAND Controls the output state of Relay 1 Parameter 1401 must be set to COMM for FLN to have this control 1 ON 0 OFF 0134 bit O 41 RO2 COMMAND Controls the output state of Relay 2 Parameter 1402 must be set to COMM for FLN to have this control 1 ON 0 OFF 0134 bit 1 42 RO3 COMMAND Controls the output state of Relay 3 Parameter 1403 must be set to COMM for FLN to have this control 1 ON 0 OFF 0134 bit 2 43 44 RO4 COMMAND RO5 COMMAND Controls the output state of Relay 4 Access to relay 4 require ACH550 option OREL Parameter 1410 must be set to COMM for FLN to have this control 1 ON 0 OFF Controls the output state of Relay 5 Access to relay 5 require ACH550 option OREL Parameter 1411 must be set to COMM for FLN to have this control 1 ON 0 OFF 0134 bit 3 0134 bit 4 45
317. tion EFB 166 ACH550 UH User s Manual Step CONTROL WORD Value Description 5 CW 0000 0000 0010 1111 This CW value releases the ramp function generator RFG output and changes the drive state to RFG ACCELERATOR ENABLED 6 CW 0000 0000 0110 1111 This CW value releases the ramp function generator RFG output and changes the drive state to OPERATING The drive accelerates to the given reference and follows the reference Serial Communication EFB ACH550 UH User s Manual 167 The state diagram below describes the start stop function of CONTROL WORD CW and STATUS WORD SW bits From any state From any state From any state Emergency Stop Emergency Off Fault OFF3 CW Bit2 0 OFF2 CW Bit1 0 OFF3 OFF2 SW Bit5 0 ACTIVE ACTIVE SW Bit4 0 FAULT SW Bit3 1 f 0 l 0 CW Bit7 1 V gt From any state SWITCH ON OFF1 CW Bit0 0 MAINS OFF INHIBITED SW Bit6 1 f 0 I 0 Power ON CW Bit0 0 gt A C D NOT READY ae TO SWITCH on SW Bit0 0 CW Bit3 0 CW xxxx XXXX XXXX x110 OPERATION READY TO SW BIC 0 INHIBITED SWITCH ON Cee CW xxxx XXXX XXXX X111 gt C D READY TO ve OPERATE a CW Bit5 0 CW Bit3 1 and SW Bit12 1 Bb V OPERATION D ENABLED SW Bit2 1 a lt CW Bit6 0 CW Bit5 1 gt KEY RFG ACCELERATOR Sa ENABLED mm CW CONTROL WORD C q SW STATUS WORD ma Path described in example CW Bit6 1 Param 0104 CURRENT
318. tion FBA 194 ACH550 UH User s Manual Details for the ABB Drives profile which apply for all protocols are provided in ABB Drives Profile Technical Data on page 203 Control Interface In general the basic control interface between the fieldbus system and the drive consists 0f e Output Words CONTROL WORD REFERENCE speed or frequency Others The drive supports a maximum of 15 output words Protocols limits may further restrict the total Input Words STATUS WORD Actual Value speed or frequency Others The drive supports a maximum of 15 input words Protocols limits may further restrict the total Note The words output and input are used as seen from the fieldbus controller point of view For example an output describes data flow from the fieldbus controller to the drive and appears as an input from the drive point of view The meanings of the controller interface words are not restricted by the ACH550 However the profile used may set particular meanings Fieldbus Controller Fieldbus Control Word CW R M Z Process I O References cyclic Status Word SW pa Actual Values Service Messages Parameter R W Requests Responses lt q gt Acyclic Control Word The CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The fieldbus controller sends the CONTROL WORD to the dr
319. tion Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 97 RO3B Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 APPLIC MACRO 7 PUMPALTERN 1609 START ENABLE2 5 DI5 1105 REF1 MAX 62Hz 1860rpm 2208 EM DEC TIME 62HZ 1201 CONST SPEED SEL O NOT SEL 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 5 0s 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 31 PFA 2203 DECELER TIME 1 5 0s 1503 AO1 CONTENT MAX 62HZ 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 1508 AO2 CONTENT MIN 0 0 4101 GAIN 1 0 1509 AO2 CONTENT MAX 100 0 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 60 0 s 1601 RUN ENABLE 2 D12 8123 PFA ENABLE 1 ACTIVE 1608 START ENABLE 1 O NOT SEL Start Up 44 ACH550 User s Manual Internal Timer This macro configures for applications where a built in timer starts and stops the motor When the variable speed pump reaches a maximum speed limit auxiliary pumps start as needed When using direct speed reference in AUTO mode or process PID see General Considerations on page 35 Momentarily activating digital input 3 DI3 provides a boost function which operates the motor See group 36 Timer Functions for more information on setting up timers All SCR Signal cable shield screen QO 2 All External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 110
320. tion during installation and maintenance work The disconnect device must not be used to control the motor Instead use the control panel or commands to the I O terminals for motor control Cycling the disconnect device cycles power to the drive s DC capacitors These capacitors have a maximum limit of 5 cycles in ten minutes Fuses The following tables provide fuse recommendations for short circuit protection on the drive s input power These recommendations are not requirements if branch circuit protection is otherwise provided per NEC UL508A manufacturers are not required to use the recommended fuses for the purpose of UL listing a panel that includes the ACH550 Technical Data ACH550 UH User s Manual 380 208 480 Volt Drives 229 ACH550 UH input Current A ipi naaa see below IEC269 gG A UL Class T A Bussmann Type 03A3 4 3 3 10 10 JJS 10 04A1 4 4 1 06A9 4 6 9 08A8 4 8 8 15 JJS 15 012A 4 11 9 16 015A 4 15 4 20 JJS 20 023A 4 23 25 30 JJS 30 031A 4 31 35 40 JJS 40 038A 4 38 50 50 JJS 50 044A 4 44 60 JJS 60 059A 4 59 63 80 JJS 80 072A 4 72 80 90 JJS 90 077A 4 77 100 JJS 100 096A 4 96 125 125 JJS 125 124A 4 124 160 175 JJS 175 157A 4 157 200 200 JJS 200 180A 4 180 250 250 JJS 250 240 Volt Drives ACH550 UH Input Current Input Fuses see below A IEC269 gG A
321. tput frequency 0 4 20 mA Sp Al 0 2 10 V n 8 AO2 Output current 0 4 20 mA Sp AI2 0 4 20 mA 9 AGND Analog output circuit common 140 24v Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 144 GND Common for DI return signals L 112 DCOM1 Digital input common for all LL 143 D1I1 Start Stop Activate to start drive 14 DI2 Not configured o 115 DI3 Constant Preset speed 1 P 1202 Lo 1 16 DI4 Safety interlock Deactivate to stop drive P 1608 17 DI5 Not configured 18 DI6 Not configured 19 RO1C Relay output 1 P 1401 20 RO1A f Default operation Ready gt 19 connected to 21 21 RO1B 22 RO2C Relay output 2 P 1402 23 RO2A M Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 24 RO2B M 25 RO3C Relay output 3 P 1403 26 RO3A m Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 27 RO3B Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value None Default macro Start Up 38 Supply F an ACH550 User s Manual This macro configures for supply fan applications where the supply fan brings fresh air in according to signals received from a transducer When using direct speed reference in AUTO mode or process PID see General Considerations on page 35 X1
322. trol the drive 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for setting the local lock e Activating the digital input locks out local control e De activating the digital input enable the HAND selection 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for setting the local lock e See DI1 above 7 ON Sets the lock The control panel cannot select HAND and cannot control the drive 8 COMM Defines bit 14 of the Command Word 1 as the control for setting the local lock The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication e The Command Word is 0301 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for setting the local lock e De activating the digital input locks out local control e Activating the digital input enable the HAND selection 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for setting the local lock e See DI1 INV above 1607 PARAM SAVE 0 1 1 0 Saves all altered parameters to permanent memory Parameters altered through a fieldbus are not automatically saved to permanent memory To save you must use this parameter If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 2 NOT SAVED parameters altered from the control panel are not saved To save you must use this parameter e If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 1 OPEN parameters altered from the control panel are stored immediately to permanent memory 0 DONE Value changes auto
323. ttons and select ENTER to gt 2 select the Parameters mode u Select the appropriate parameter group with the UP DOWN buttons and select EA Ti Ww u Select the appropriate parameter in a 7 group with the UP DOWN buttons Select 4 EDIT to change the parameter Vw u Press the UP DOWN buttons to change the parameter value A 5 N 4 Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 27 Select SAVE to store the modified value or select CANCEL to leave the set mode T 6 Any modifications not saved are cancelled Select EXIT to return to the listing of parameter groups and again to return to A 7 the main menu 4 To complete the control connections by manually entering the parameters see Parameters Mode in the this section For detailed hardware description see the Appendix Note The current parameter value appears below the highlighted parameter Note To view the default parameter value press the UP DOWN buttons simultaneously Note The most typical and necessary parameters to change are parameter groups 99 Start up data 10 Start Stop Dir 11 Reference Select 20 Limits 21 Start Stop 22 Accel Decel 26 Motor Control and 30 Fault Functions Note To restore the default factory settings select the application macro HVAC default Start Up Assistant Mode To start the Start Up Assistant follow these steps Select MENU to enter the main menu U S
324. two stop bits 2 8E1 8 data bits Even parity one stop bit 3 801 8 data bits Odd parity one stop bit 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE 0 1 1 0 Selects the communication 1 ACH550 profile used by the EFB protocol 0 ABB DRIVES Operation of Control Word and Status Word conforms to ABB Drives Profile 1 ACH550 Alternate 32 bit profile Advanced users only 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES 0 65535 1 0 Contains a count of valid messages received by the drive e During normal operation this counter is increasing constantly 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS 0 65535 1 0 Contains a count of the messages with a CRC error received by the drive For high counts check Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors e CRC calculations for possible errors 5308 EFB UART ERRORS 0 65535 1 0 Contains a count of the messages with a character error received by the drive 5309 EFB STATUS 0 7 1 0 Contains the status of the EFB protocol 0 IDLE EFB protocol is configured but not receiving any messages 1 EXEC INIT EFB protocol is initializing 2 TIME OUT A timeout has occurred in the communication between the network master and the EFB protocol 3 CONFIG ERROR EFB protocol has a configuration error 4 OFF LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that are NOT addressed to this drive 5 ON LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that are addressed to this drive
325. u can specify the severity for many errors by directing the drive to e Ignore the error situation e Report the situation as an alarm e Report the situation as a fault Red Faults The drive signals that it has detected a severe error or fault by Enabling the red LED on the drive LED is either steady on or blinking Setting an appropriate bit in a Fault Word parameter 0305 to 0307 e Overriding the control panel display with the display of a fault code Stopping the motor if it was on The fault code on the control panel display is temporary Pressing any of the following buttons removes the fault message MENU ENTER UP button or DOWN button The message reappears after a few seconds if the control panel is not touched and the fault is still active Diagnostics ACH550 UH User s Manual Flashing Green Alarms 213 For less severe errors called alarms the diagnostic display is advisory For these situations the drive is simply reporting that it had detected something unusual In these situations the drive Flashes the green LED on the drive does not apply to alarms that arise from control panel operation errors e Sets an appropriate bit in an Alarm Word parameter 0308 or 0309 See Group 03 Actual Signals on page 56 for the bit definitions e Overrides the control panel display with the display of an alarm code and or name Alarm messages disappear from the control panel disp
326. ual 31 EFB 1 Fault code reserved for the EFB protocol application These codes are not used as of the publication of this manual 32 EFB 2 33 EFB 3 34 MOTOR PHASE Fault in the motor circuit One of the motor phases is lost Check for and correct Motor fault e Motor cable fault Thermal relay fault if used Internal fault 35 OUTPUT WIRING Error in power wiring suspected Check for and correct e Input power wired to drive output e Ground faults 36 INCOMP The wrong software has been loaded onto the drive Either standard ACS SWTYPE software has been loaded onto an ACH drive or HVAC ACH software has been loaded on an ACS drive Diagnostics 216 ACH550 UH User s Manual Fault Fault Name In oar 3 Code Panel Description and Recommended Corrective Action 101 SERF CORRUPT Error internal to the drive Contact your local ABB sales representative and report the error number 102 SERF IITFILE 103 SERF MACRO 104 SERF EFBPROT 105 SERF BPFILE 201 DSP T1 Error in the system Contact your local ABB sales representative and report OVERLOAD the error number 202 DSP T2 OVERLOAD 203 DSP T3 OVERLOAD 204 DSP STACK ERROR 205 DSP REV ERROR 206 OMIO ID ERROR 207 EFB LOAD ERR 1000 PAR HZRPM Parameter values are inconsistent Check for any of the following LIMITS 2001 MINIMUM SPEED gt 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED e 2007 MINIMUM FREQ gt
327. ulator is bypassed Actual value of PID is used as the PFA reference input Normally EXT REF2 is used as the PFA reference The drive uses the feedback signal defined by 4014 FBK SEL or 4114 for the PFA frequency reference e The figure shows the relation between the control P4014 signal 4014 FBK SEL OR 4114 and the speed lt A gt a B gt lt C regulated motor s frequency in a three motor Na R system A No auxiliary motors running B One auxiliary motor running C Two auxiliary motors running Start Up 140 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S Example In the diagram below the pumping station s outlet flow is controlled by the measured inlet flow A 3 Contactors Mains 3 PY 3 ACH550 UA Inlet Pipe 8122 PFA START DELAY 0 00 10 00 s 0 01s 0 50 s Sets the start delay for speed regulated motors in the system Using the delay the drive works as follows e Switches on the contactor of the speed regulated motor connecting the motor to the ACH550 power output e Delays motor start for the time 8122 PFA START DELAY e Starts the speed regulated motor e Starts auxiliary motors See parameter 8115 for delay Warning Motors equipped with star delta starters require a PFA Start Delay e After the ACH550 relay output switches a motor On the star delta starter must
328. up aaa 115 basic set Up a 114 planning EFB COMM aha de asa Lakad Da 144 FBA COMM aaa Na Na a eee Qe 195 PNP 2 BAN NG DANG DAN ANNA 240 power data parameter a 53 first applied 2 nak a 19 previous faults history parameters 60 process PID sets parameter groups 114 process variables data parameter 55 profiles COMM EFB eeir aaa kaa ae Ds 156 proportional gain parameter 90 protection branch circuit 2220000008 228 enclosure standard 245 environmental 22200000 244 PT100 temperature sensor 108 PTC temperature sensor 108 Index ACH550 UH User s Manual R ramp pair accel decel parameter 88 TALINGS 22a NA suds ew hee 4 ae PEG Gn aS 225 reference analog input corrections 65 corrections for parameter values 65 keypad control parameter 63 maximum parameters 65 minimum parameters 65 select source parameter 64 select parameter group 63 reference scaling EFB ABB drives profile 168 FBA ABB drives profile 207 FBA generic profile 210 reference step PFA parameters 130 regulator by pass control parameter 139 relative humidity environment limit
329. us Word 0 EXT1 EXT2 B117 HAND AUTO Status Word 0 AUTO 1 HAND B118 ALARM Status Word 0 OK 1 ALARM Bli9 MAINTENANCE REQ Status Word 0 OK 1 MAINT REQ BI20 DRIVE READY Status Word 0 Not Ready 1 Ready BI21 AT SETPOINT Status Word 0 No 1 At Setpoint Bl22 RUN ENABLED Status Word 0 Not Enabled 1 Enabled BI23 N2 LOCAL MODE Status Word 0 Auto 1 N2 Local Bl24 N2 CONTROL SRC Status Word 0 No 1 Yes BI25 N2 REF1 SRC Status Word 0 No 1 Yes BI26 N2 REF2 SRC Status Word 0 No 1 Yes N2 Analog Output Objects The following table lists all of the N2 Analog Output objects defined for the ACH550 drive N2 Analog Outputs Number Object P Polada er e a Units Range AO1 REFERENCE 1 Reference 1 10 Yo 0 100 AO2 REFERENCE 2 Reference 2 10 Yo 0 100 AO3 ACCEL TIME 1 2202 10 s 0 1 1800 AO4 DECEL TIME 1 2203 10 S 0 1 1800 AO5 CURRENT LIMIT 2003 10 A 0 1 3 lon AO6 PID1 CONT GAIN 4001 10 Yo 0 1 100 AO7 PID1 CONT I TIME 4002 10 s 0 1 600 AO8 PID1 CONT D TIME 4003 10 s 0 10 AO9 PID1 CONT D FILTER 4004 10 S 0 10 AO10 PID2 CONT GAIN 4101 10 Yo 0 1 100 AO11 PID2 CONT I TIME 4102 10 s 0 1 600 AO12 PID2 CONT D TIME 4103 10 s 0 10 A013 PID2 CONT D FILTER 4104 10 s 0 10 AO14 COMMAND AO 1 135 10 Yo 0 100 AO15 COMMAND AO 2 136 10 Yo 0 100 AO16 EXT PID SETPOINT 4211 10 Yo 0 100 AO17 SPD OUT MIN 2001 2007 10 Yo 0 200 A018 SPD OUT MAX
330. ut selects ramp pair 1 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for ramp pair selection e See DI1 above 7 COMM Defines serial communication as the control for ramp pair selection 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for ramp pair selection e De activating the digital input selects ramp pair 2 e Activating the digital input selects ramp pair 1 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for ramp pair selection e See DI1 INV above 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 0 0 1800 0 s 0 1s 30 0 s Sets the acceleration time for zero to maximum frequency for ramp pair 1 See A in figure e Actual acceleration time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE e See 2008 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY 2203 DECELER TIME 1 0 0 1800 0 s 0 1s 30 0 s Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp pair 1 e Actual deceleration time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE e See 2008 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 0 1000 0 s 0 1s 0 0 Selects the shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp for ramp pair 1 See B in figure aa Linear e Shape is defined as a ramp unless additional time is specified here to reach the maximum frequency A longer time provides a softer transition at each end of the slope The shape becomes an s curve e Rule of thumb 1 5 is a suitable relation between the ramp shape time and the ma
331. ut signal runs the drive at the maximum reference in the reverse direction Define the minimum using parameter 1104 e The maximum input signal runs the drive at maximum EXT REF 1 MAX amp reference in the forward direction Define the maximum using parameter 1105 e Requires parameter 1003 3 request Warning Because the low end of the reference range commands full reverse operation do not use 0 V as gt the lower end of the reference range Doing so means EXT REF 1 MIN l that if the control signal is lost which is a 0 V input the result is full reverse operation Instead use the wn EXT REF 1 MIN following set up so that loss of the analog input EXT REF 1 MAX triggers a fault stopping the drive 2V 4 mA e Set parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 1304 MINIMUM Al2 at 30 2 V or 4 mA OV OmA EXT REF 1 MIN e Set parameter 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT to a value 5 or higher EXT REF 1 MIN e Set parameter 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION to 1 FAULT Hysteresis 4 of Full Scale 4 AI2 JOYST Defines analog input 2 Al2 configured for joystick operation as the reference source e See above Al2 JOYST description 5 DI3U 4D R Defines digital inputs as the speed reference source motor potentiometer control e Digital input DI3 increases the speed the u stands for up e Digital input DI4 decreases the speed the D stands for down A Stop command resets the reference to zero the R stands for
332. utput fault code fieldbus fault code hz rpm fault code PCU 1 power control unit fault code PCU 2 power control unit fault code PFC IO config fault code PFC mode fault code PFC ref neg fault code save changes parameter parameters COILING Aa Ba NANG ka Pana IG View changes parity errors count parameter parity RS232 parameter PE earth earth fault parameter PE earth connection terminal size eee TOrQUS AAAH AA PFA acceleration time parameter aux motor start delay parameter aux motor stop delay parameter control parameter group deceleration time parameter enable parameter low frequency parameters number of aux motors parameter reference step parameters start delay parameter start frequency parameters PFC pump fan control see PFA pump fan alternation ACH550 UH User s Manual PID 0 actual signal parameter 117 100 actual signal parameter 117 actual input select parameters 119 actual value max parameters 119 actual value min parameters 119 adjustment procedure 115 correction source parameter 124 decimal point actual signal pa
333. ve requires very little maintenance This table lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended by ABB Maintenance Interval Instruction Heatsink temperature check Depends on the dustiness of the See Heatsink on page 221 and cleaning environment every 6 12 months Main cooling fan replacement Every five years See Main Fan Replacement on page 222 Internal enclosure cooling fan Every three years See Internal Enclosure Fan replacement Replacement on 223 IP 54 UL Type 12 units Capacitor change Every ten years See Capacitors on page 223 Frame sizes R5 and R6 HVAC control panel battery Every ten years See Battery on page 62 change Heatsink The heatsink fins accumulate dust from the cooling air Since a dusty heatsink is less efficient at cooling the drive overtemperature faults become more likely In a normal environment not dusty not clean check the heatsink annually in a dusty environment check more often Clean the heatsink as follows when necessary 1 Remove power from drive 2 Remove the cooling fan see section Main Fan Replacement on page 222 Blow clean compressed air not humid from bottom to top and simultaneously use a vacuum cleaner at the air outlet to trap the dust Note If there is a risk of the dust entering adjoining equipment perform the cleaning in another room Replace the cooling fan Restore power Maintenance 222 ACH5
334. w Spin Motor is useful for example to operate ventilation fans prior to commissioning Note When using Spin Motor the motor speed is limited to the range 1 3 2 3 of maximum speed Also no interlocks are activated Finally once the drive is commissioned the welcome screen and this option no longer appear Motor Data The motor data on the ratings plate may differ from the defaults in the ACH550 The drive provides more precise control and better thermal protection if you enter the rating plate data 1 Gather the following from the motor ratings plate e Voltage e Nominal motor current e Nominal frequency e Nominal speed e Nominal power 2 Edit parameters 9905 9909 to the correct values e Assistant Control Panel The Start up Assistant walks you through this data entry see page 27 e Basic Control Panel Refer to Parameters Mode on page 26 for parameter editing instructions Macros Note Selecting the appropriate macro should be part of the original system design since the control wiring installed depends on the macro used Installation ACH550 UH User s Manual 21 1 Review the macro descriptions in Application Macros on page 35 Use the macro that best fits system needs 2 Edit parameter 9902 to select the appropriate macro Use either of the following e Use the Start up Assistant which displays the macro selection immediately after motor parameter setup Refer to Parameters Mode on p
335. witched off the counter preserves the current Autochange rotation positions in permanent memory When power is restored the Autochange rotation starts at the position stored in memory If the PFA relay configuration is changed or if the PFA enable value is changed the rotation is reset See the first bullet above INTERLOCKS 0 6 1 4 v Defines operation of the Interlock function When the Interlock function is enabled An interlock is active when its command signal is absent e An interlock is inactive when its command signal is present The ACH550 will not start if a start command occurs when the speed regulated motor s interlock is active the control panel displays an alarm 2015 PFA INTERLOCK tau 2aux motors motor motors fax Start Up 136 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S Wire each Interlock circuit as follows e Wire a contact of the motor s On Off switch to the Interlock circuit the drive s PFA logic can then recognize that the motor is switched off and start the next available motor e Wire a contact of the motor thermal relay or other protective device in the motor circuit to the Interlock input the drive s PFA logic can then recognize that a motor fault is activated and stop the motor 0 NOT SEL Disables the Interlock function All digital inputs are available for other purposes e Requires 8118
336. y parameter 2208 Normal command sequence e Enter OFF3 ACTIVE e Proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED WARNING Be sure motor and driven equipment can be stopped using this mode 3 INHIBIT 1 OPERATION Enter OPERATION ENABLED Note the Run OPERATION ENABLED enable signal must be active See 1601 If 1601 is set to COMM this bit also actives the Run Enable signal 0 OPERATION Inhibit operation Enter OPERATION INHIBITED INHIBITED 4 Unused Serial Communication EFB 164 ACH550 UH User s Manual ABB Drives Profile EFB CONTROL WORD F Commanded Bit Name Value State Comments 5 RAMP_HOLD 1 RFG OUT ENABLED Enable ramp function Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ACCELERATOR ENABLED 0 RFG OUT HOLD Halt ramping Ramp Function Generator output held 6 RAMP IN 1 RFG INPUT ENABLED Normal operation Enter OPERATING ZER a a pe eo o 0 RFG INPUT ZERO Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero 7 RESET 0 51 RESET Fault reset if an active fault exists Enter SWITCH ON INHIBITED Effective if 1604 COMM 0 OPERATING Continue normal operation 8 10 Unused 11 EXT CTRLLOC 1 EXT2 SELECT Select external control location 2 EXT2 Effective if 1102 COMM 0 EXT1 SELECT Select external control location 1 EXT1 Effective if 1102 COMM 12 15 Unused Status Word The contents of the STATUS WORD is status information sent by the drive to the master station The following table and
337. y Output 5 00038 Relay Output 6 Relay Output 6 Relay Output 6 Active low For the Oxxxx registers e Status is always readable e Forcing is allowed by user configuration of the drive for fieldbus control e Additional relay outputs are added sequentially The ACH550 supports the following Modbus function codes for coils Function Code Description 01 Read coil status 05 Force single coil 15 OxOF Hex Force multiple coils 1xxxx Mapping Modbus Discrete Inputs The drive maps the following information to the 1xxxx Modbus set called Modbus Discrete Inputs e Bit wise map of the STATUS WORD selected using parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE The first 32 inputs are reserved for this purpose e Discrete hardware inputs numbered sequentially beginning with input 33 The following table summarizes the 1xxxx reference set ACH550 Modbus Ref Internal Location Standard Profile ABB DRIVES Alternate Profile ACH550 All Profiles 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE 0 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE 1 10001 STATUS WORD Bit0 RDY_ON READY 10002 STATUS WORD Bit 1 RDY_RUN ENABLED 10003 STATUS WORD Bit 2 RDY_REF STARTED 10004 STATUS WORD Bit 3 TRIPPED RUNNING 10005 STATUS WORD Bit 4 OFF_2_STA ZERO_SPEED 10006 STATUS WORD Bit5 OFF_3_STA ACCELERATE 10007 STATUS WORD Bit6 SWC ON INHIB DECELERATE 10008 STATUS WORD Bi
338. y Power Always re install the front cover before turning power on A Warning The ACH550 will start up automatically at power up if the external run command is on 1 Apply input power When power is applied to the ACH550 the green LED comes on Note Before increasing motor speed check that the motor is running in the desired direction To change rotation direction switch motor leads as shown below Drive Qu Ov O W1 OGND OU20V20W2 To change rotation direction switch motor leads Drive O U1 OVI Ow OGND O420V2 Qwe SZ L1 Input L2 L3 GND Installation 20 ACH550 UH User s Manual Start Up The ACH550 has default parameter settings that are sufficient for many situations However review the following situations Perform the associated procedures as appropriate Spin Motor When first installed and started the control panel displays a welcome screen with the following options e Press Exit to commission the drive as described in section Start Up by Changing the Parameters Individually on page 23 e Press Enter to move to the following options Select Commission Drive to commission the drive as described in section Start Up by Using the Start Up Assistant on page 23 Select Spin Motor to operate the motor prior to commissioning This option operates the motor without any commissioning except entry of the motor data as described belo
Download Pdf Manuals
Related Search
Related Contents
KOHLER K-10579-4-AF Installation Guide Black & Decker CO1200, CO1200B Use & Care Manual Piano di sicurezza e coordinamento Tristar Griddle Portable Media Player Portable Media Player User`s Manual Delta 56613 Installation Guide Actualité des clubs thérapeutiques Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file